FPTD FDM Config Guide 620

Cisco Firepower Threat Defense Configuration Guide for Firepower
Device Manager, Version 6.2

Americas Headquarters
Cisco Systems, Inc.
170 West Tasman Drive
San Jose, CA 95134-1706
USA
http://www.cisco.com
Tel: 408 526-4000
800 553-NETS (6387)
Fax: 408 527-0883
THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL STATEMENTS,
INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS.
THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET THAT SHIPPED WITH
THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE OR LIMITED WARRANTY,
CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.
The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCB's public domain version of
the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1981, Regents of the University of California.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED “AS IS" WITH ALL FAULTS.
CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THOSE OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS
HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Any Internet Protocol (IP) addresses and phone numbers used in this document are not intended to be actual addresses and phone numbers. Any examples, command display output, network
topology diagrams, and other figures included in the document are shown for illustrative purposes only. Any use of actual IP addresses or phone numbers in illustrative content is unintentional
and coincidental.
All printed copies and duplicate soft copies of this document are considered uncontrolled. See the current online version for the latest version.
Cisco has more than 200 offices worldwide. Addresses and phone numbers are listed on the Cisco website at www.cisco.com/go/offices.
The documentation set for this product strives to use bias-free language. For purposes of this documentation set, bias-free is defined as language that does not imply discrimination based on
age, disability, gender, racial identity, ethnic identity, sexual orientation, socioeconomic status, and intersectionality. Exceptions may be present in the documentation due to language that
is hardcoded in the user interfaces of the product software, language used based on standards documentation, or language that is used by a referenced third-party product.
Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. To view a list of Cisco trademarks, go to this URL:
https://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/about/legal/trademarks.html. Third-party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a
partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (1721R)
© 2015–2018 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 Getting Started 1
Is This Guide for You? 1

New Features in FDM/FTD 6.2 2
Logging Into the System 4

Logging Into the FDM 4
Logging Into the Command Line Interface (CLI) 5
Changing Your Password 6
Setting User Profile Preferences 6
Creating Local User Accounts for the FTD CLI 7
Setting Up the System 9
Connect the Interfaces 9
Cabling for ASA 5506-X, 5506W-X, and 5506H-X 10
Cabling for ASA 5508-X and 5516-X 11
Cabling for ASA 5512-X, 5515-X, 5525-X, 5545-X, and 5555-X 12
(Optional) Change Management Network Settings at the CLI 12
Complete the Initial Configuration Using the Setup Wizard 14
What to Do if the Outside Subnet Conflicts with the Inside Subnet (Setup Wizard Hangs at Step
1) 16
Configure the Wireless Access Point (ASA 5506W-X) 18
Default Configuration Prior to Initial Setup 21
Configuration After Initial Setup 22
Configuration Basics 25
Configuring the Device 25
Configuring Security Policies 26
Deploying Your Changes 27
Configuration Changes that Restart Inspection Engines 28
Cisco Firepower Threat Defense Configuration Guide for Firepower Device Manager, Version 6.2
iii
Contents
Viewing Interface and Management Status 28

Viewing System Task Status 29
CHAPTER 2 Best Practices: Use Cases for FTD 31
How to Configure the Device in FDM 31

How to Gain Insight Into Your Network Traffic 36
How to Block Threats 42
How to Block Malware 46
How to Implement an Acceptable Use Policy (URL Filtering) 49
How to Control Application Usage 53
How to Add a Subnet 57
More Examples 62
CHAPTER 3 Licensing the System 63

Smart Licensing for the Firewall System 63
Cisco Smart Software Manager 63
Periodic Communication with the License Authority 64
Smart License Types 64
Impact of Expired or Disabled Optional Licenses 65
Managing Smart Licenses 65
Registering the Device 66
Enabling or Disabling Optional Licenses 67
Synchronizing with the Cisco Smart Software Manager 67
Unregistering the Device 68
CHAPTER 4 Monitoring the Device 69
Enable Logging to Obtain Traffic Statistics 69

Event Types 69
Configurable Connection Logging 70
Automatic Connection Logging 70
Tips for Connection Logging 70
Sending Events to an External Syslog Server 71
Monitoring Traffic and System Dashboards 71
Monitoring Additional Statistics Using the Command Line 73
iv
Contents
Viewing Events 74
Configuring Custom Views 75
Filtering Events 76
Event Field Descriptions 77
CHAPTER 5 Objects 85
Object Types 85
Managing Objects 86
Configuring Network Objects and Groups 87
Configuring Port Objects and Groups 88
Configuring Security Zones 89
Configuring Application Filter Objects 90
Configuring URL Objects and Groups 92
Configuring Geolocation Objects 94
Configuring Syslog Servers 94
PART I The Basics 97
CHAPTER 6 Interfaces 99
About FTD Interfaces 99

Interface Modes 99
Management/Diagnostic Interface 100
Recommendations for Configuring a Separate Management Network 100
Limitations for Management/Diagnostic Interface Configuration for a Separate Management
Network 101
Security Zones 101
IPv6 Addressing 101
Auto-MDI/MDIX Feature 102
Guidelines and Limitations for Interfaces 102
Limitations for Interface Configuration 102
Maximum Number of VLAN Subinterfaces by Device Model 103
Configure a Physical Interface 104
Configure Bridge Groups 107
Configure VLAN Subinterfaces and 802.1Q Trunking 110
v
Contents
Configure Advanced Interface Options 113

About the MTU 113
Path MTU Discovery 114
MTU and Fragmentation 114
MTU and Jumbo Frames 114
Configure Advanced Options 114
Monitoring Interfaces 116
Examples for Interfaces 116
CHAPTER 7 Routing 117
Routing Overview 117

The Routing Table and Route Selection 117
How Forwarding Decisions Are Made 117
Routing Table for Management Traffic 118
Equal-Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) Routing 119
Static Routes 119
About Static and Default Routes 119
Default Route 119
Static Routes 120
Guidelines for Static Routing 120
Configuring Static Routes 120
Monitoring Routing 121
PART II Security Policies 123
CHAPTER 8 Identity Policies 125
Identity Policy Overview 125

Establishing User Identity through Active Authentication 125
Limitations on Number of Users 126
Supported Directory Servers 126
Determining the Directory Base DN 126
Dealing with Unknown Users 127
Configuring Identity Policies 128
Configure Directory Server 129
vi
Contents
Configure the Active Authentication Captive Portal 130

Configure Identity Rules 131
Enabling Transparent User Authentication 134
Requirements for Transparent Authentication 135
Configuring Internet Explorer for Transparent Authentication 135
Configuring Firefox for Transparent Authentication 136
Monitoring Identity Policies 137
Examples for Identity Policies 137
CHAPTER 9 Access Control 139
Access Control Overview 139

Access Control Rules and the Default Action 139
Application Filtering 140
Application Control for Encrypted and Decrypted Traffic 140
Best Practices for Application Filtering 140
URL Filtering 141
Filtering URLs by Category and Reputation 141
Looking Up the Category and Reputation for a URL 142
Manual URL Filtering 142
Filtering HTTPS Traffic 143
Comparing URL and Application Filtering 144
Best Practices for Effective URL Filtering 144
What the User Sees When You Block Web Sites 144
Intrusion, File, and Malware Inspection 145
Best Practices for Access Control Rule Order 146
NAT and Access Rules 146
How Other Security Policies Impact Access Control 146
License Requirements for Access Control 146
Guidelines and Limitations for Access Control Policies 147
Configuring the Access Control Policy 148
Configuring the Default Action 148
Configuring Access Control Rules 149
Source/Destination Criteria 150
Application Criteria 152
vii
Contents
URL Criteria 153

User Criteria 154
Intrusion Policy Settings 155
File Policy Settings 156
Logging Settings 157
Monitoring Access Control Policies 158
Monitoring Access Control Statistics in the Dashboards 158
Monitoring Access Control Policies in the CLI 158
Examples for Access Control 159
CHAPTER 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) 161
Why Use NAT? 161

NAT Basics 162
NAT Terminology 162
NAT Types 162
NAT in Routed Mode 163
Auto NAT and Manual NAT 163
Auto NAT 164
Manual NAT 164
Comparing Auto NAT and Manual NAT 164
NAT Rule Order 165
NAT Interfaces 167
Configuring Routing for NAT 167
Addresses on the Same Network as the Mapped Interface 167
Addresses on a Unique Network 168
The Same Address as the Real Address (Identity NAT) 168
Guidelines for NAT 168
Interface Guidelines 168
IPv6 NAT Guidelines 168
IPv6 NAT Best Practices 169
NAT Support for Inspected Protocols 169
Additional Guidelines for NAT 171
Configure NAT 173
Dynamic NAT 173
viii
Contents
About Dynamic NAT 173

Dynamic NAT Disadvantages and Advantages 174
Configure Dynamic Auto NAT 175
Configure Dynamic Manual NAT 176
Dynamic PAT 178
About Dynamic PAT 178
Dynamic PAT Disadvantages and Advantages 179
Configure Dynamic Auto PAT 179
Configure Dynamic Manual PAT 180
Static NAT 182
About Static NAT 183
Configure Static Auto NAT 186
Configure Static Manual NAT 188
Identity NAT 191
Configure Identity Auto NAT 191
Configure Identity Manual NAT 192
NAT Rule Properties for FTD 194
Packet Translation Properties for Auto NAT 195
Packet Translation Properties for Manual NAT 196
Advanced NAT Properties 197
Translating IPv6 Networks 198
NAT64/46: Translating IPv6 Addresses to IPv4 199
NAT64/46 Example: Inside IPv6 Network with Outside IPv4 Internet 199
NAT64/46 Example: Inside IPv6 Network with Outside IPv4 Internet and DNS Translation 201
NAT66: Translating IPv6 Addresses to Different IPv6 Addresses 206
NAT66 Example, Static Translation between Networks 206
NAT66 Example, Simple IPv6 Interface PAT 209
Monitoring NAT 212
Examples for NAT 213
Providing Access to an Inside Web Server (Static Auto NAT) 213
Single Address for FTP, HTTP, and SMTP (Static Auto NAT-with-Port-Translation) 215
Different Translation Depending on the Destination (Dynamic Manual PAT) 221
Different Translation Depending on the Destination Address and Port (Dynamic Manual PAT) 227
Rewriting DNS Queries and Responses Using NAT 232
ix
Contents
DNS 64 Reply Modification 233

DNS Reply Modification, DNS Server on Outside 239
DNS Reply Modification, DNS Server on Host Network 242
PART III Virtual Private Networks (VPN) 247
CHAPTER 11 Site-to-Site VPN 249
VPN Basics 249

Internet Key Exchange (IKE) 250
How Secure Should a VPN Connection Be? 250
Deciding Which Encryption Algorithm to Use 251
Deciding Which Hash Algorithms to Use 252
Deciding Which Diffie-Hellman Modulus Group to Use 252
VPN Topologies 253
Managing Site-to-Site VPNs 253
Configuring a Site-to-Site VPN Connection 254
Configuring the Global IKE Policy 256
Configuring IKEv1 Policies 258
Configuring IKEv2 Policies 259
Configuring IPsec Proposals 261
Configuring IPsec Proposals for IKEv1 261
Configuring IPsec Proposals for IKEv2 262
Verifying Site-to-Site VPN Connections 263
Monitoring Site-to-Site VPN 266
Examples for Site-to-Site VPN 266
Exempting Site-to-Site VPN Traffic from NAT 266
How to Provide Internet Access on the Outside Interface for External Site-to-Site VPN Users (Hair
Pinning) 272
PART IV System Administration 279
CHAPTER 12 System Settings 281

Configuring the Management Access List 281
Configuring Diagnostic Logging 283
x
Contents
Severity Levels 283

Configuring the DHCP Server 284
Configuring DNS 286
Configuring the Management Interface 286
Configuring the Device Hostname 288
Configuring Network Time Protocol (NTP) 288
Configuring URL Filtering Preferences 289
Configuring Cloud Management (Cisco Defense Orchestrator) 289
CHAPTER 13 System Management 291

Installing Software Updates 291
Updating System Databases 291
Overview of System Database Updates 291

Updating System Databases 292
Upgrading FTD Software 293
Reimaging the Device 295
Backing Up and Restoring the System 295
Backing Up the System Immediately 296
Backing Up the System at a Scheduled Time 297
Setting Up a Recurring Backup Schedule 297
Restoring a Backup 298
Managing Backup Files 299
Rebooting the System 299
Troubleshooting the System 300
Pinging Addresses to Test Connectivity 300
Tracing Routes to Hosts 302
Troubleshooting NTP 303
Troubleshooting DNS for the Management Interface 305
Analyzing CPU and Memory Usage 307
Viewing Logs 308
Creating a Troubleshooting File 309
Uncommon Management Tasks 310
Switching Between Local and Remote Management 310
Changing the Firewall Mode 312
xi
Contents
Resetting the Configuration 315
xii
CHAPTER 1
Getting Started
The following topics explain how to get started configuring the Firepower Threat Defense (FTD) .
• Is This Guide for You?, on page 1
• New Features in FDM/FTD 6.2, on page 2
• Logging Into the System, on page 4
• Setting Up the System, on page 9
• Configuration Basics, on page 25
Is This Guide for You?

This guide explains how to configure FTD using the Firepower Device Manager (FDM) web-based
configuration interface included on the FTD devices.
The FDM lets you configure the basic features of the software that are most commonly used for small or
mid-size networks. It is especially designed for networks that include a single device or just a few, where you
do not want to use a high-powered multiple-device manager to control a large network containing many FTD
devices.
If you are managing large numbers of devices, or if you want to use the more complex features and
configurations that FTD allows, use the Firepower Management Center (FMC) to configure your devices
instead of the integrated FDM.
You can use the FDM on the following devices.
Table 1: FDM Supported Models
Device Model Minimum FTD Software Version
ASA 5508-X, 5516-X 6.1
ASA 5525-X, 5545-X, 5555-X 6.1
ASA 5506-X, 5506H-X, 5506W-X, 5512-X 6.1
ASA 5515-X 6.1
1
Getting Started
New Features in FDM/FTD 6.2

Released: January 23, 2017
The following table lists the new features available in FTD 6.2 when configured using FDM.
Feature Description
Cisco Defense Orchestrator (CDO) You can manage the device using the Cisco Defense Orchestrator
cloud management. cloud-based portal. Select Device > System Settings > Cloud
Management. For more information on Cisco Defense Orchestrator,
see http://www.cisco.com/go/cdo.
Drag and drop for access rules. You can drag and drop access rules to move them in the rules table.
Upgrade FTD software through You can install software upgrades through FDM. Select Device >
FDM. Updates.
Default configuration changes. For new or reimaged devices, the default configuration includes
significant changes, including:
• (ASA 5506-X, 5506W-X, 5506H-X.) Except for the first data
interface, and the Wi-Fi interface on an ASA 5506W-X, all other
data interfaces on these device models are structured into the
“inside” bridge group and enabled. There is a DHCP server on the
inside bridge group. You can plug endpoints or switches into any
bridged interface and endpoints get addresses on the 192.168.1.0/24
network.
• The inside interface IP address is now 192.168.1.1, and a DHCP
server is defined on the interface with the address pool
192.168.1.5-192.168.1.254.
• HTTPS access is enabled on the inside interface, so you can open
FDM through the inside interface at the default address,
192.168.1.1. For the ASA 5506-X models, you can do this through
any inside bridge group member interface.
• The management port hosts a DHCP server for the 192.168.45.0/24
network. You can plug a workstation directly into the management
port, get an IP address, and open FDM to configure the device.
• The OpenDNS public DNS servers are now the default DNS servers
for the management interface. Previously, there were no default
DNS servers. You can configure different DNS servers during
device setup.
• The default gateway for the management IP address is to use the
data interfaces to route to the Internet. Thus, you do not need to
wire the Management physical interface to a network.
2
Getting Started
Feature Description
Management interface and access Several changes to how the management address, and access to FDM,
changes. works:
• You can now open data interfaces to HTTPS (for FDM) and SSH
(for CLI) connections. You do not need a separate management
network, or to connect the Management/Diagnostic physical port
to the inside network, to manage the device. Select Device > System
Settings > Management Access List.
• The system can obtain system database updates through the gateway
for the outside interface. You do not need to have an explicit route
from the management interface or network to the Internet. The
default is to use internal routes through the data interfaces.
However, you can set a specific gateway if you prefer to use a
separate management network. Select Device > System Settings >
Management Interface.
• You can use FDM to configure the management interface to obtain
its IP address through DHCP. Select Device > System Settings >
• You can configure a DHCP server on the management address if
you configure a static address. Select Device > System Settings >
Miscellaneous user interface The following are notable changes to the FDM user interface.
changes.
• Device main menu item. In previous releases, this menu item was
the host name of your device. Also, the page opened is called
Device Summary instead of Device Dashboard.
• You cannot select an alternative outside interface during initial
device setup. The first data interface is the default outside interface.
• Device > System Settings > Cloud Preferences is now called
Device > System Settings > URL Filtering Preferences.
• The System Settings > DHCP Server page is now organized on
two tabs, with the table of DHCP servers separated from the global
parameters.
Site-to-site VPN connections. You can configure site-to-site virtual private network (VPN) connections
using preshared keys. You can configure IKEv1 and IKEv2 connections.
3
Getting Started
Logging Into the System
Feature Description
Integrated Routing and Bridging Integrated Routing and Bridging provides the ability to route between
support. a bridge group and a routed interface. A bridge group is a group of
interfaces that the FTD device bridges instead of routes. The FTD device
is not a true bridge in that the FTD device continues to act as a firewall:
access control between interfaces is controlled, and all of the usual
firewall checks are in place.
This feature lets you configure bridge groups and to route between bridge
groups and between a bridge group and a routed interface. The bridge
group participates in routing by using a Bridge Virtual Interface (BVI)
to act as a gateway for the bridge group. Integrated Routing and Bridging
provides an alternative to using an external Layer 2 switch if you have
extra interfaces on the FTD device to assign to the bridge group. The
BVI can be a named interface and can participate separately from
member interfaces in some features, such as DHCP server, where you
configure other features on bridge group member interfaces, such as
NAT and access control rules.
Select Device > Interfaces to configure a bridge group.
Logging Into the System

There are two interfaces to the FTD device:
FDM Web Interface
The FDM runs in your web browser. You use this interface to configure, manage, and monitor the system.
Command Line Interface (CLI, Console)
Use the CLI for troubleshooting. You can also use it for initial setup instead of the FDM.
The following topics explain how to log into these interfaces and manage your user account.
Logging Into the FDM

Use the FDM to configure, manage, and monitor the system. The features that you can configure through the
browser are not configurable through the command-line interface (CLI); you must use the web interface to
implement your security policies.
Use a current version of the following browsers: Firefox, Chrome, Safari, Edge, or Internet Explorer.
Note If you type in the wrong password and fail to log in on 3 consecutive attempts, your account is locked
for 5 minutes. You must wait before trying to log in again.
Before you begin

You can log into the FDM using the admin username only. You cannot create additional users for the FDM
access.
4
Getting Started
Logging Into the Command Line Interface (CLI)
There can be up to 5 active logins at one time. This includes users logged into the device manager and active
API sessions, which are represented by non-expired API tokens. If you exceed this limit, the oldest session,
either the device manager login or API token, is expired to allow the new session. These limits do not apply
to SSH sessions.
Procedure
Step 1 Using a browser, open the home page of the system, for example, https://ftd.example.com.
You can use any of the following addresses. You can use the IPv4 or IPv6 address or the DNS name, if you
have configured one.
• The management address. By default (on most platforms), this is 192.168.45.45 on the Management
interface.
• The address of a data interface that you have opened for HTTPS access. By default , the “inside” interface
allows HTTPS access, so you can connect to the default inside address 192.168.1.1. On device models
where the inside interface is a bridge group, you can connect to this address through any bridge group
member interface. See Default Configuration Prior to Initial Setup, on page 21 for details about your
model's inside IP address.
Tip If your browser is not configured to recognize the server certificate, you will see a warning about
an untrusted certificate. Accept the certificate as an exception, or in your trusted root certificate
store.
Step 2 Enter the admin username and password, then click Login.
The default admin password is Admin123.
Your session will expire after 30 minutes of inactivity, and you will be prompted to log in again. You can log
out by selecting Log Out from the user icon drop-down menu in the upper right of the page.
Logging Into the Command Line Interface (CLI)

Use the command-line interface (CLI) to set up the system and do basic system troubleshooting. You cannot
configure policies through a CLI session.
To log into the CLI, do one of the following:
• Use the console cable included with the device to connect your PC to the console using a terminal emulator
set for 9600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit, no flow control. See the hardware guide for your
device for more information about the console cable.
• Use an SSH client to make a connection to the management IP address. You can also connect to the
address on a data interface if you open the interface for SSH connections (see Configuring the Management
Access List, on page 281). SSH access to data interfaces is disabled by default. Log in using the admin
username or another CLI user account. The default admin password is Admin123.
5
Getting Started
Changing Your Password
Tips
• After logging in, for information on the commands available in the CLI, enter help or ?. For usage
information, see Cisco Firepower Threat Defense Command Reference at http://www.cisco.com/c/en/
us/td/docs/security/firepower/command_ref/b_Command_Reference_for_Firepower_Threat_Defense.html.
• You can create local user accounts that can log into the CLI using the configure user add command.
However, these users can log into the CLI only. They cannot log into the FDM web interface.
Changing Your Password

You should periodically change your password. The following procedure explains how to change the password
while logged into FDM.
Note If you are logged into the CLI, you can change your password using the configure password command.
You can change the password for a different CLI user with the configure user password username
command.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Profile from the user icon drop-down list in the upper right of the menu.
Step 2 Click the Password tab.

Step 3 Enter your current password.
Step 4 Enter your new password and then confirm it.
Step 5 Click Change.
Setting User Profile Preferences

You can set preferences for the user interface and change your password.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Profile from the user icon drop-down list in the upper right of the menu.
Step 2 On the Profile tab, configure the following and click Save.
6
Getting Started
Creating Local User Accounts for the FTD CLI
• Time Zone for Scheduling Tasks—Select the time zone you want to use for scheduling tasks such as
backups and updates. The browser time zone is used for dashboards and events, if you set a different
zone.
• Color Theme—Select the color theme you want to use in the user interface.
Step 3 On the Password tab, you can enter a new password and click Change.

You can create users for CLI access on FTD devices. These accounts do not allow access to the management
application, but to the CLI only. The CLI is useful for troubleshooting and monitoring purposes.
You cannot create local user accounts on more than one device at a time. Each device has its own set of unique
local user CLI accounts.
Procedure
Step 1 Log into the device CLI using an account with config privileges.
The admin user account has the required privileges, but any account with config privileges will work. You
can use an SSH session or the Console port.
For certain device models, the Console port puts you into the FXOS CLI. Use the connect ftd command to
get to the FTD CLI.
Step 2 Create the user account.

configure user add username {basic | config}
You can define the user with the following privilege levels:
• config—Gives the user configuration access. This gives the user full administrator rights to all commands.
• basic—Gives the user basic access. This does not allow the user to enter configuration commands.
Example:
The following example adds a user account named joecool with config access rights. The password is not
shown as you type it.
> configure user add joecool config

Enter new password for user joecool: newpassword
Confirm new password for user joecool: newpassword
> show user
Login UID Auth Access Enabled Reset Exp Warn Str Lock Max
admin 1000 Local Config Enabled No Never N/A Dis No N/A
joecool 1001 Local Config Enabled No Never N/A Dis No 5
Note Tell users they can change their passwords using the configure password command.
Step 3 (Optional.) Adjust the characteristics of the account to meet your security requirements.
You can use the following commands to change the default account behavior.
7
Getting Started
• configure user aging username max_days warn_days

Sets an expiration date for the user's password. Specify the maximum number of days for the password
to be valid followed by the number of days before expiration the user will be warned about the upcoming
expiration. Both values are 1 to 9999, but the warning days must be less than the maximum days. When
you create the account, there is no expiration date for the password.
• configure user forcereset username
Forces the user to change the password on the next login.
• configure user maxfailedlogins username number
Sets the maximum number of consecutive failed logins you will allow before locking the account, from
1 to 9999. Use the configure user unlock command to unlock accounts. The default for new accounts
is 5 consecutive failed logins.
• configure user minpasswdlen username number
Sets a minimum password length, which can be from 1 to 127.
• configure user strengthcheck username {enable | disable}
Enables or disables password strength checking, which requires a user to meet specific password criteria
when changing their password. When a user’s password expires or if the configure user forcereset
command is used, this requirement is automatically enabled the next time the user logs in.
Step 4 Manage user accounts as necessary.

Users can get locked out of their accounts, or you might need to remove accounts or fix other issues. Use the
following commands to manage the user accounts on the system.
• configure user access username {basic | config}
Changes the privileges for a user account.
• configure user delete username
Deletes the specified account.
• configure user disable username
Disables the specified account without deleting it. The user cannot log in until you enable the account.
• configure user enable username
Enables the specified account.
• configure user password username
Changes the password for the specified user. Users should normally change their own password using
the configure password command.
• configure user unlock username
Unlocks a user account that was locked due to exceeding the maximum number of consecutive failed
login attempts.
8
Getting Started
Setting Up the System
Setting Up the System

You must complete an initial configuration to make the system function correctly in your network. Successful
deployment includes attaching cables correctly and configuring the addresses needed to insert the device into
your network and connect it to the Internet or other upstream router. The following procedure explains the
process.
Before you begin

Before you start the initial setup, the device includes some default settings. For details, see Default Configuration
Prior to Initial Setup, on page 21.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the Interfaces, on page 9

Step 2 Complete the Initial Configuration Using the Setup Wizard, on page 14
For details about the resulting configuration, see Configuration After Initial Setup, on page 22.
Step 3 Configure the Wireless Access Point (ASA 5506W-X), on page 18
Connect the Interfaces

The default configuration assumes that certain interfaces are used for the inside and outside networks. Initial
configuration will be easier to complete if you connect network cables to the interfaces based on these
expectations.
The default configuration is designed to let you attach your management computer to the inside interface.
Alternatively, you can also directly attach your workstation to the Management port. The interfaces are on
different networks, so do not try to connect any of the inside interfaces and the Management port to the same
network.
Do not connect any of the inside interfaces or the Management interface to a network that has an active DHCP
server. This will conflict with the DHCP servers already running on the inside interface and Management
interface. If you want to use a different DHCP server for the network, disable the unwanted DHCP server
after initial setup.
The following topics show how to cable the system for this topology when using the inside interfaces to
configure the device.
9
Getting Started
Cabling for ASA 5506-X, 5506W-X, and 5506H-X
Cabling for ASA 5506-X, 5506W-X, and 5506H-X

Figure 1: ASA 5506W-X (with Wi-Fi), 5506-X (without Wi-Fi)
Figure 2: ASA 5506H-X
• Attach GigabitEthernet 1/1 to the ISP/WAN modem or other outside device. By default, the IP address
is obtained using DHCP, but you can set a static address during initial configuration.
• Attach GigabitEthernet 1/2 (or another of the inside bridge group member ports) to your workstation,
the one you will use to configure the device. Configure the workstation to obtain an IP address using
DHCP. The workstation gets an address on the 192.168.1.0/24 network.
Note You have a couple of other options for connecting the management
workstation. You can also directly connect it to the Management port. The
workstation gets an address through DHCP on the 192.168.45.0/24 network.
Another option is to leave your workstation attached to a switch, and attach
that switch to one of the inside ports such as GigabitEthernet1/2. However,
you must ensure that no other device on the switch's network is running a
DHCP server, because it will conflict with the one running on the inside
bridge group, 192.168.1.1.
• Optionally, attach other endpoints or switches to the other ports in the inside bridge group. You might
want to wait until you complete the initial device setup before adding endpoints. If you add switches,
ensure that there are no other DHCP servers running on those networks, as this conflicts with the DHCP
server running on the inside bridge group.
10
Getting Started
Cabling for ASA 5508-X and 5516-X
Cabling for ASA 5508-X and 5516-X

Figure 3: Cabling the ASA 5508-X or 5516-X
• Connect your management computer to either of the following interfaces:

• GigabitEthernet 1/2—Connect your management computer directly to GigabitEthernet 1/2 for initial
configuration, or connect GigabitEthernet 1/2 to your inside network. GigabitEthernet 1/2 has a
default IP address (192.168.1.1) and also runs a DHCP server to provide IP addresses to clients
(including the management computer), so make sure these settings do not conflict with any existing
inside network settings
• Management 1/1—Connect your management computer directly to Management 1/1 for initial
configuration, or connect Management 1/1 to your management network. Management 1/1 has a
inside network settings.
If you need to change the Management 1/1 IP address from the default, you must also cable your
management PC to the console port. See (Optional) Change Management Network Settings at the
CLI, on page 12.
You can later configure the FDM management access from other interfaces.
• Connect the outside network to the GigabitEthernet1/1 interface.
By default, the IP address is obtained using IPv4 DHCP, but you can set a static address during initial
configuration.
• Connect other networks to the remaining interfaces.
11
Getting Started
Cabling for ASA 5512-X, 5515-X, 5525-X, 5545-X, and 5555-X
Cabling for ASA 5512-X, 5515-X, 5525-X, 5545-X, and 5555-X

Figure 4: Cabling the ASA 5500-X
• Connect your management computer to either of the following interfaces:

• GigabitEthernet 0/1—Connect your management computer directly to GigabitEthernet 0/1 for initial
configuration, or connect GigabitEthernet 0/1 to your inside network. GigabitEthernet 0/1 has a
inside network settings
• Management 0/0—Connect your management computer directly to Management 0/0 for initial
configuration, or connect Management 0/0 to your management network. Management 0/0 has a
inside network settings.
If you need to change the Management 0/0 IP address from the default, you must also cable your
management computer to the console port. See (Optional) Change Management Network Settings
at the CLI, on page 12.
You can later configure the FDM management access from other interfaces.
• Connect the outside network to the GigabitEthernet 0/0 interface.
By default, the IP address is obtained using DHCP, but you can set a static address during initial
configuration.
• Connect other networks to the remaining interfaces.
(Optional) Change Management Network Settings at the CLI

If you cannot use the default management IP address, then you can connect to the console port and perform
initial setup at the CLI, including setting the Management IP address, gateway, and other basic networking
settings. You can only configure the Management interface settings; you cannot configure inside or outside
interfaces, which you can later configure in the GUI.
12
Getting Started
(Optional) Change Management Network Settings at the CLI
Note You cannot repeat the CLI setup script unless you clear the configuration; for example, by reimaging.
However, all of these settings can be changed later at the CLI using configure network commands. See
Cisco Secure Firewall Threat Defense Command Reference.
Procedure
Step 1 Connect to the FTD console port. See Logging Into the Command Line Interface (CLI), on page 5 for more
information.
Step 2 Log in with the username admin.
The default admin password is Admin123.
Step 3 The first time you log into the FTD, you are prompted to accept the End User License Agreement (EULA).
You are then presented with the CLI setup script.
Defaults or previously-entered values appear in brackets. To accept previously entered values, press Enter.
See the following guidelines:
• Enter the IPv4 default gateway for the management interface—If you set a manual IP address, enter
either data-interfaces or the IP address of the gateway router. The data-interfaces setting sends outbound
management traffic over the backplane to exit a data interface. This setting is useful if you do not have
a separate Management network that can access the internet. Traffic originating on the Management
interface includes license registration and database updates that require internet access. If you use
data-interfaces, you can still use the FDM (or SSH) on the Management interface if you are
directly-connected to the Management network, but for remote management for specific networks or
hosts, you should add a static route using the configure network static-routes command. Note that the
FDM management on data interfaces is not affected by this setting. If you use DHCP, the system uses
the gateway provided by DHCP.
• If your networking information has changed, you will need to reconnect—If you are connected with
SSH to the default IP address but you change the IP address at initial setup, you will be disconnected.
Reconnect with the new IP address and password. Console connections are not affected. Note also that
the DHCP server on Management will be disabled if you change the IP address.
• Manage the device locally?—Enter yes to use the FDM. A no answer means you intend to use the FMC
to manage the device.
Example:
You must accept the EULA to continue.

Press <ENTER> to display the EULA:
End User License Agreement
[...]
Please enter 'YES' or press <ENTER> to AGREE to the EULA:
System initialization in progress. Please stand by.

You must configure the network to continue.
You must configure at least one of IPv4 or IPv6.
Do you want to configure IPv4? (y/n) [y]:
Do you want to configure IPv6? (y/n) [n]:
13
Getting Started
Complete the Initial Configuration Using the Setup Wizard
Configure IPv4 via DHCP or manually? (dhcp/manual) [manual]:

Enter an IPv4 address for the management interface [192.168.45.45]: 10.10.10.15
Enter an IPv4 netmask for the management interface [255.255.255.0]: 255.255.255.192
Enter the IPv4 default gateway for the management interface [data-interfaces]: 10.10.10.1
Enter a fully qualified hostname for this system [firepower]: ftd-1.cisco.com
Enter a comma-separated list of DNS servers or 'none' [208.67.222.222,208.67.220.220]:
Enter a comma-separated list of search domains or 'none' []:
If your networking information has changed, you will need to reconnect.
DHCP Server Disabled
The DHCP server has been disabled. You may re-enable with configure network ipv4
dhcp-server-enable
For HTTP Proxy configuration, run 'configure network http-proxy'
Manage the device locally? (yes/no) [yes]: yes
>
Step 4 Log into the FDM on the new Management IP address.

When you initially log into the FDM, you are taken through the device setup wizard to complete the initial
system configuration.
Before you begin

Ensure that you connect a data interface to your gateway device, for example, a cable modem or router. For
edge deployments, this would be your Internet-facing gateway. For data center deployments, this would be a
back-bone router. Use the default “outside” interface for your model (see Connect the Interfaces, on page 9
and Default Configuration Prior to Initial Setup, on page 21).
Then, connect your management computer to the “inside” interface for your hardware model. Alternatively,
you can connect to the Management interface.
The Management interface does not need to be connected to a network. By default, the system obtains system
licensing and database and other updates through the data interfaces, typically the outside interface, that
connect to the internet. If you instead want to use a separate management network, you can connect the
Management interface to a network and configure a separate management gateway after you complete initial
setup.
To change the Management interface network settings if you cannot access the default IP address, see (Optional)
Change Management Network Settings at the CLI, on page 12.
Procedure
Step 1 Log into the FDM.

a) Assuming you did not go through initial configuration in the CLI, open the FDM at https://ip-address,
where the address is one of the following.
• If you are connected to the inside interface: https://192.168.1.1.
• If you are connected to the Management interface: https://192.168.45.45.
14
Getting Started
b) Log in with the username admin. The default admin password is Admin123. .
Step 2 If this is the first time logging into the system, and you did not use the CLI setup wizard, you are prompted
to read and accept the End User License Agreement and change the admin password.
You must complete these steps to continue.
Step 3 Configure the following options for the outside and management interfaces and click Next.
Caution Your settings are deployed to the device when you click Next. The interface will be named “outside”
and it will be added to the “outside_zone” security zone. Ensure that your settings are correct. If
you end up configuring an IP address on the outside interface that is on the same subnet as the inside
interface, and you are connected to the FDM on the inside address, the wizard will hang when you
click Next, because the address on the inside interface will be removed. To recover, see What to
Do if the Outside Subnet Conflicts with the Inside Subnet (Setup Wizard Hangs at Step 1), on page
16.
Outside Interface
• Configure IPv4—The IPv4 address for the outside interface. You can use DHCP or manually enter a
static IP address, subnet mask, and gateway. You can also select Off to not configure an IPv4 address.
Do not configure an IP address on the same subnet as the default inside address (see Default Configuration
Prior to Initial Setup, on page 21), either statically or through DHCP.
• Configure IPv6—The IPv6 address for the outside interface. You can use DHCP or manually enter a
static IP address, prefix, and gateway. You can also select Off to not configure an IPv6 address.
Management Interface
• DNS Servers—The DNS server for the system's management address. Enter one or more addresses of
DNS servers for name resolution. The default is the OpenDNS public DNS servers. If you edit the fields
and want to return to the default, click Use OpenDNS to reload the appropriate IP addresses into the
fields. Your ISP might require that you use specific DNS servers. If after completing the wizard, you
find that DNS resolution is not working, see Troubleshooting DNS for the Management Interface, on
page 305.
• Firewall Hostname—The hostname for the system's management address.
Step 4 Configure the system time settings and click Next.

• Time Zone—Select the time zone for the system.
• NTP Time Server—Select whether to use the default NTP servers or to manually enter the addresses
of your NTP servers. You can add multiple servers to provide backups.
Step 5 Configure the smart licenses for the system.

You must have a smart license account to obtain and apply the licenses that the system requires. Initially, you
can use the 90-day evaluation license and set up smart licensing later.
To register the device now, click the link to log into your Smart Software Manager account, generate a new
token, and copy the token into the edit box.
If you do not want to register the device yet, select the evaluation mode option. The evaluation period last up
to 90 days. To later register the device and obtain smart licenses, click Device, then click the link in the Smart
Licenses group.
15
Getting Started
What to Do if the Outside Subnet Conflicts with the Inside Subnet (Setup Wizard Hangs at Step 1)
Step 6 Click Finish.
What to do next
• If you want to use features covered by optional licenses, such as category-based URL filtering, intrusion
inspection, or malware prevention, enable the required licenses. See Enabling or Disabling Optional
Licenses, on page 67.
• Connect the other data interfaces to distinct networks and configure the interfaces. For information on
configuring interfaces, see How to Add a Subnet, on page 57 and Interfaces, on page 99.
• If you are managing the device through the inside interface, and you want to open CLI sessions through
the inside interface, open the inside interface to SSH connections. See Configuring the Management
Access List, on page 281.
• Go through the use cases to learn how to use the product. See Best Practices: Use Cases for FTD, on
page 31.
What to Do if the Outside Subnet Conflicts with the Inside Subnet (Setup Wizard
Hangs at Step 1)
If you connect to the FDM through the inside interface, you might find that the setup wizard hangs when you
click Next during step 1, where you configure the outside interface. Note that normally it takes a while to
complete this step, so hanging means that it continues for 10+ minutes. If you refresh the browser, you will
see that you have lost the connection to the FDM. (If you connected through the management IP address, the
wizard does not hang, but you might still have a problem as described in the symptoms below.)
The most likely reason this happens is that both the outside and inside interfaces were assigned addresses on
the same subnet, which results in the inside interface losing its configuration.
The default configuration includes a static address on the inside interface, and a DHCP server, so that the
device is functional and can pass traffic and support attached workstations immediately after you complete
the setup wizard.
However, having a default inside address works only if you do not configure an address on the same subnet
on the outside interface. This includes the situation where you attach to an ISP device that provides an address
through DHCP to the outside address. Some ISPs use the same 192.168.1.0/24 subnet for their inside interface
(which attaches to your outside interface) as FTD uses for the inside address.
To resolve this problem, you must change the IP address on the inside interface.
Symptoms for an inside/outside subnet conflict
Following are the symptoms that you have addresses on the same subnet on the inside and outside interfaces.
• During the device setup wizard, the wizard hangs when you click Next in step 1. Note that normally it
takes a while to complete this step, so hanging means that it continues for 10+ minutes.
• If you are connected to the Console port, you would see the following message in the CLI. You will also
get this message if you try to deploy the configuration (without subsequent change) from the FDM.
ERROR: Failed to apply IP address to interface GigabitEthernet1/1,

as the network overlaps with interface GigabitEthernet1/2.
16
Getting Started
What to Do if the Outside Subnet Conflicts with the Inside Subnet (Setup Wizard Hangs at Step 1)
Two interfaces cannot be in the same subnet.
• If you get through setup, or exit it, the connection graphic will show no connection to any external
services, such as the gateway, DNS and NTP servers, and Smart Licensing. The Deploy icon in the menu
will also show that a deployment is needed.
• From the CLI, the interface and dhcp configurations are inconsistent for the inside and outside interfaces
when viewed using the show running-config and show startup-config commands.
Procedure
Step 1 If you were connected to the inside interface during device setup, complete the setup.
a) Reconnect to the device by plugging into the Management port. If necessary, release and renew your
workstation’s DHCP address to get a new address on the management network (192.168.45.0/24). If
necessary, configure a static address for your workstation in the 192.168.45.1-192.168.45.44 range.
b) Open the FDM at https://192.168.45.45.
c) You should see a prompt asking you to start your 90-day evaluation license. Select this option and click
Confirm.
d) Choose Device > System Settings > NTP, configure the NTP servers, and click Save. If the default
servers fit your requirements, you can skip this step.
e) Select Profile from the user icon drop-down list in the upper right of the menu, select the time zone for
the device, and click Save.
f) If you do not want to use the evaluation license, choose Device > Smart License > View Configuration,
click Request Register, then follow the instructions to register the device. See Registering the Device,
on page 66. (You can also enable any optional licenses you need at this time.)
Step 2 Remove the DHCP server from the inside interface.
a) Choose Device > System Settings > DHCP Server.
b) Click the DHCP Servers tab.
c) Mouse over the Actions column in the inside interface row and click the delete icon ( ).
Step 3 Change the address on the inside interface.
a) Select Device.
b) In the Interfaces group, click the link that indicates the number of enabled interfaces (for example, 3
Enabled).
c) Mouse over the Actions column for the inside interface and click the edit icon ( ).
d) On the IPv4 Address tab, enter a static address on a unique subnet, for example, 192.168.2.1/24 or
192.168.46.1/24. Note that the default management address is 192.168.45.45/24, so do not use that subnet.
You also have the option to use DHCP to obtain an address if you have a DHCP server already running
on the inside network.
e) Click OK.
Step 4 (Optional.) Configure DHCP server on the inside address.
17
Getting Started
Configure the Wireless Access Point (ASA 5506W-X)
If you configure a static address for the inside interface, you can configure a DHCP server to provide addresses
to workstations that attach to the inside network. This is a typical setup.
a) Choose Device > System Settings > DHCP Server.
b) Click the DHCP Servers tab.
c) Click +.
d) Select the option to enable the server and select the inside interface.
e) For the address pool, enter a range on the same subnet as the inside address.
For example, if the inside address is 192.168.2.1/24, you might use 192.168.2.5-192.168.2.254. Do not
include addresses that are statically assigned to nodes on the network. Consider leaving a few addresses
outside the pool so you can assign static addresses when needed.
f) Click OK.
Step 5 Click the Deploy button in the menu to deploy your changes.
Step 6 Click Deploy Now.

After deployment completes, the connection graphic should show green for the external services.

The ASA 5506W-X includes a Cisco Aironet 702i wireless access point integrated into the device. The wireless
access point is disabled by default. Connect to the access point web interface so that you can enable the wireless
radios and configure the SSID and security settings.
The access point connects internally over the GigabitEthernet1/9 interface. All Wi-Fi clients belong to the
GigabitEthernet1/9 network. Your security policy determines how the Wi-Fi network can access any networks
on other interfaces. The access point does not contain any external interfaces or switch ports.
The following procedure explains how to configure the access point. The procedure assumes that you completed
the device setup wizard. If you instead manually configured the device, you might need to adjust the steps
based on your configuration.
For more information, see the following manuals:
• For details about using the wireless LAN controller, see the Cisco Wireless LAN Controller Software
documentation.
• For details about the wireless access point hardware and software, see the Cisco Aironet 700 Series
documentation.
Before you begin

If you are unable to reach the access point, and the FTD device has the suggested configuration, and other
networking issues are not found, then you may want to restore the access point default configuration. You
must access the FTD CLI (connect to the console port, or configure SSH access). From the FTD CLI, enter
the following commands.
18
Getting Started
> system support diagnostic-cli

Attaching to Diagnostic CLI ... Press 'Ctrl+a then d' to detach.
Type help or '?' for a list of available commands.
firepower> enable
Password: <press enter, by default, the password is blank>
firepower# hw-module module wlan recover configuration
If you need to troubleshoot the access point further, connect to the access point CLI using the session wlan
console command.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure and enable the wireless interface, GigabitEthernet1/9.

a) Click Device, then click the link in the Interfaces group to open the list of interfaces.
b) Click the edit icon ( ) for the GigabitEthernet1/9 interface.
c) Configure the following options.
• Interface Name—Enter a name for the interface, for example, wifi.
• Status—Click the slider to enable the interface.
• IPv4 Address—Select Static for the address type, then enter an address and subnet mask. For
example, 192.168.10.1/24.
d) Click Save.
Step 2 Add the Wi-Fi interface to the same security zone as the inside interfaces.
The device setup wizard puts the members of the inside bridge group in a security zone named inside_zone.
The Wi-Fi interface needs to be in the same zone so that you can reach the access point web interface (made
possible by the default Inside_Inside_Rule access rule).
a) Click Objects in the menu, then select Security Zones from the table of contents.
b) Click the edit icon ( ) for inside_zone.
c) Click + under Interfaces and select the wifi interface.
Step 3 Verify that there is an access control rule to allow traffic between interfaces in the inside_zone security zone.
The device setup wizard creates a rule to allow traffic to flow from the inside_zone to the outside_zone,
which allows inside users to get to the Internet.
The wizard also create a rule to allow traffic to flow between the inside_zone and inside_zone, so that internal
hosts can reach each other.
By adding the wifi interface to inside_zone, Wi-Fi users are also included in both of these rules, so that they
can reach the Internet and other internal users.
If you did not complete the wizard, these rules might not exist. Because the default action is to block all traffic,
you must create these rules. The following procedure explains how to create a rule to enable traffic between
the interfaces in the inside_zone security zone.
a) Click Policies in the menu.
b) Click + above the Access Control table to add a rule.
19
Getting Started
c) Configure at least the following options in the rule.

• Title—Enter a name for the rule. For example, Inside_Inside.
• Action—Either Allow or Trust.
• Source/Destination > Source Zones—Select inside_zone.
• Source/Destination > Destination Zones—Select inside_zone.
d) Click OK.
Step 4 Configure the DHCP server on the wireless interface.
The DHCP server supplies IP addresses to devices that connect to the access point. It also supplies an address
to the access point itself.
a) Click Device.
b) Click System Settings > DHCP Server.
c) Click the DHCP Servers tab.
d) Click + above the DHCP server table.
e) Configure the following DHCP server properties.
• Enable DHCP Server—Click the slider to enable the DHCP server.
• Interface—Select the wifi interface.
• Address Pool—Enter the address pool for DHCP clients. For example, if you used the example
address for the wireless interface, the pool would be 192.168.10.2-192.168.10.254. The pool must
be on the same subnet as the IP address for the interface, and it cannot include the address of the
interface or the broadcast address.
f) Click OK.
Step 5 Click the Deploy button in the menu, then click the Deploy Now button, to deploy your changes to the device.
Wait until the deployment finishes before you continue.
Step 6 Configure the wireless access point.

The wireless access point obtains its address from the DHCP pool defined for the wireless interface. It should
get the first address in the pool. If you used the example addresses, this is 192.168.10.2. (Try the next address
in the pool if the first one does not work.)
a) Use a new browser window to go to the wireless access point IP address, for example, http://192.168.10.2.
The access point web interface should appear.
You must be on the inside network, or a network that can route to it, to open this address.
b) Log in with the username cisco and password Cisco.
c) On the left, click Easy Setup > Network Configuration.
d) In the Radio Configuration area, for each of the Radio 2.4GHz and Radio 5GHz sections, set at least
the following parameters and click Apply for each section.
20
Getting Started
Default Configuration Prior to Initial Setup
• SSID—The Service Set Identifier. This is the name of the wireless network. Users will see this name
when selecting a wireless network for their Wi-Fi connection.
• Broadcast SSID in Beacon—Select this option.
• Universal Admin Mode: Disable.
• Security—Select whichever security option you want to use.
Step 7 While in the wireless access point web interface, enable the radios.
a) On the left, click Summary, and then on the main page under Network Interfaces, click the link for the
2.4 GHz radio.
b) Click the Settings tab.
c) For the Enable Radio setting, click the Enable radio button, and then click Apply at the bottom of the
page.
d) Repeat the process for the 5 GHz radio.
Default Configuration Prior to Initial Setup

Before you initially configure the FTD device using the local manager (FDM), the device includes the following
default configuration.
For many models, this configuration assumes that you open the device manager through the inside interface,
typically by plugging your computer directly into the interface, and use the DHCP server defined on the inside
interface to supply your computer with an IP address. Alternatively, you can plug your computer into the
Management interface and use DHCP to obtain an address. However, some models have different default
configurations and management requirements. See the table below for details.
Note You can pre-configure many of these settings using the CLI setup ((Optional) Change Management
Network Settings at the CLI, on page 12) before you perform setup using the wizard.
Default Configuration Settings
Can be changed during initial

Setting Default configuration?
Password for admin user. Admin123 Yes. You must change the default
password.
Management IP address. FTDv192.168.45.45 No.
Management gateway. The data interfaces on the device. Typically No.

the outside interface becomes the route to
the Internet. This gateway works for
from-the-device traffic only.
DHCP server on the management interface. Enabled with the address pool No.
192.168.45.46-192.168.45.254.
21
Getting Started
Configuration After Initial Setup
Can be changed during initial

Setting Default configuration?
DNS servers for the management interface. The OpenDNS public DNS servers, Yes
208.67.220.220 and 208.67.222.222.
Inside interface IP address. 192.168.1.1/24 No.
DHCP server for inside clients. Running on the inside interface with the No.
address pool 192.168.1.5 - 192.168.1.254.
DHCP auto-configuration for inside clients. Enabled on outside interface. Yes, but indirectly. If you configure a static
(Auto-configuration supplies clients with IPv4 address for the outside interface,
addresses for WINS and DNS servers.) DHCP server auto-configuration is
disabled.
Outside interface IP address. Obtained through DHCP from Internet Yes.

Service Provider (ISP) or upstream router.
Default Interfaces by Device Model

You cannot select different inside and outside interfaces during initial configuration. To change the interface
assignments after configuration, edit the interface and DHCP settings. You must remove an interface from
the bridge group before you can configure it as a non-switched interface.
FTD device Outside Interface Inside Interface
ASA 5506-X GigabitEthernet1/1 BVI1, which contains all other data

interfaces except the outside interface, and
ASA 5506H-X
for the 5506W-X, the wireless interface
ASA 5506W-X GigabitEthernet1/9.
ASA 5508-X GigabitEthernet1/1 GigabitEthernet1/2

ASA 5516-X
ASA 5512-X GigabitEthernet0/0 GigabitEthernet0/1

ASA 5515-X
ASA 5525-X
ASA 5545-X
ASA 5555-X

After you complete the setup wizard, the device configuration will include the following settings. The table
shows whether a particular setting is something you explicitly chose or whether it was defined for you based
on your other selections. Validate any "implied" configurations and edit them if they do not serve your needs.
22
Getting Started
Explicit, implied, or default

Setting Configuration configuration
Password for admin user. Whatever you entered. Explicit.
Management IP address. FTDv: 192.168.45.45 Default.
Management gateway. The data interfaces on the device. Typically the outside interface Default.
becomes the route to the Internet. The management gateway works
for from-the-device traffic only.
DHCP server on management Enabled with the address pool 192.168.45.46-192.168.45.254. Default.
interface.
DNS servers for the The OpenDNS public DNS servers, 208.67.220.220, Explicit.
management interface. 208.67.222.222, or whatever you entered. DNS servers obtained
from DHCP are never used.
Management hostname. firepower or whatever you entered. Explicit.
Management access through A data interface management access list rule allows HTTPS access Implied.
data interfaces. through the inside interface. SSH connections are not allowed.
Both IPv4 and IPv6 connections are allowed.
System time. The time zone and NTP servers you selected. Explicit.
Smart license. Either registered with a base license, or the evaluation period Explicit.
activated, whichever you selected.
Subscription licenses are not enabled. Go to the smart licensing
page to enable them.
Inside interface IP address. 192.168.1.1/24 Default.
DHCP server for inside clients. Running on the inside interface with the address pool 192.168.1.5 Default.
- 192.168.1.254.
DHCP auto-configuration for Enabled on outside interface if you use DHCP to obtain the outside Explicit, but indirectly.
inside clients. interface IPv4 address.
(Auto-configuration supplies
If you use static addressing, DHCP auto-configuration is disabled.
clients with addresses for WINS
and DNS servers.)
Data interface configuration. • ASA 5506-X —All data interfaces (such as Default.
GigabitEthernet1/2) except the outside interface are enabled
and part of the inside bridge group. You can plug end points
or switches into these ports and obtain addresses from the
DHCP server for the inside interface. These interfaces are
named inside_1, inside_2, and so forth.
• All other models—The outside and inside interfaces are the
only ones configured and enabled. All other data interfaces
are disabled.
23
Getting Started
Explicit, implied, or default

Setting Configuration configuration
Outside physical interface and The default outside port based on the device model. See Default Interface is Default.
IP address. Configuration Prior to Initial Setup, on page 21.
Addressing is Explicit.
The IP address is obtained by DHCP, or it is a static address as
entered (IPv4, IPv6, or both).
Static routes. If you configure a static IPv4 or IPv6 address for the outside Implied.
interface, a static default route is configured for IPv4/IPv6 as
appropriate, pointing to the gateway you defined for that address
type. If you select DHCP, the default route is obtained from the
DHCP server.
Network objects are also created for the gateway and the "any"
address, that is, 0.0.0.0/0 for IPv4, ::/0 for IPv6.
Security zones. inside_zone, containing the inside interface. For models that have Implied.
an inside bridge group, the zone contains all members of the inside
bridge group interface.
outside_zone, containing the outside interface.
(You can edit these zones to add other interfaces, or create your
own zones.)
Access control policy. A rule trusting all traffic from the inside_zone to the outside_zone. Implied.
This allows without inspection all traffic from users inside your
network to get outside, and all return traffic for those connections.
For models that have an inside bridge group, a second rule trusting
all traffic between the interfaces in the inside_zone. This allows
without inspection all traffic between users on your inside
network.
The default action for any other traffic is to block it. This prevents
any traffic initiated from outside to enter your network.
NAT (Models that do not have an inside bridge group.) An interface Implied.
dynamic PAT rule translates the source address for any IPv4
traffic destined to the outside interface to a unique port on the
outside interface's IP address.
(Models that have an inside bridge group.) For each member of
the inside bridge group, an interface dynamic PAT rule translates
the source address for any IPv4 traffic destined to the outside
interface to a unique port on the outside interface’s IP address.
These appear in the NAT rule table and you can edit them later
if desired.
There are additional hidden PAT rules to enable HTTPS access
through the inside interfaces, and routing through the data
interfaces for the management address. These do not appear in
the NAT table, but you will see them if you use the show nat
command in the CLI.
24
Getting Started
Configuration Basics
Configuration Basics
The following topics explain the basic methods for configuring the device.
Configuring the Device

When you initially log into FDM, you are guided through a setup wizard to help you configure basic settings.
Once you complete the wizard, use the following method to configure other features and to manage the device
configuration.
If you have trouble distinguishing items visually, select a different color scheme in the user profile. Select
Profile from the user icon drop-down menu in the upper right of the page.
Procedure
Step 1 Click Device to get to the Device Summary.

The dashboard shows a visual status for the device, including enabled interfaces and whether key settings are
configured (colored green) or still need to be configured. For more information, see Viewing Interface and
Management Status, on page 28.
Above the status image is a summary of the device model, software version, VDB (System and Vulnerability
Database) version, and the last time intrusion rules were updated.
Below the image are groups for the various features you can configure, with summaries of the configurations
in each group, and actions you can take to manage the system configuration.
Step 2 Click the links in each group to configure the settings or perform the actions.
Following is a summary of the groups:
• Interface—You should have at least two data interfaces configured in addition to the management
interface. See Interfaces, on page 99.
• Routing—The routing configuration. You must define a default route. Other routes might be necessary
depending on your configuration. See Routing, on page 117.
• Updates—Geolocation, intrusion rule, and vulnerability database updates, and system software upgrades.
Set up a regular update schedule to ensure that you have the latest database updates if you use those
features. You can also go to this page if you need to download an update before the regularly schedule
update occurs. See Updating System Databases , on page 291.
• System Settings—This group includes a variety of settings. Some are basic settings that you would
configure when you initially set up the device and then rarely change. See System Settings, on page 281.
• Smart License—Shows the current state of the system licenses. You must install the appropriate licenses
to use the system. Some features require additional licenses. See Licensing the System, on page 63.
• Backup and Restore—Back up the system configuration or restore a previous backup. See Backing Up
and Restoring the System, on page 295.
25
Getting Started
Configuring Security Policies
• Troubleshoot—Generate a troubleshooting file at the request of the Cisco Technical Assistance Center.
See Creating a Troubleshooting File, on page 309.
• Site-to-Site VPN—The site-to-site virtual private network (VPN) connections between this device and
remote devices. See Managing Site-to-Site VPNs, on page 253.
Changes are not active on the device until you deploy them. See Deploying Your Changes, on page 27.
What to do next
Click Policies in the main menu and configure the security policy for the system. You can also click Objects
to configure the objects needed in those policies.
Configuring Security Policies

Use the security policies to implement your organization’s acceptable use policy and to protect your network
from intrusions and other threats.
Procedure
Step 1 Click Policies.

The Security Policies page shows the general flow of a connection through the system, and the order in which
security policies are applied.
Step 2 Click the name of a policy and configure it.

You might not need to configure each policy type, although you must always have an access control policy.
Following is a summary of the policies:
• Identity—If you want to correlate network activity to individual users, or control network access based
on user or user group membership, use the identity policy to determine the user associated with a given
source IP address. See Configuring Identity Policies, on page 128.
• NAT (Network Address Translation)—Use the NAT policy to convert internal IP addresses to externally
routeable addresses. See Configure NAT, on page 173.
• Access Control—Use the access control policy to determine which connections are allowed on the
network. You can filter by security zone, IP address, protocol, port, application, URL, user or user group.
You also apply intrusion and file (malware) policies using access control rules. Use this policy to
implement URL filtering. See Configuring the Access Control Policy, on page 148.
26
Getting Started
Deploying Your Changes
Changes are not active on the device until you deploy them. See Deploying Your Changes, on page 27.
Deploying Your Changes

When you update a policy or setting, the change is not immediately applied to the device. There is a two step
process for making configuration changes:
1. Make your changes.
2. Deploy your changes.
This process gives you the opportunity to make a group of related changes without forcing you to run a device
in a “partially configured” manner. In most cases, the deployment includes just your changes. However, if
necessary, the system will reapply the entire configuration, which might be disruptive to your network. In
addition, some changes require inspection engines to restart, with traffic dropping during the restart. Thus,
consider deploying changes when potential disruptions will have the least impact.
Note If the deployment job fails, the system must roll back any partial changes to the previous configuration.
Rollback includes clearing the data plane configuration and redeploying the previous version. This will
disrupt traffic until the rollback completes.
After you complete the changes you want to make, use the following procedure to deploy them to the device.
Caution The FTD device drops traffic when the inspection engines are busy because of a software resource issue,
or down because a configuration requires the engines to restart during configuration deployment. For
detailed information on changes that require a restart, see Configuration Changes that Restart Inspection
Engines, on page 28.
Procedure
Step 1 Click the Deploy Changes icon in the upper right of the web page.
The icon is highlighted with a dot when there are undeployed changes.
The Deployment Summary page opens. The window shows a list of previous deployments with summary
information on the changes (“modified objects”), when the deployment was initiated and completed, and the
status of each deployment.
If the icon is not highlighted, you can still click it to see the results of previous deployment jobs.
27
Getting Started
Configuration Changes that Restart Inspection Engines
Step 2 Click Deploy Now.
Configuration Changes that Restart Inspection Engines

Any of the following configurations or actions restart inspection engines when you deploy configuration
changes.
Caution When you deploy, resource demands may result in a small number of packets dropping without inspection.
Additionally, deploying some configurations requires inspection engines to restart, which interrupts
traffic inspection and drops traffic.
Deployment
Any deployment restarts the inspection engines.
System Updates
Installing a system update or patch that does not reboot the system and includes a binary change requires
inspection engines to restart. Binary changes can include changes to inspection engines, a preprocessor, the
vulnerability database (VDB), or a shared object rule. Note also that a patch that does not include a binary
change can sometimes require a Snort restart.
Viewing Interface and Management Status

The Device Summary includes a graphical view of your device and select settings for the management address.
To open the Device Summary, click Device.
Elements on this graphic change color based on the status of the element. Mousing over elements sometimes
provides additional information. Use this graphic to monitor the following items.
Note The interface portion of the graphic, including interface status information, is also available on the
Interfaces page and the Monitoring > System dashboard.
Interface Status
Mouse over a port to see its IP addresses, and enabled and link statuses. The IP addresses can be statically
assigned or obtained using DHCP. Mousing over a Bridge Virtual Interface (BVI) also shows the list of
member interfaces.
Interface ports use the following color coding:
• Green—The interface is configured, enabled, and the link is up.
• Gray—The interface is not enabled.
• Orange/Red—The interface is configured and enabled, but the link is down. If the interface is wired, this
is an error condition that needs correction. If the interface is not wired, this is the expected status.
28
Getting Started
Viewing System Task Status
Inside, Outside Network Connections

The graphic indicates which port is connected to the outside (or upstream) and inside networks, under the
following conditions.
• Inside Network—The port for the inside network is shown for the interface named “inside” only. If there
are additional inside networks, they are not shown. If you do not name any interface “inside,” no port is
marked as the inside port.
• Outside Network—The port for the outside network is shown for the interface named “outside” only.
As with the inside network, this name is required, or no port is marked as the outside port.
Management Setting Status

The graphic shows whether the gateway, DNS servers, NTP servers, and Smart Licensing are configured for
the management address, and whether those settings are functioning correctly.
Green indicates that the feature is configured and functioning correctly, gray indicates that it is not configured
or not functioning correctly. For example, the DNS box is gray if the servers cannot be reached. Mouse over
the elements to see more information.
If you find problems, correct them as follows:
• Management port and gateway—Select System Settings > Management Interface.
• DNS servers—Select System Settings > DNS Server.
• NTP servers—Select System Settings > NTP. Also see Troubleshooting NTP, on page 303.
• Smart License—Click the View Configuration link in the Smart License group.

System tasks include actions that occur without your direct involvement, such as retrieving and applying
various database updates. You can view a list of these tasks and their status to verify that these system tasks
are completing successfully.
Procedure
Step 1 Click the Task List button in the main menu.
The task list opens, displaying the status and details of system tasks.
Step 2 Evaluate the task status.

If you find a persistent problem, you might need to fix the device configuration. For example, a persistent
failure to obtain database updates could indicate that there is no path to the Internet for the device's management
IP address. You might need to contact the Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for some issues as indicted
in the task descriptions.
You can do the following with the task list:
• Click the Success or Failures buttons to filter the list based on these statuses.
29
Getting Started
• Click the delete icon ( ) for a task to remove it from the list.
• Click Remove All Completed Tasks to empty the list of all tasks that are not in progress.
30
CHAPTER 2
Best Practices: Use Cases for FTD
The following topics explain some common tasks you might want to accomplish with FTD using the FDM.
These use cases assume that you completed the device configuration wizard and that you retained this initial
configuration. Even if you modified the initial configuration, you should be able to use these examples to
understand how to use the product.
• How to Configure the Device in FDM, on page 31
• How to Gain Insight Into Your Network Traffic, on page 36
• How to Block Threats, on page 42
• How to Block Malware, on page 46
• How to Implement an Acceptable Use Policy (URL Filtering), on page 49
• How to Control Application Usage, on page 53
• How to Add a Subnet, on page 57
• More Examples, on page 62
How to Configure the Device in FDM

After you complete the setup wizard, you should have a functioning device with a few basic policies in place:
• (Except for ASA 5506-X and.) An outside and an inside interface. No other data interfaces are configured.
• (ASA 5506-X, only.) An outside interface, and an inside bridge group that includes all other data
interfaces.
• Security zones for the inside and outside interfaces.
• An access rule trusting all inside to outside traffic.
• An interface NAT rule that translates all inside to outside traffic to unique ports on the IP address of the
outside interface.
• A DHCP server running on the inside interface or bridge group.
The following steps provide an overview of additional features you might want to configure. Please click the
help button (?) on a page to get detailed information about each step.
31
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Device, then click View Configuration in the Smart License group.
Click Enable for each of the optional licenses you want to use: Threat, Malware, URL. Read the explanation
of each license if you are unsure of whether you need it.
If you have not registered, you can do so from this page. Click Request Register and follow the instructions.
Please register before the evaluation license expires.
For example, an enabled Threat license should look like the following:
Step 2 If you wired other interfaces, choose Device, then click the link in the Interfaces summary.
• Because the ASA 5506-X and comes pre-configured with a bridge group containing all non-outside data
interfaces, there is no need to configure these interfaces. If you want to break apart the bridge group, you
can edit it to remove the interfaces you want to treat separately. Then you can configure those interfaces
as hosting separate networks.
For other models, you can create a bridge group for the other interfaces, or configure separate networks,
or some combination of both.
Click the edit icon ( ) for each interface to define the IP address and other settings.
The following example configures an interface to be used as a “demilitarized zone” (DMZ), where you place
publically-accessible assets such as your web server. Click Save when you are finished.
32
Step 3 If you configured new interfaces, choose Objects, then select Security Zones from the table of contents.
Edit or create new zones as appropriate. Each interface must belong to a zone, because you configure policies
based on security zones, not interfaces. You cannot put the interfaces in zones when configuring them, so you
must always edit the zone objects after creating new interfaces or changing the purpose of existing interfaces.
The following example shows how to create a new dmz-zone for the dmz interface.
Step 4 If you want internal clients to use DHCP to obtain an IP address from the device, choose Device, then System
Settings > DHCP Server. Select the DHCP Servers tab.
33
There is already a DHCP server configured for the inside interface, but you can edit the address pool or even
delete it. If you configured other inside interfaces, it is very typical to set up a DHCP server on those interfaces.
Click + to configure the server and address pool for each inside interface.
You can also fine-tune the WINS and DNS list supplied to clients on the Configuration tab.
The following example shows how to set up a DHCP server on the inside2 interface with the address pool
192.168.4.50-192.168.4.240.
Step 5 Choose Device, then click View Configuration (or Create First Static Route) in the Routing group and
configure a default route.
The default route normally points to the upstream or ISP router that resides off the outside interface. A default
IPv4 route is for any-ipv4 (0.0.0.0/0), whereas a default IPv6 route is for any-ipv6 (::0/0). Create routes for
each IP version you use. If you use DHCP to obtain an address for the outside interface, you might already
have the default routes that you need.
The routes you define on this page are for the data interfaces only. They do not impact the management
interface. Set the management gateway on System Settings > Management Interface.
The following example shows a default route for IPv4. In this example, isp-gateway is a network object that
identifies the IP address of the ISP gateway (you must obtain the address from your ISP). You can create this
object by clicking Create New Network at the bottom of the Gateway drop-down list.
34
Step 6 Choose Policies and configure the security policies for the network.
The device setup wizard enables traffic flow between the inside-zone and outside-zone, and interface NAT
for all interfaces when going to the outside interface. Even if you configure new interfaces, if you add them
to the inside-zone object, the access control rule automatically applies to them.
However, if you have multiple inside interfaces, you need an access control rule to allow traffic flow from
inside-zone to inside-zone. If you add other security zones, you need rules to allow traffic to and from those
zones. These would be your minimum changes.
In addition, you can configure other policies to provide additional services, and fine-tune NAT and access
rules to get the results that your organization requires. You can configure the following policies:
• Identity—If you want to correlate network activity to individual users, or control network access based
on user or user group membership, use the identity policy to determine the user associated with a given
source IP address.
• NAT (Network Address Translation)—Use the NAT policy to convert internal IP addresses to externally
routeable addresses.
• Access Control—Use the access control policy to determine which connections are allowed on the
network. You can filter by security zone, IP address, protocol, port, application, URL, user or user group.
You also apply intrusion and file (malware) policies using access control rules. Use this policy to
implement URL filtering.
The following example shows how to allow traffic between the inside-zone and dmz-zone in the access control
policy. In this example, no options are set on any of the other tabs except for Logging, where At End of
Connection is selected.
Step 7 Commit your changes.

a) Click the Deploy Changes icon in the upper right of the web page.
b) Click the Deploy Now button.

Wait for deployment to finish. The deployment summary should indicate that you have successfully
deployed your changes, and the task status for the job should be Deployed.
35
How to Gain Insight Into Your Network Traffic

After completing initial device setup, you have an access control policy that allows all inside traffic access
to the Internet or other upstream network, and a default action to block all other traffic. Before you create
additional access control rules, you might find it beneficial to gain insight into the traffic that is actually
occurring on your network.
You can use the monitoring capabilities of the FDM to analyze network traffic. FDM reporting helps you
answer the following questions:
• What is my network being used for?
• Who is using the network the most?
• Where are my users going?
• What devices are they using?
• What access control rules (policies) are being hit the most?
The initial access rule can provide some insight into traffic, including policies, destinations, and security
zones. But to obtain user information, you need to configure an identity policy that requires users to authenticate
(identify) themselves. To obtain information on applications used on the network, you need to make some
additional adjustments.
The following procedure explains how to set up the FTD device to monitor traffic and provides an overview
of the end-to-end process of configuring and monitoring policies.
Note This procedure does not provide insight into the web site categories and reputations of sites visited by
users, so you cannot see meaningful information in the web categories dashboard. You must implement
category-based URL filtering, and enable the URL license, to obtain category and reputation data. If
you just want to obtain this information, you can add a new access control rule that allows access to an
acceptable category, such as Financial Services, and make it the first rule in the access control policy.
For details on implementing URL filtering, see How to Implement an Acceptable Use Policy (URL
Filtering), on page 49.
Procedure
Step 1 To gain insight into user behavior, you need to configure an identity policy to ensure that the user associated
with a connection is identified.
By enabling the identity policy, you can collect information about who is using the network, and what resources
they are using. This information is available in the User monitoring dashboard. User information is also
available for connection events shown in Event Viewer.
Users are authenticated only when they use a web browser for HTTP connections.
If a user fails to authenticate, the user is not prevented from making web connections. This just means that
you do not have user identity information for the connections. If you want, you can create an access control
rule to drop traffic for Failed Authentication users.
36
a) Click Policies in the main menu, then click Identity.

The identity policy is initially disabled. The identity policy uses your Active Directory server to authenticate
users and associate them with the IP address of the workstation they are using. Subsequently, the system
will identify traffic for that IP address as being the user's traffic.
b) Click the Get Started button to start the wizard to configure the needed elements.
c) Identify your Active Directory server.
Fill in the following information.
• Name—A name for the directory realm.
• Type—The type of directory server. Active Directory is the only supported type, and you cannot
change this field.
• Directory Username, Directory Password—The distinguished username and password for a user
with appropriate rights to the user information you want to retrieve. For Active Directory, the user
does not need elevated privileges. You can specify any user in the domain. The username must be
fully qualified; for example, [email protected] (not simply Administrator).
• Base DN—The directory tree for searching or querying user and group information, that is, the
common parent for users and groups. For example, dc=example,dc=com. For information on finding
the base DN, see Determining the Directory Base DN, on page 126.
• AD Primary Domain— The fully qualified Active Directory domain name that the device should
join. For example, example.com.
• Hostname/IP Address—The hostname or IP address of the directory server. If you use an encrypted
connection to the server, you must enter the fully-qualified domain name, not the IP address.
• Port—The port number used for communications with the server. The default is 389. Use port 636
if you select LDAPS as the encryption method.
37
• Encryption—To use an encrypted connection for downloading user and group information, select
the desired method, STARTTLS or LDAPS. The default is None, which means that user and group
information is downloaded in clear text.
• STARTTLS negotiates the encryption method, and uses the strongest method supported by the
directory server. Use port 389.
• LDAPS requires LDAP over SSL. Use port 636.
• SSL Certificate—If you select an encryption method, upload a CA certificate to enable a trusted
connection between the system and the directory server. If you are using a certificate to authenticate,
the name of the server in the certificate must match the server Hostname / IP Address. For example,
if you use 10.10.10.250 as the IP address but ad.example.com in the certificate, the connection fails.
Example:
For example, the following image shows how to create an unencrypted connection for the ad.example.com
server. The primary domain is example.com, and the directory username is [email protected].
All user and group information is under the Distinguished Name (DN) ou=user,dc=example,dc=com.
d) Click Next.
e) Configure the active authentication captive portal.
The simplest option is to leave all fields as is and click Save. You would configure the default port for
active authentication, and users get a self-signed certificate that they need to trust in order to provide their
username and password. Tell users to expect this and that they should accept the certificate.
38
However, you would ideally upload a certificate that their browsers already trust. If you have one, fill in
the following fields to use it.
• Server Certificate—The CA certificate to present to users during active authentication. The certificate
must be an X509 certificate in PEM or DER format. Paste in the certificate, or click Upload
Certificate and select the certificate file. The default is to present a self-signed certificate during
user authentication.
• Certificate Key—The key for the server certificate. Paste in the key, or click Upload Key and select
the key file.
• Port—The captive portal port. The default is 885 (TCP). If you configure a different port, it must
be in the range 1025-65535.
f) Click Save.
This completes the setup wizard. Now, create an identity rule to require active authentication.
g) Click the Create Identity Rule button, or the + button.
h) Fill in the identity rule properties.
Assuming you want to require everyone to authenticate, you could use the following settings:
• Name—Anything you choose, for example, Require_Authentication.
• User Authentication—Active should already be selected; keep it.
• Type—Select HTTP Negotiate. This allows the browser and directory server to negotiate the
strongest authentication protocol, in order, NTLM, then HTTP basic.
Note For the HTTP Basic, HTTP Response Page, and NTLM authentication methods, the user
is redirected to the captive portal using the IP address of the interface. However, for HTTP
Negotiate, the user is redirected using the fully-qualified DNS name
firewall-hostname.AD-domain-name. If you want to use HTTP Negotiate, you must also
update your DNS server to map this name to the IP addresses of all inside interfaces where
you are requiring active authentication. Otherwise, the redirection cannot complete, and
users cannot authenticate. If you cannot, or do not want to, update the DNS server, select
one of the other authentication methods.
• Source/Destination—Leave all fields to default to Any.
You can constrain the policy as you see fit to a more limited set of traffic. However, active authentication
will only be attempted for HTTP traffic, so it does not matter that non-HTTP traffic matches the
source/destination criteria. For more details about identity policy properties, see Configure Identity Rules,
on page 131.
39
i) Click OK to add the rule.

If you look in the upper right of the window, you can see that the Deploy icon button now has a dot, which
indicates that there are undeployed changes. Making changes in the user interface is not sufficient for
getting the changes configured on the device, you must deploy changes. Thus, you can make a set of
related changes before you deploy them, so that you do not face the potential problems of having a
partially-configured set of changes running on the device. You will deploy changes later in this procedure.
Step 2 Change the action on the Inside_Outside_Rule access control rule to Allow.
The Inside_Outside_Rule access rule is created as a trust rule. However, trusted traffic is not inspected, so
the system cannot learn about some of the characteristics of trusted traffic, such as application, when the traffic
matching criteria does not include application or other conditions besides zone, IP address, and port. If you
change the rule to allow rather than trust traffic, the system fully inspects the traffic.
Note (ASA 5506-X .) Also consider changing the Inside_Inside_Rule from Trust to Allow. This rule
covers traffic going between the inside interfaces.
a) Click Access Control on the Policies page.

b) Hover over the Actions cell on the right side of the Inside_Outside_Rule row to expose the edit and delete
icons, and click the edit icon ( ) to open the rule.
c) Select Allow for the Action.
d) Click OK to save the change.

Step 3 Enable logging on the access control policy default action.
Dashboards contain information about connections only if the connection matches an access control rule that
enables connection logging. The Inside_Outside_Rule enables logging, but the default action has logging
disabled. Thus, dashboards show information for the Inside_Outside_Rule only, and do not reflect connections
that do not match any rules.
a) Click anywhere in the default action at the bottom of the access control policy page.
40
b) Select Select Log Action > At Beginning and End of Connection.

c) Click OK.
Step 4 Set an update schedule for the vulnerability database (VDB).
Cisco regularly releases updates to the VDB, which includes the application detectors that can identify the
application used in a connection. You should update the VDB on a regular basis. You can either manually
download updates, or you can set up a regular schedule. The following procedure shows how to set up a
schedule. By default, VDB updates are disabled, so you need to take action to get VDB updates.
a) Click Device.
b) Click View Configuration in the Updates group.
c) Click Configure in the VDB group.
d) Define the update schedule.

Choose a time and frequency that will not be disruptive to your network. Also, please understand that the
system will do an automatic deployment after downloading the update. This is necessary to activate the
new detectors. Thus, any configuration changes that you have made and saved but have not yet deployed
will also be deployed.
For example, the following schedule updates the VDB once a week on Sunday at 12:00 AM (using the
24-hour clock notation).
e) Click Save.
41
How to Block Threats

b) Click the Deploy Now button and wait for deployment to finish.
The deployment summary should indicate that you have successfully deployed your changes, and the task
status for the job should be Deployed.
What to do next
At this point, the monitoring dashboards and events should start showing information about users and
applications. You can evaluate this information for undesirable patterns and develop new access rules to
constrain unacceptable use.
If you want to start collecting information about intrusions and malware, you need to enable intrusion and
file policies on one or more access rule. You also need to enable the licenses for those features.
If you want to start collecting information about URL categories, you must implement URL filtering.

You can implement next generation Intrusion Prevention System (IPS) filtering by adding intrusion policies
to your access control rules. Intrusion policies analyze network traffic, comparing the traffic contents against
known threats. If a connection matches a threat you are monitoring, the system drops the connection, thus
preventing the attack.
All other traffic handling occurs before network traffic is examined for intrusions. By associating an intrusion
policy with an access control rule, you are telling the system that before it passes traffic that matches the
access control rule's conditions, you first want to inspect the traffic with an intrusion policy.
You can configure intrusion policies on rules that allow traffic only. Inspection is not performed on rules set
to trust or block traffic. In addition, you can configure an intrusion policy as part of the default action if the
default action is allow.
42
The intrusion policies are designed by the Cisco Talos Intelligence Group (Talos), who set the intrusion and
preprocessor rule states and advanced settings.
Procedure
Step 1 If you have not already done so, enable the Threat license.
You must enable the Threat license to use intrusion policies. If you are currently using the evaluation license,
you are enabling an evaluation version of the license. If you have registered the device, you must purchase
the required license and add it to your Smart Software Manager account on Cisco.com.
a) Click Device.
b) Click View Configuration in the Smart License group.
c) Click Enable in the Threat group.

The system registers the license with your account, or activates the evaluation license, as appropriate. The
group should indicate that the license is enabled, and the button changes to a Disable button.
Step 2 Select an intrusion policy for one or more access rules.

Determine which rules cover traffic that should be scanned for threats. For this example, we will add intrusion
inspection to the Inside_Outside_Rule. For ASA 5506-X models, you might also want to add it to the
Inside_Inside_Rule.
a) Click Policies in the main menu.
Ensure that the Access Control policy is displayed.
c) If you have not already done so, select Allow for the Action.
d) Click the Intrusion Policy tab.

e) Click the Intrusion Policy toggle to enable it, then select the intrusion policy.
43
The Balanced Security and Connectivity policy is appropriate for most networks. It provides a good
intrusion defense without being overly aggressive, which has the potential of dropping traffic that you
might not want to be dropped. If you determine that too much traffic is getting dropped, you can ease up
on intrusion inspection by selecting the Connectivity over Security policy.
If you need to be aggressive about security, try the Security over Connectivity policy. The Maximum
Detection policy offers even more emphasis on network infrastructure security with the potential for even
greater operational impact.
f) Click OK to save the change.

Step 3 Set an update schedule for the intrusion rule database.
Cisco regularly releases updates to the intrusion rule database, which is used by intrusion policies to determine
whether connections should be dropped. You should update the rule database on a regular basis. You can
either manually download updates, or you can set up a regular schedule. The following procedure shows how
to set up a schedule. By default, database updates are disabled, so you need to take action to get updated rules.
a) Click Device.
b) Click View Configuration in the Updates group.
c) Click Configure in the Rule group.
44
d) Define the update schedule.

Choose a time and frequency that will not be disruptive to your network. Also, please understand that the
system will do an automatic deployment after downloading the update. This is necessary to activate the
new rules. Thus, any configuration changes that you have made and saved but have not yet deployed will
also be deployed.
For example, the following schedule updates the rule database once a week on Monday at 12:00 AM
(using the 24-hour clock notation).
e) Click Save.

What to do next
At this point, the monitoring dashboards and events should start showing information about attackers, targets,
and threats, if any intrusions are identified. You can evaluate this information to determine if your network
needs more security precautions, or if you need to reduce the level of intrusion policy you are using.
45
How to Block Malware

Users are continually at risk of obtaining malicious software, or malware, from Internet sites or other
communication methods, such as e-mail. Even trusted web sites can be hijacked to serve malware to
unsuspecting users. Web pages can contain objects coming from different sources. These objects can include
images, executables, Javascript, advertisements, and so forth. Compromised web sites often incorporate objects
hosted on external sources. Real security means looking at each object individually, not just the initial request.
Use file policies to detect malware using malware defense. You can also use file policies to perform file
control, which allows control over all files of a specific type regardless of whether the files contain malware.
Malware defense uses the AMP Cloud to retrieve dispositions for possible malware detected in network traffic.
The management interface must have a path to the Internet to reach the AMP Cloud and perform malware
lookups. When the device detects an eligible file, it uses the file's SHA-256 hash value to query the AMP
Cloud for the file's disposition. The possible disposition can be clean, malware, or unknown (no clear verdict).
If the AMP Cloud is unreachable, the disposition is unknown.
By associating a file policy with an access control rule, you are telling the system that before it passes traffic
that matches the access control rule's conditions, you first want to inspect any files in the connection.
You can configure file policies on rules that allow traffic only. Inspection is not performed on rules set to
trust or block traffic.
Procedure
Step 1 If you have not already done so, enable the Malware and Threat licenses.
You must enable the Malware to use file policies in addition to the Threat license, which is required for
intrusion policies. If you are currently using the evaluation license, you are enabling an evaluation version of
the licenses. If you have registered the device, you must purchase the required licenses and add them to your
Smart Software Manager account on Cisco.com.
a) Click Device.
c) Click Enable in the Malware group, and if not already enabled, the Threat group.
46
Step 2 Select a file policy for one or more access rules.

Determine which rules cover traffic that should be scanned for malware. For this example, we will add file
inspection to the Inside_Outside_Rule. For ASA 5506-X models, you might also want to add it to the
Inside_Inside_Rule.
c) If you have not already done so, select Allow for the Action.
d) Click the File Policy tab.

e) Click the file policy you want to use.
Your main choice is between Block Malware All, which drops any files that are considered malware, or
Cloud Lookup All, which queries the AMP Cloud to determine the file's disposition, but does no blocking.
If you want to first see how files are being evaluated, use cloud lookup. You can switch to the blocking
policy later if you are satisfied with how files are being evaluated.
There are other policies available that block malware. These policies are coupled with file control, blocking
the upload of Microsoft Office, or Office and PDF, documents. That is, these policies prevent users from
sending these file types to other networks in addition to blocking malware. You can select these policies
if they fit your needs.
For this example, select Block Malware All.
47
f) Click the Logging tab and verify that Log Files under File Events is selected.
By default, file logging is enabled whenever you select a file policy. You must enable file logging to get
file and malware information in events and dashboards.
g) Click OK to save the change.


What to do next
At this point, the monitoring dashboards and events should start showing information about file types and file
and malware events, if any files or malware are transmitted. You can evaluate this information to determine
if your network needs more security precautions related to file transmissions.
48
How to Implement an Acceptable Use Policy (URL Filtering)

You might have an acceptable use policy for your network. Acceptable use policies differentiate between
network activity that is appropriate in your organization and activity that is considered inappropriate. These
policies are typically focused on Internet usage, and are geared towards maintaining productivity, avoiding
legal liabilities (for example, maintaining a non-hostile workplace), and in general controlling web traffic.
You can use URL filtering to define an acceptable use policy with access policies. You can filter on broad
categories, such as Gambling, so that you do not need to identify every individual web site that should be
blocked. For category matches, you can also specify the relative reputation of sites to allow or block. If a user
attempts to browse to any URL with that category and reputation combination, the session is blocked.
Using category and reputation data also simplifies policy creation and administration. It grants you assurance
that the system will control web traffic as expected. Finally, because Cisco's threat intelligence is continually
updated with new URLs, as well as new categories and risks for existing URLs, you can ensure that the system
uses up-to-date information to filter requested URLs. Malicious sites that represent security threats such as
malware, spam, botnets, and phishing may appear and disappear faster than you can update and deploy new
policies.
The following procedure explains how to implement an acceptable use policy using URL filtering. For purposes
of this example, we will block sites of any reputation in several categories, risky Social Networking sites, and
an unclassified site, badsite.example.com.
Procedure
Step 1 If you have not already done so, enable the URL license.
You must enable the URL license to use URL category and reputation information, or to see the information
in dashboards and events. If you are currently using the evaluation license, you are enabling an evaluation
version of the license. If you have registered the device, you must purchase the required license and add it to
your Smart Software Manager account on Cisco.com.
a) Click Device.
c) Click Enable in the URL License group.

49
Step 2 Create a URL filtering access control rule.

You might want to first see the categories for sites your users are visiting before making a blocking rule. If
that is the case, you can create a rule with the Allow action for an acceptable category, such as Financial
Services. Because all web connections must be inspected to determine if the URL belongs to this category,
you would get category information even for non-Financial Services sites.
But there are probably URL categories that you already know you want to block. A blocking policy also forces
inspection, so you get category information on connections to unblocked categories, not just the blocked
categories.
b) Click + to add a new rule.
c) Configure the order, title, and action.
• Order—The default is to add new rules to the end of the access control policy. However, you must
place this rule ahead of (above) any rule that would match the same Source/Destination and other
criteria, or the rule will never be matched (a connection matches one rule only, and that is the first
rule it matches in the table). For this rule, we will use the same Source/Destination as the
Inside_Outside_Rule created during initial device configuration. You might have created other rules
as well. To maximize access control efficiency, it is best to have specific rules early, to ensure the
quickest decision on whether a connection is allowed or dropped. For the purposes of this example,
select 1 as the rule order.
• Title—Give the rule a meaningful name, such as Block_Web_Sites.
• Action—Select Block.
d) On the Source/Destination tab, click + for Source > Zones, select inside_zone, then click OK in the
zones dialog box.
Adding any of the criteria works the same way. Clicking + opens a little dialog box, where you click the
items you want to add. You can click multiple items, and clicking a selected item de-selects it; the check
marks indicate the selected items. But nothing is added to the policy until you click the OK button; simply
selecting the items is not sufficient.
50
e) Using the same technique, select outside_zone for Destination > Zones.
f) Click the URLs tab.

g) Click the + for Categories, and select the categories you want to fully or partially block.
For purposes of this example, select Adult and Pornography, Bot Nets, Confirmed SPAM Sources, and
Social Network. There are additional categories that you would most likely want to block.
h) To implement reputation-sensitive blocking for the Social Network category, click Reputation: Risk
Any for that category, deselect Any, then move the slider to Benign sites with security risks. Click away
from the slider to close it.
The left of the reputation slider indicates sites that will be allowed, the right side are sites that will be
blocked. In this case, only Social Networking sites with reputations in the Suspicious Sites and High Risk
51
ranges will be blocked. Thus, your users should be able to get to commonly-used Social Networking sites,
where there are fewer risks.
Using reputation, you can selectively block sites within a category you otherwise want to allow.
i) Click the + next to the URLS list to the left of the categories list.
j) At the bottom of the popup dialog box, click the Create New URL link.
k) Enter badsite.example.com for both the name and URL, then click OK to create the object.
You can name the object the same as the URL or give the object a different name. For the URL, do not
include the protocol portion of the URL, just add the server name.
l) Select the new object, then click OK.

Adding new objects while editing policies simply adds the object to the list. The new object is not
automatically selected.
m) Click the Logging tab and select Select Log Action > At Beginning and End of Connection.
You must enable logging to get category and reputation information into the web category dashboard and
connection events.
n) Click OK to save the rule.
Step 3 (Optional.) Set preferences for URL filtering.
52
How to Control Application Usage
When you enable the URL license, the system automatically enables updates to the web category database.
The system checks for updates every 30 minutes, although the data is typically updated once per day. You
can turn off these updates if for some reason you do not want them.
You can also elect to send URLs that are not categorized to Cisco for analysis. Thus, if the installed URL
database does not have a categorization for a site, the Cisco Cloud might have one. The cloud returns the
category and reputation, and your category-based rules can then be applied correctly to the URL request.
Selecting this option is important for lower-end systems, which install a smaller URL database due to memory
limitations.
a) Click Device.
b) Click System Settings > Traffic Settings > URL Filtering Preferences.
c) Select Query Cisco CSI for Unknown URLs.
d) Click Save.

What to do next
At this point, the monitoring dashboards and events should start showing information about web categories
and reputations, and which connections were dropped. You can evaluate this information to determine if your
URL filtering is dropping just those sites that are objectionable, or if you need to ease up on the reputation
setting for certain categories.
Consider informing users beforehand that you will be blocking access to web sites based on their categorization
and reputation.

The Web has become the ubiquitous platform for application delivery in the enterprise, whether that is browser
based application platforms, or rich media applications that use web protocols as the transport in and out of
enterprise networks.
FTD inspects connections to determine the application being used. This makes it possible to write access
control rules targeted at applications, rather than just targeting specific TCP/UDP ports. Thus, you can
selectively block or allow web-based applications even though they use the same port.
Although you can select specific applications to allow or block, you can also write rules based on type,
category, tag, risk, or business relevance. For example, you could create an access control rule that identifies
and blocks all high risk, low business relevance applications. If a user attempts to use one of those applications,
the session is blocked.
53
Cisco frequently updates and adds additional application detectors via system and vulnerability database
(VDB) updates. Thus, a rule blocking high risk applications can automatically apply to new applications
without you having to update the rule manually.
In this use case, we will block any application that belongs to the anonymizer/proxy category.
Before you begin

This use case assumes that you completed the use case How to Gain Insight Into Your Network Traffic, on
page 36. That use case explains how to collect application usage information, which you can analyze in the
Applications dashboard. Understanding what applications are actually being used can help you design effective
application-based rules. The use case also explains how to schedule VDB updates, which will not be repeated
here. Ensure that you update the VDB regularly so that applications can be correctly identified.
Procedure
Step 1 Create the application-based access control rule.

rule it matches in the table). For this rule, we will use the same Source/Destination as the
Inside_Outside_Rule created during initial device configuration. You might have created other rules
as well. To maximize access control efficiency, it is best to have specific rules early, to ensure the
quickest decision on whether a connection is allowed or dropped. For the purposes of this example,
select 1 as the rule order.
• Title—Give the rule a meaningful name, such as Block_Anonymizers.
• Action—Select Block.
zones dialog box.
54
e) Using the same technique, select outside_zone for Destination > Zones.
f) Click the Applications tab.

g) Click the + for Applications, and then click the Advanced Filter link at the bottom of the popup dialog
box.
Although you can create application filter objects beforehand and select them on the Application Filters
list here, you can also specify criteria directly in the access control rule, and optionally save the criteria
as a filter object. Unless you are writing a rule for a single application, it is easier to use the Advanced
Filter dialog box to find applications and construct appropriate criteria.
As you select criteria, the Applications list at the bottom of the dialog box updates to show exactly which
applications match the criteria. The rule you are writing applies to these applications.
Look at this list carefully. For example, you might be tempted to block all very high risk applications.
However, as of this writing, TFPT is classified as very high risk. Most organizations would not want to
block this application. Take the time to experiment with various filter criteria to see which applications
match your selections. Keep in mind that these lists can change with every VDB update.
For purposes of this example, select anonymizers/proxies from the Categories list.
55
h) Click Add in the Advanced Filters dialog box.

The filter is added and shown on the Applications tab.
i) Click the Logging tab and select Select Log Action > At Beginning and End of Connection.
You must enable logging to get information about any connections blocked by this rule.
j) Click OK to save the rule.
56
How to Add a Subnet
Step 3 Click Monitoring and evaluate the results.

You might now see dropped connections on the Applications widget on the Network Overview dashboard.
Use the All/Denied/Allowed drop-down options to focus just on dropped applications.
The Applications dashboard shows these results as well. If someone tries to use these applications, you should
be able to correlate the application with the user attempting the connection, assuming that you enable identity
policies and require authentication.
How to Add a Subnet

If you have an available interface on your device, you can wire it to a switch (or another router) to provide
services to another subnet.
There are many potential reasons you would add a subnet. For this use case, we will address the following
typical scenario.
• The subnet is an inside network using the private network 192.168.2.0/24.
• The interface for the network has the static address 192.168.2.1. In this example, the physical interface
is devoted to the network. Another option is to use an already-wired interface and create a subinterface
for the new network.
• The device will provide addresses to workstations on the network using DHCP, using
192.168.2.2-192.168.2.254 as the address pool.
• Network access to other inside networks, and to the outside network, will be allowed. Traffic going to
the outside network will use NAT to obtain a public address.
Note This example assumes the unused interface is not part of a bridge group. If it is currently a bridge group
member, you must first remove it from the bridge group before following this procedure.
Before you begin

Physically connect the network cable to the interface and to the switch for the new subnet.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the interface.

a) Click Device, then click the link in the Interfaces summary.
b) Hover over the Actions cell on the right side of the row for the interface you wired, and click the edit icon
( ).
c) Configure the basic interface properties.
57
How to Add a Subnet
• Name—A unique name for the interface. For this example, inside_2.
• Status—Click the status toggle to enable the interface.
• IPv4 Address tab—Select Static for Type, then enter 192.168.2.1/24.
d) Click Save.
The interface list shows the updated interface status and the configured IP address.
Step 2 Configure the DHCP server for the interface.

a) Click Device.
b) Click System Settings > DHCP Server.
c) Click the DHCP Servers tab.
The table lists any existing DHCP servers. If you are using the default configuration, the list includes one
for the inside interface.
d) Click + above the table.
e) Configure the server properties.
• Enable DHCP Server—Click this toggle to enable the server.
• Interface—Select the interface on which you are providing DHCP services. In this example, select
inside_2.
• Address Pool—The addresses the server can supply to devices on the network. Enter
192.168.2.2-192.168.2.254. Make sure you do not include the network address (.0), the interface
address (.1), or the broadcast address (.255). Also, if you need static addresses for any devices on
the network, exclude those addresses from the pool. The pool must be a single continuous series of
addresses, so choose static addresses from the beginning or ending of the range.
58
How to Add a Subnet
f) Click Add.
Step 3 Add the interface to the inside security zone.

To write policies on an interface, the interface must belong to a security zone. You write policies for the
security zones. Thus, as you add and remove interfaces in the zones, you automatically change the policies
applied to the interface.
a) Click Objects in the main menu.
b) Select Security Zones from the objects table of contents.
c) Hover over the Actions cell on the right side of the row for the inside_zone object, and click the edit icon
( ).
d) Click + under Interfaces, select the inside_2 interface, and click OK in the interfaces list.
e) Click Save.
Step 4 Create an access control rule that allows traffic between the inside networks.
59
How to Add a Subnet
Traffic is not automatically allowed between any interfaces. You must create access control rules to allow the
traffic that you want. The only exception is if you allow traffic in the access control rule's default action. For
the purposes of this example, we will assume you retained the block default action that the device setup wizard
configures. Thus, you need to create a rule that will allow traffic between the inside interfaces. If you have
already created a rule like this, skip this step.
rule it matches in the table). For this rule, we will use unique Source/Destination criteria, so adding
the rule to the end of the list is acceptable.
• Title—Give the rule a meaningful name, such as Allow_Inside_Inside.
• Action—Select Allow.
zones dialog box.
e) Using the same technique, select inside_zone for Destination > Zones.
A security zone must contain at least two interfaces to select the same zone for source and destination.
f) (Optional.) Configure intrusion and malware inspection.
60
How to Add a Subnet
Although the inside interfaces are in a trusted zone, it is typical for users to connect laptops to the network.
Thus, a user might unknowingly bring a threat inside your network from an outside network or a Wi-Fi
hot spot. Thus, you might want to scan for intrusions and malware in traffic that goes between your inside
networks.
Consider doing the following.
• Click the Intrusion Policy tab, enable the intrusion policy, and use the slider to select the Balanced
Security and Connectivity policy.
• Click the File Policy tab, then select the Block Malware All policy.
g) Click the Logging tab and select Select Log Action > At Beginning and End of Connection.
You must enable logging to get information about any connections that match this rule. Logging adds
statistics to the dashboard as well as showing events in the event viewer.
h) Click OK to save the rule.
Step 5 Verify that required policies are defined for the new subnet.
By adding the interface to the inside_zone security zone, any existing policies for inside_zone automatically
apply to the new subnet. However, take the time to inspect your policies and ensure that no additional policies
are needed.
If you completed the initial device configuration, the following policies should already apply.
• Access Control—The Inside_Outside_Rule should allow all traffic between the new subnet and the
outside network. If you followed the previous use cases, the policy also provides intrusion and malware
inspection. You must have a rule that allows some traffic between the new network and the outside
network, or users cannot access the Internet or other external networks.
• NAT—The InsideOutsideNATrule applies to any interface going to the outside interface, and applies
interface PAT. If you kept this rule, traffic from the new network going to the outside will have the IP
address translated to a unique port on the outside interface's IP address. If you do not have a rule that
applies to all interfaces, or the inside_zone interfaces, when going to the outside interface, you might
need to create one now.
• Identity—There is no default identity policy. However, if you followed previous use cases, you might
have an identity policy that already requires authentication for the new network. If you do not have an
identity policy that applies, create one now if you want to have user-based information for the new
network.


61
More Examples
What to do next
Verify that workstations on the new subnet are getting IP addresses using DHCP, and that they can reach
other inside networks and the outside network. Use the monitoring dashboards and the event viewer to evaluate
network usage.
More Examples
In addition to the examples in the Use Case chapter, there are example configurations in some of the chapters
that explain specific services. You might find the following examples of interest.
Network Address Translation (NAT)
NAT for IPv4 addresses
• Providing Access to an Inside Web Server (Static Auto NAT), on page 213
• Single Address for FTP, HTTP, and SMTP (Static Auto NAT-with-Port-Translation), on page 215
• Different Translation Depending on the Destination (Dynamic Manual PAT), on page 221
• Different Translation Depending on the Destination Address and Port (Dynamic Manual PAT), on
page 227
• DNS Reply Modification, DNS Server on Outside, on page 239
• DNS Reply Modification, DNS Server on Host Network, on page 242
• Exempting Site-to-Site VPN Traffic from NAT, on page 266
NAT for IPv6 addresses

• NAT64/46 Example: Inside IPv6 Network with Outside IPv4 Internet, on page 199
• NAT64/46 Example: Inside IPv6 Network with Outside IPv4 Internet and DNS Translation, on
page 201
• NAT66 Example, Static Translation between Networks, on page 206
• NAT66 Example, Simple IPv6 Interface PAT, on page 209
• DNS 64 Reply Modification, on page 233
Site-to-Site Virtual Private Network (VPN)

• Exempting Site-to-Site VPN Traffic from NAT, on page 266
• How to Provide Internet Access on the Outside Interface for External Site-to-Site VPN Users (Hair
Pinning), on page 272
62
CHAPTER 3
Licensing the System
The following topics explain how to license the FTD device.
• Smart Licensing for the Firewall System, on page 63
• Managing Smart Licenses, on page 65
Smart Licensing for the Firewall System

Cisco Smart Licensing is a flexible licensing model that provides you with an easier, faster, and more consistent
way to purchase and manage software across the Cisco portfolio and across your organization. And it’s
secure—you control what users can access. With Smart Licensing you get:
• Easy Activation: Smart Licensing establishes a pool of software licenses that can be used across the
entire organization—no more PAKs (Product Activation Keys).
• Unified Management: My Cisco Entitlements (MCE) provides a complete view into all of your Cisco
products and services in an easy-to-use portal, so you always know what you have and what you are
using.
• License Flexibility: Your software is not node-locked to your hardware, so you can easily use and
transfer licenses as needed.
To use Smart Licensing, you must first set up a Smart Account on Cisco Software Central (software.cisco.com).
For a more detailed overview on Cisco Licensing, go to cisco.com/go/licensingguide
Cisco Smart Software Manager

When you purchase one or more licenses for the FTD device, you manage them in the Cisco Smart Software
Manager: https://software.cisco.com/#SmartLicensing-Inventory. The Cisco Smart Software Manager lets
you create a primary account for your organization.
By default, your licenses are assigned to the Default Virtual Account under your primary account. As the
account administrator, you can create additional virtual accounts; for example, for regions, departments, or
subsidiaries. Multiple virtual accounts help you manage large numbers of licenses and appliances.
Licenses and appliances are managed per virtual account; only that virtual account’s appliances can use the
licenses assigned to the account. If you need additional licenses, you can transfer an unused license from
another virtual account. You can also transfer appliances between virtual accounts.
63
Periodic Communication with the License Authority
When you register a device with Cisco Smart Software Manager, you create a Product Instance Registration
Token in the manager, and then enter it in FDM. A registered device becomes associated with a virtual account
based on the token that is used.
For more information about the Cisco Smart Software Manager, see the online help for the manager.
Periodic Communication with the License Authority

When you use a Product Instance Registration Token to register the FTD device, the device registers with the
Cisco License Authority. The License Authority issues an ID certificate for communication between the device
and the License Authority. This certificate is valid for one year, although it will be renewed every six months.
If an ID certificate expires (usually in nine months or a year with no communication), the device reverts to a
de-registered state and licensed feature usage is suspended.
The device communicates with the License Authority on a periodic basis. If you make changes in the Cisco
Smart Software Manager, you can refresh the authorization on the device so the changes immediately take
effect. You also can wait for the device to communicate as scheduled. Normal license communication occurs
every 12 hours, but with the grace period, your device will operate for up to 90 days without calling home.
You must contact the License Authority before 90 days have passed.
Smart License Types

The following table explains the licenses available for the FTD device.
Your purchase of a FTD device automatically includes a Base license. All additional licenses are optional.
Table 2: Smart License Types
License Duration Granted Capabilities
Base Perpetual All features not covered by the optional term licenses.
The Base license is automatically added to your
account when you register.
You must also specify whether to Allow
export-controlled functionality on the products
registered with this token. You can select this option
only if your country meets export-control standards.
This option controls your use of advanced encryption
and the features that require advanced encryption.
Threat Term-based Required to use the following policies:

• Intrusion
• File (the Malware is also required)
Malware Term-based File policies (the Threat is also required).
URL Term-based Category and reputation-based URL filtering.

You can perform URL filtering on individual URLs
without this license.
64
Impact of Expired or Disabled Optional Licenses
Impact of Expired or Disabled Optional Licenses

If one of the following optional licenses expires, you can continue using features that require the license.
However, the license is marked out of compliance and you need to purchase the license and add it to your
account to bring the license back into compliance.
If you disable an optional license, the system reacts as follows:
• Malware—The system stops querying the Secure Malware Analytics Cloud, and also stops acknowledging
retrospective events sent from the Secure Malware Analytics Cloud. You cannot re-deploy existing access
control policies if they include file policies. Note that for a very brief time after a Malware license is
disabled, the system can use existing cached file dispositions. After the time window expires, the system
assigns a disposition of Unavailable to those files.
• Threat—The system no longer applies intrusion or file policies. You cannot re-deploy existing policies
that require the license.
• URL—Access control rules with URL category conditions immediately stop filtering URLs, and the
system no longer downloads updates to URL data. You cannot re-deploy existing access control policies
if they include rules with category and reputation-based URL conditions.
Managing Smart Licenses

Use the Smart License page to view the current license status for the system. The system must be licensed.
The page shows you whether you are using the 90-day evaluation license, or if you have registered with the
Cisco Smart Software Manager. Once registered, you can see the status of the connection to the Cisco Smart
Software Manager as well as the status for each type of license.
Usage Authorization identifies the Smart License Agent status:
• Authorized (“Connected,” “Sufficient Licenses”)—The device has contacted and registered successfully
with the License Authority, which has authorized the license entitlements for the appliance. The device
is now In-Compliance.
• Out-of-Compliance—There is no available license entitlement for the device. Licensed features continue
to work. However, you must either purchase or free up additional entitlements to become In-Compliance.
• Authorization Expired—The device has not communicated with the Licensing Authority in 90 or more
days. Licensed features continue to work. In this state, the Smart License Agent retries its authorization
requests. If a retry succeeds, the agent enters either an Out-of-Compliance or Authorized state, and begins
a new Authorization Period. Try manually synchronizing the device.
Note Click the i button next to the Smart License status to view the virtual account, export-controlled features,
and get a link to open the Cisco Smart Software Manager. Export-Controlled Features control software
that is subject to national security, foreign policy, and anti-terrorism laws and regulations.
The following procedure provides an overview of how to manage licenses for the system.
65
Registering the Device
Procedure
Step 1 Click Device, then click View Configuration in the Smart License summary.
Step 2 Register the device.
You must register with the Cisco Smart Software Manager before you can assign the optional licenses. Register
before the end of the evaluation period.
See Registering the Device, on page 66.
Step 3 Request and manage the optional feature licenses.

You must register the optional licenses to use the features controlled by the license. See Enabling or Disabling
Optional Licenses, on page 67.
Step 4 Maintain system licensing.

You can do the following tasks:
• Synchronizing with the Cisco Smart Software Manager, on page 67
• Unregistering the Device, on page 68
Registering the Device

Your purchase of the FTD device automatically includes the Base license. The Base license covers all features
not covered by the optional licenses. It is a perpetual license.
During initial system setup, you are prompted to register the device with Cisco Smart Software Manager. If
you instead elected to use the 90-day evaluation license, you must register the device before the end of the
evaluation period.
When you register the device, your virtual account allocates the license to the device. Registering the device
also registers any optional licenses that you have enabled.
Procedure
Step 2 Click Request Register and follow the instructions.
a) Click the link to open the Cisco Smart Software Manager and log into your account, or create a new one
if necessary.
b) Generate a new token.
When you create the token, you specify the amount of time the token is valid for use. The recommended
expiration period is 30 days. This period defines the expiration date of the token itself, and has no impact
on the device that you register using the token. If the token expires before you can use it, you can simply
generate a new token.
66
Enabling or Disabling Optional Licenses
You must also specify whether to Allow export-controlled functionality on the products registered
with this token. You can select this option only if your country meets export-control standards. This
option controls your use of advanced encryption and the features that require advanced encryption.
c) Copy and paste the token into the edit box on the Smart License Registration dialog box.
d) Click Request Register.
Enabling or Disabling Optional Licenses

You can enable (register) or disable (release) optional licenses. You must enable a license to use the features
controlled by the license.
If you no longer want to use the features covered by an optional term license, you can disable the license.
Disabling the license releases it in your Cisco Smart Software Manager account, so that you can apply it to
another device.
You can also enable evaluation versions of these licenses when running in evaluation mode. In evaluation
mode, the licenses are not registered with Cisco Smart Software Manager until you register the device.
Before you begin

Before disabling a license, ensure that you are not using it. Rewrite or delete any policies that require the
license.
Procedure
Step 2 Click the Enable/Disable control for each optional license as desired.
• Enable—Registers the license with your Cisco Smart Software Manager account and enables the controlled
features. You can now configure and deploy policies controlled by the license.
• Disable—Unregisters the license with your Cisco Smart Software Manager account and disables the
controlled features. You cannot configure the features in new policies, nor can you deploy policies that
use the feature.
Synchronizing with the Cisco Smart Software Manager

The system periodically synchronizes license information with Cisco Smart Software Manager. Normal license
communication occurs every 30 days, but with the grace period, your appliance will operate for up to 90 days
without calling home.
However, if you make changes in the Cisco Smart Software Manager, you can refresh the authorization on
the device so the changes immediately take effect.
Synchronization gets the current status of licenses, and renews authorization and the ID certificate.
67
Unregistering the Device
Procedure
Step 2 Select Resync Connection from the gear drop-down list.
Unregistering the Device

If you no longer want to use the device, you can unregister it from the Cisco Smart Software Manager. When
you unregister, the Base license and all optional licenses associated with the device are freed in your virtual
account. Optional licenses are available to be assigned to other devices.
After unregistering the device, the current configuration and policies on the device continue to work as-is,
but you cannot make or deploy any changes.
Procedure
Step 2 Select Unregister Device from the gear drop-down list.
Step 3 Read the warning and click Unregister if you really want to unregister the device.
68
CHAPTER 4
Monitoring the Device
The system includes dashboards and an Event Viewer that you can use to monitor the device and traffic that
is passing through the device.
• Enable Logging to Obtain Traffic Statistics, on page 69
• Monitoring Traffic and System Dashboards, on page 71
• Monitoring Additional Statistics Using the Command Line, on page 73
• Viewing Events, on page 74
Enable Logging to Obtain Traffic Statistics

You can monitor a wide range of traffic statistics using the monitoring dashboards and the Event Viewer.
However, you must enable logging to tell the system which statistics to collect. Logging generates various
types of events that provide insight into the connections going through the system.
The following topics explain more about events and the information they provide, with special emphasis on
connection logging.
Event Types
The system can generate the following types of events. You must generate these events to see related statistics
in the monitoring dashboards.
Connection Events
You can generate events for connections as users generate traffic that passes through the system. Enable
connection logging on access rules to generate these events.
Connection events include a wide variety of information about a connection, including source and
destination IP addresses and ports, URLs and applications used, and the number of bytes or packets
transmitted. The information also includes the action taken (for example, allowing or blocking the
connection), and the policies applied to the connection.
Intrusion Events
The system examines the packets that traverse your network for malicious activity that could affect the
availability, integrity, and confidentiality of a host and its data. When the system identifies a possible
intrusion, it generates an intrusion event, which is a record of the date, time, type of exploit, and contextual
information about the source of the attack and its target. Intrusion events are generated for any intrusion
rule set to block or alert, regardless of the logging configuration of the invoking access control rule.
69
Configurable Connection Logging
File Events
File events represent files that the system detected, and optionally blocked, in network traffic based on
your file policies. You must enable file logging on the access rule that applies the file policy to generate
these events.
When the system generates a file event, the system also logs the end of the associated connection regardless
of the logging configuration of the invoking access control rule.
Malware Events
The system can detect malware in network traffic as part of your overall access control configuration.
The AMP for Networks can generate a malware event, containing the disposition of the resulting event,
and contextual data about how, where, and when the malware was detected. You must enable file logging
on the access rule that applies the file policy to generate these events.
The disposition of a file can change, for example, from clean to malware or from malware to clean. If
AMP for Networks queries the AMP Cloud about a file, and the cloud determines the disposition has
changed within a week of the query, the system generates retrospective malware events.
Configurable Connection Logging

You should log connections according to the security and compliance needs of your organization. If your goal
is to limit the number of events you generate and improve performance, only enable logging for the connections
critical to your analysis. However, if you want a broad view of your network traffic for profiling purposes,
you can enable logging for additional connections.
Because the system can log a connection for multiple reasons, disabling logging in one place does not ensure
that matching connections will not be logged.
You configure connection logging on access control rules and the default action. Logging at the end of a
connection provides the most information about the connection. You can also log the beginning of the
connection, but these events have incomplete information. Connection logging is disabled by default, so you
must enable it for each rule (and the default action) that targets traffic that you want to track.
Automatic Connection Logging

The system automatically saves the following end-of-connection events, regardless of any other logging
configurations.
• The system automatically logs connections associated with intrusion events, unless the connection is
handled by the access control policy's default action. You must enable logging on the default action to
get intrusion events for matching traffic.
• The system automatically logs connections associated with file and malware events. This is for connection
events only: you can optionally disable the generation of file and malware events.
Tips for Connection Logging

Keep the following tips in mind when considering your logging configuration and the evaluation of related
statistics:
• When you allow traffic with an access control rule, you can use an associated intrusion or file policy (or
both) to further inspect traffic and block intrusions, prohibited files, and malware before the traffic can
70
Sending Events to an External Syslog Server
reach its final destination. Note, however, that by default file and intrusion inspection is disabled for
encrypted payloads. If the intrusion or file policies find reason to block a connection, the system
immediately logs an end-of-connection event regardless of your connection log settings. Logging allowed
connections provides the most statistical information on the traffic in your network.
• A trusted connection is one that is handled by a Trust access control rule or the default action in an access
control policy. However, trusted connections are not inspected for discovery data, intrusions, or prohibited
files and malware. Therefore, connection events for trusted connections contain limited information.
• For access control rules and access control policy default actions that block traffic, the system logs
beginning-of-connection events. Matching traffic is denied without further inspection.
• Logging blocked TCP connections during a Denial of Service (DoS) attack can affect system performance
and overwhelm the database with multiple similar events. Before you enable logging for a Block rule,
consider whether the rule monitors traffic on an Internet-facing interface or other interface vulnerable
to DoS attack.
Sending Events to an External Syslog Server

Besides viewing events through the FDM, which has a limited capacity to store events, you can selectively
configure rules and policies to send events to an external syslog server. You can then use the features and
additional storage of your selected syslog server platform to view and analyze event data.
To send events to an external syslog server, edit each rule, default action, or policy that enables connection
logging and select a syslog server object in the log settings.
For more information, see the help for each rule and policy type and also see Configuring Syslog Servers, on
page 94.
Monitoring Traffic and System Dashboards

The system includes several dashboards that you can use to analyze the traffic going through the device and
the results of your security policy. Use the information to evaluate the overall efficacy of your configuration
and to identify and resolve network problems.
Note The data used in traffic-related dashboards is collected from access control rules that enable connection
or file logging. The dashboards do not reflect traffic that matches rules for which no logging is enabled.
Ensure that you configure your rules to log the information that matters to you. In addition, user
information is available only if you configure identity rules to collect user identity. And finally, intrusion,
file, malware, and URL category information is available only if you have a license for those features
and configure rules that use the features.
Procedure
Step 1 Click Monitoring in the main menu to open the Dashboards page.
You can select predefined time ranges, such as the last hour or week, or define a custom time range with
specific start and end times, to control the data shown in the dashboard graphs and tables.
71
Monitoring Traffic and System Dashboards
Traffic-related dashboards include the following types of display:

• Top 5 bar graphs—These are shown in the Network Overview dashboard, and in the per-item summary
dashboards you see if you click on an item in a dashboard table. You can toggle the information between
a count of Transactions or Data Usage (total bytes sent and received). You can also toggle the display
to show all transactions, allowed transactions, or denied transactions. Click the View More link to see
the table associated with the graph.
• Tables—Tables show items of a particular type (for example, applications or web categories) with that
item's total transactions, allowed transactions, blocked transactions, data usage, and bytes sent and
received. You can toggle the numbers between raw Values and Percentages, and show the top 10, 100,
or 1000 entries. If the item is a link, click it to see a summary dashboard with more detailed information.
Step 2 Click the Dashboard links in the table of contents to see dashboards for the following data:
• Network Overview—Shows summary information about the traffic in the network, including the access
rules (policies) matched, users initiating traffic, applications used in connections, intrusion threats
(signatures) matched, web categories for URLs accessed, and the most frequent destinations for
connections.
• Users—Shows the top users of your network. You must configure identity policies to see user information.
You might see the following special entities:
• Failed Authentication—The user was prompted to authenticate, but failed to enter a valid
username/password pair within the maximum number of allowed attempts. Failure to authenticate
does not itself prevent the user from accessing the network, but you can write an access rule to limit
network access for these users.
• Guest—Guest users are like Failed Authentication users, except that your identity rule is configured
to call these users Guest. Guest users were prompted to authenticate and failed to do so within the
maximum number of attempts.
• No Authentication Required—The user was not prompted to authentication, because the user's
connections matched identity rules that specified no authentication.
• Unknown—There is no user mapping for the IP address, and there is no record of failed
authentication yet. Typically, this means that no HTTP traffic has yet been seen from that address.
• Applications—Shows the top applications, such as HTTP, that are being used in the network. The
information is available only for connections that are inspected. Connections are inspected if they match
an “allow” rule, or a block rule that uses criteria other than zone, address, and port. Thus, application
information is not available if the connection is trusted or blocked prior to hitting any rule that requires
inspection.
• Web Categories—Shows the top categories of web sites, such as Gambling or Educational Institutions,
that are being used in the network based on the categorization of web sites visited. You must have at
least one access control rule that uses URL category as a traffic matching criteria to get this information.
The information will be available for traffic that matches the rule, or for traffic that has to be inspected
to determine if it matches the rule. You will not see category (or reputation) information for connections
that match rules that come before the first web-category access control rule.
• Policies—Shows the top access rules matched by network traffic.
• Ingress Zones—Shows the top security zones through which traffic is entering the device.
• Egress Zones—Shows the top security zones through which traffic is exiting the device.
72
Monitoring Additional Statistics Using the Command Line
• Destinations—Shows the top destinations for network traffic.

• Attackers—Shows the top attackers, which are the source of connections that trigger intrusion events.
You must configure intrusion policies on access rules to see this information.
• Targets—Shows the top targets of intrusion events, which are the victims of an attack. You must configure
intrusion policies on access rules to see this information.
• Threats—Shows the top intrusion rules that have been triggered. You must configure intrusion policies
on access rules to see this information.
• File Logs—Shows the top file types seen in network traffic. You must configure file policies on access
rules to see this information.
• System— Shows an overall system view, including a display of interfaces and their status (mouse over
an interface to see its IP addresses), overall average system throughput (in 5 minute buckets for up to
one hour, and one hour buckets for longer periods), and summary information on system events, CPU
usage, memory usage, and disk usage. You can restrict the throughput graph to show a specific interface
rather than all interfaces. Interface-related statistics such as throughput does not include subinterfaces.
Note The information shown on the System dashboard is at the overall system level. If you log into
the device CLI, you can use various commands to see more detailed information. For example,
the show cpu and show memory commands include parameters for showing other details,
whereas these dashboards show data from the show cpu system and show memory system
commands.
Step 3 You can also click these links in the table of contents:
• Events—To view events as they occur. You must enable connection logging in individual access rules
to see connection events related to those rules. These events can help you resolve connection problems
for your users.
Monitoring Additional Statistics Using the Command Line

The FDM dashboards provide a wide variety of statistics related to the traffic going through the device and
general system usage. However, you can get additional information on areas not covered by the dashboards
by logging into the device CLI (see Logging Into the Command Line Interface (CLI), on page 5).
The CLI includes a variety of show commands to provide these statistics. You can also use the CLI for general
troubleshooting, including commands such as ping and traceroute. Most show commands have companion
clear commands to reset statistics to 0.
You can find documentation for the commands in Cisco Firepower Threat Defense Command Reference,
http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/security/firepower/command_ref/b_Command_Reference_for_Firepower_
Threat_Defense.html.
For example, you might find the following commands generally useful.
• show nat displays hit counts for your NAT rules.
• show xlate displays the actual NAT translations that are active.
• show conn provides information about current connections going through the device.
73
Viewing Events
• show dhcpd provides information about the DHCP servers you configure on the interfaces.
• show interface provides usage statistics for each interface.
Viewing Events
You can view events that are generated from your security policies that enable logging. Events are also
generated for intrusion and file policies that are triggered.
The event viewer table shows the events generated in real time. As new events are generated, older events
are rolled out of the table.
Before you begin

Whether events of particular types are generated depends on the following in addition to connections that
match the related policy:
• Connection events—An access rule must enable connection logging.
• Intrusion events—An access rule must apply an intrusion policy.
• File and Malware events—An access rule must apply a file policy and enable file logging.
Procedure
Step 1 Click Monitoring in the main menu.

Step 2 Select Events from the table of contents.
The event viewer organizes events on tabs based on event types. For more information, see Event Types, on
page 69.
Step 3 Click the tab that shows the type of event you want to view.
You can do the following with the event list:
• Click Pause to stop the addition of new events so that you can more easily find and analyze an event.
Click Resume to allow new events to appear.
• Select a different refresh rate (5, 10, 20, or 60 seconds) to control how fast new events are shown.
• Create a custom view that includes the columns you want. To create a custom view, either click the +
button in the tab bar, or click Add/Remove Columns. You cannot change the pre-set tabs, so adding or
removing columns creates a new view. For more information, see Configuring Custom Views, on page
75.
• To change the width of a column, click and drag the column heading divider to the desired width.
• Mouse over an event and click View Details to see complete information on an event. For a description
of the various fields in an event, see Event Field Descriptions, on page 77.
Step 4 If necessary, apply a filter to the table to help you locate the desired events based on various event attributes.
74
Configuring Custom Views
To create a new filter, either manually type in the filter by selecting atomic elements from the drop-down list
and entering the filter value, or build a filter by clicking a cell in the events table that includes a value on
which you want to filter. You can click multiple cells in the same column to create an OR condition among
the values, or click cells in different columns to create an AND condition among the columns. If you build
the filter by clicking cells, you can also edit the resulting filter to fine-tune it. For detailed information about
creating filter rules, see Filtering Events, on page 76.
Once you build the filter, do any of the following:
• To apply the filter and update the table to show only those events that match the filter, click the Filter
button.
• To clear an entire filter that you have applied and return the table to a non-filtered state, click Reset
Filters in the Filter box.
• To clear one of the atomic elements of a filter, mouse over the element and click the X for the element.
Then, click the Filter button.
Configuring Custom Views

You can create your own custom views so that you can easily see the columns you want when viewing events.
You can also edit or delete custom views, although you cannot edit or delete the pre-defined views.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Monitoring > Events.

Step 2 Do one of the following:
• To create a new view based on an existing custom (or pre-defined) view, click the tab for the view, then
click the + button to the left of the tabs.
• To edit an existing custom view, click the tab for the view.
Note To delete a custom view, simply click the X button in the view’s tab. You cannot undo a delete.
Step 3 Click the Add/Remove Columns link above the events table on the right, and select or deselect columns until
the selected list includes only those columns to include in the view.
Click and drag columns between the available (but not used) and selected lists. You can also click and drag
columns in the selected list to change the left-to-right order of the columns in the table. For a description of
the columns, see Event Field Descriptions, on page 77.
When finished, click OK to save your column changes.
Note If you change column selection while viewing a pre-defined view, a new view is created.
Step 4 If necessary, change column widths by clicking and dragging the column separators.
75
Filtering Events
Filtering Events
You can create complex filters to limit the events table to the events that currently interest you. You can use
the following techniques, alone or in combination, to build a filter:
Clicking columns
The easiest way to build a filter is to click on cells in the events table that contain the values on which
you intend to filter. Clicking a cell updates the Filter field with a correctly-formulated rule for that value
and field combination. However, using this technique requires that the existing list of events contains
the desired values.
You cannot filter on all columns. If you can filter on the contents of a cell, it is underlined when you
mouse over it.
Selecting atomic elements
You can also build a filter by clicking in the Filter field and selecting the desired atomic element from
the drop-down list, then typing in the match value. These elements include event fields that are not shown
as columns in the events table. They also include operators to define the relationship between the value
you type in and the events to display. Whereas clicking columns always results in an “equals (=)” filter,
when you select an element, you can also select “greater than (>)” or “less than (<)” for numeric fields.
Regardless of how you add an element to the Filter field, you can type into the field to adjust the operator or
value. Click Filter to apply the filter to the table.
Operators for Event Filters

You can use the following operators in an event filter:
= Equals. The event matches the specified value. You cannot use wildcards.
!= Not equals. The event does not match the specified value. You must type in the !
(exclamation point) to build a not-equals expression.
> Greater than. The event contains a value that is greater than the specified value. This
operator is available for numeric values only, such as port and IP address.
< Less than. The event contains a value that is less than the specified value. This operator
is available for numeric values only.
Rules for Complex Event Filters

When building a complex filter that contains more than one atomic element, keep the following rules in mind:
• Elements of the same type have an OR relationship between all values for that type. For example, including
Initiator IP=10.100.10.10 and Initiator IP=10.100.10.11 matches events that have either of these addresses
as the traffic source.
• Elements of different types have an AND relationship. For example, including Initiator IP=10.100.10.10
and Destination Port/ICMP Type=80 matches events that have this source address AND destination port
only. Events from 10.100.10.10 to a different destination port are not shown.
• Numeric elements, including IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, can specify ranges. For example, you could specify
Destination Port=50-80 to capture all traffic for ports within this range. Use a hyphen to separate the
start and end numbers. Ranges are not allowed for all numeric fields, for example, you cannot specify
an IP address range in the Source element.
76
Event Field Descriptions
• You cannot use wildcards or regular expressions.

Events can contain the following information. You can see this information when you view event details. You
can also add columns to the Event Viewer table to show the information that most interests you.
Following is a complete list of the available fields. Not every field applies to every type of event. Keep in
mind that the information available for any individual event can vary depending on how, why, and when the
system logged the connection.
Action
For connection events, the action associated with the access control rule or default action that logged the
connection:
Allow
Explicitly allowed connections.
Trust
Trusted connections. TCP connections detected by a trust rule on the first packet only generate an
end-of-connection event. The system generates the event one hour after the final session packet.
Block
Blocked connections. The Block action can be associated with Allow access rules under the following
conditions:
• Connections where an exploit was blocked by an intrusion policy.
• Connections where a file was blocked by a file policy.
Default Action
The connection was handled by the default action.
For file or malware events, the file rule action associated with the rule action for the rule the file matched,
and any associated file rule action options.
Allowed Connection
Whether the system allowed the traffic flow for the event.
Application
The application detected in the connection.
Application Business Relevance
The business relevance associated with the application traffic detected in the connection: Very High,
High, Medium, Low, or Very Low. Each type of application detected in the connection has an associated
business relevance; this field displays the lowest (least relevant) of those.
Application Categories, Application Tag
Criteria that characterize the application to help you understand the application's function.
77
Application Risk
The risk associated with the application traffic detected in the connection: Very High, High, Medium,
Low, or Very Low. Each type of application detected in the connection has an associated risk; this field
displays the highest of those.
Block Type
The type of block specified in the access control rule matching the traffic flow in the event: block or
interactive block.
Client Application, Client Version
The client application and version of that client detected in the connection.
Client Business Relevance
The business relevance associated with the client traffic detected in the connection: Very High, High,
Medium, Low, or Very Low. Each type of client detected in the connection has an associated business
relevance; this field displays the lowest (least relevant) of those.
Client Category, Client Tag
Criteria that characterize the application to help you understand the application's function.
Client Risk
The risk associated with the client traffic detected in the connection: Very High, High, Medium, Low,
or Very Low. Each type of client detected in the connection has an associated risk; this field displays the
highest of those.
Connection
The unique ID for the traffic flow, internally generated.
Connection Blocktype Indicator
The type of block specified in the access control rule matching the traffic flow in the event: block or
interactive block.
Connection Bytes
The total bytes for the connection.
Connection Time
The time for the beginning of the connection.
Connection Timestamp
The time the connection was detected.
Denied Connection
Whether the system denied the traffic flow for the event.
Destination Country and Continent
The country and continent of the receiving host.
Destination IP
The IP address used by the receiving host in an intrusion, file, or malware event.
Destination Port/ICMP Code; Destination Port; Destination Icode
The port or ICMP code used by the session responder.
78
Direction
The direction of transmission for a file.
Disposition
The file's disposition:
Malware
Indicates that the AMP Cloud categorized the file as malware or the file’s threat score exceeded the
malware threshold defined in the file policy. Local malware analysis can also mark files as malware.
Clean
Indicates that the AMP Cloud categorized the file as clean, or that a user added the file to the clean
list.
Unknown
Indicates that the system queried the AMP Cloud, but the file has not been assigned a disposition;
in other words, the AMP Cloud has not categorized the file.
Unavailable
Indicates that the system could not query the AMP Cloud. You may see a small percentage of events
with this disposition; this is expected behavior.
N/A
Indicates that a Detect Files or Block Files rule handled the file and the system did not query the
AMP Cloud.
Egress Interface, Egress Security Zone
The interface and zone through which the connection exited the device.
Event, Event Type
The type of event.
Event Seconds, Event Microseconds
The time, in seconds or microseconds, when the event was detected.
File Category
The general categories of file type, for example: Office Documents, Archive, Multimedia, Executables,
PDF files, Encoded, Graphics, or System Files.
File Event Timestamp
The time and date the file or malware file was created.
File Name
The name of the file.
File Rule Action
The action associated with file policy rule that detected the file, and any associated file rule action options.
File SHA-256
The SHA-256 hash value of the file.
79
File Size (KB)

The size of the file, in kilobytes. File size can be blank in cases where the system blocked the file before
it was completely received.
File Type
The type of file, for example, HTML or MSEXE.
File/Malware Policy
The file policy associated with the generation of the event.
Filelog Blocktype Indicator
The type of block specified in the file rule matching the traffic flow in the event: block or interactive
block.
Firewall Policy Rule, Firewall Rule
The access control rule or default action that handled the connection.
First Packet
The date and time the first packet of the session was seen.
HTTP Referrer
The HTTP referrer, which represents the referrer of a requested URL for HTTP traffic detected in the
connection (such as a website that provided a link to, or imported a link from, another URL).
HTTP Response
The HTTP status code sent in response to a client's HTTP request over a connection.
IDS Classification
The classification where the rule that generated the event belongs.
Ingress Interface, Ingress Security Zone
The interface and zone through which the connection entered the device.
Initiator Bytes, Initiator Packets
The total number of bytes or packets transmitted by the session initiator.
Initiator Country and Continent
The country and continent of the host that initiated the session. Available only if the initiator IP address
is routable.
Initiator IP
The host IP address (and hostname, if DNS resolution is enabled) that initiated the session in a connection
or Security Intelligence event.
Inline Result
Whether the system dropped or would have dropped the packet that triggered an intrusion event if
operating in inline mode. Blank indicates that the triggered rule was not set to Drop and Generate Events
Intrusion Policy
The intrusion policy where the rule that generated the event was enabled.
80
IPS Blocktype Indicator

The action of the intrusion rule matching the traffic flow in the event.
Last Packet
The date and time the last packet of the session was seen.
MPLS Label
The Multiprotocol Label Switching label associated with the packet that triggered this intrusion event.
Malware Blocktype Indicator
The type of block specified in the file rule matching the traffic flow in the event: block or interactive
block.
Message
For intrusion events, the explanatory text for the event. For malware or file events, any additional
information associated with the malware event.
NetBIOS Domain
The NetBIOS domain used in the session.
Original Client Country and Continent
The country and continent of the original client host that initiated the session. Available only if the
original client IP address is routable.
Original Client IP
The original IP address of the client that initiated an HTTP connection. This address is derived from the
X-Forwarded-For (XFF) or True-Client-IP HTTP header fields or their equivalent.
Policy, Policy Revision
The access control policy, and its revision, that includes the access (firewall) rule associated with the
event.
Priority
The event priority as determined by the Cisco Talos Intelligence Group (Talos): high, medium, or low.
Protocol
The transport protocol used in the connection.
Reason
The reason or reasons the connection was logged, in the situations explained in the following table. This
field is otherwise empty.
Reason Description
File Block The connection contained a file or malware file that the system prevented
from being transmitted. A reason of File Block is always paired with an action
of Block.
File Monitor The system detected a particular type of file in the connection.
81
Reason Description
File Resume Allow File transmission was originally blocked by a Block Files or Block Malware
file rule. After a new access control policy allowing the file was deployed,
the HTTP session automatically resumed.
File Resume Block File transmission was originally allowed by a Detect Files or Malware Cloud
Lookup file rule. After a new access control policy blocking the file was
deployed, the HTTP session automatically stopped.
Intrusion Block The system blocked or would have blocked an exploit (intrusion policy
violation) detected in the connection. A reason of Intrusion Block is paired
with an action of Block for blocked exploits and Allow for
would-have-blocked exploits.
Intrusion Monitor The system detected, but did not block, an exploit detected in the connection.
This occurs when the state of the triggered intrusion rule is set to Generate
Events.
Receive Times
The date and time the event was generated.
Referenced Host
If the protocol in the connection is HTTP or HTTPS, this field displays the hostname that the respective
protocol was using.
Responder Bytes, Responder Packets
The total number of bytes or packets transmitted by the session responder.
Responder Country and Continent
The country and continent of the host that responded to the session. Available only if the responder IP
address is routable.
Responder IP
The host IP address (and hostname, if DNS resolution is enabled) of the session responder in a connection
or Security Intelligence event.
Signature
The signature ID for a file/malware event.
Source Country and Continent
The country and continent of the sending host. Available only if the source IP address is routable.
Source IP
The IP address used by the sending host in an intrusion, file, or malware event.
Source Port/ICMP Type; Source Port; Source Port Itype
The port or ICMP type used by the session initiator.
TCP Flags
The TCP flags detected in the connection.
82
Total Packets
The total number of packets transmitted in the connection, which is Initiator Packets + Responder
Packets.
URL, URL Category, URL Reputation, URL Reputation Score
The URL requested by the monitored host during the session and its associated category, reputation, and
reputation score, if available.
If the system identifies or blocks an SSL application, the requested URL is in encrypted traffic, so the
system identifies the traffic based on an SSL certificate. For SSL applications, therefore, the URL indicates
the common name contained in the certificate.
User
The user associated with the initiator IP address.
VLAN
The innermost VLAN ID associated with the packet that triggered the event.
Web App Business Relevance
The business relevance associated with the web application traffic detected in the connection: Very High,
High, Medium, Low, or Very Low. Each type of web application detected in the connection has an
associated business relevance; this field displays the lowest (least relevant) of those.
Web App Categories, Web App Tag
Criteria that characterize the web application to help you understand the web application's function.
Web App Risk
The risk associated with the web application traffic detected in the connection: Very High, High, Medium,
Low, or Very Low. Each type of web application detected in the connection has an associated risk; this
field displays the highest of those.
Web Application
The web application, which represents the content or requested URL for HTTP traffic detected in the
connection.
If the web application does not match the URL for the event, the traffic is probably referred traffic, such
as advertisement traffic. If the system detects referred traffic, it stores the referring application (if available)
and lists that application as the web application.
83
84
CHAPTER 5
Objects
Objects are reusable containers that define criteria that you want to use in policies or other settings. For
example, network objects define host and subnet addresses.
Objects let you define criteria so that you can easily reuse the same criteria in different policies. When you
update an object, all policies that use the object are automatically updated.
• Object Types, on page 85
• Managing Objects, on page 86
Object Types
You can create the following types of object. In most cases, if a policy or setting allows an object, you must
use an object.
Object Type Main Use Description
Application Filter Access control rules. An application filter object defines the applications used in an
IP connection, or a filter that defines applications by type,
category, tag, risk, or business relevance. You can use these
objects in policies to control traffic instead of using port
specifications.
See Configuring Application Filter Objects, on page 90.
Geolocation Security policies. A geolocation object defines countries and continents that host
the device that is the source or destination of traffic. You can
use these objects in policies to control traffic instead of using IP
addresses.
See Configuring Geolocation Objects, on page 94.
IKE Policy VPN. Internet Key Exchange (IKE) Policy objects define the IKE
proposal used to authenticate IPsec peers, negotiate and distribute
IPsec encryption keys, and automatically establish IPsec security
associations (SAs). There are separate objects for IKEv1 and
IKEv2.
See Configuring the Global IKE Policy, on page 256.
85
Objects
Managing Objects
Object Type Main Use Description
IPsec Proposal VPN. IPsec Proposal objects configure the IPsec proposal used during
IKE Phase 2 negotiations. The IPsec proposal defines the
combination of security protocols and algorithms that secure
traffic in an IPsec tunnel. There are separate objects for IKEv1
and IKEv2.
See Configuring IPsec Proposals, on page 261.
Network Security policies and Network groups and network objects (collectively referred to as
a wide variety of network objects) define the addresses of hosts or networks.
device settings.
See Configuring Network Objects and Groups, on page 87.
Port Security policies. Port groups and port objects (collectively referred to as port
objects) define the protocols, ports, or ICMP services for traffic.
See Configuring Port Objects and Groups, on page 88.
Security Zone Security policies. A security zone is a grouping of interfaces. Zones divide the
network into segments to help you manage and classify traffic.
See Configuring Security Zones, on page 89.
Syslog Servers Access control rules. A syslog server object identifies a server that can receive
connection-oriented or diagnostic system log (syslog) messages.
Diagnostic logging.
See Configuring Syslog Servers, on page 94.
URL Access control rules. URL objects and groups (collectively referred to as URL objects)
define the URL or IP addresses of web requests.
See Configuring URL Objects and Groups, on page 92.
Managing Objects
You can configure objects directly through the Objects page, or you can configure them while editing policies.
Either method yields the same results, a new or updated object, so use the technique that suits your needs at
the time.
The following procedure explains how you can create and manage your objects directly through the Objects
page.
Note When you edit a policy or setting, if a property requires an object, you are shown a list of the ones that
are already defined, and you select the appropriate object. If the desired object does not yet exist, simply
click the Create New Object link shown in the list.
86
Objects
Configuring Network Objects and Groups
Procedure
Step 1 Select Objects.

The Objects page has a table of contents listing the available types of objects. When you select an object type,
you see a list of existing objects, and you can create new ones from here. You can also see the object contents
and type.
Step 2 Select the object type from the table of contents and do any of the following:
• To create an object, click the + button. The content of the objects differ based on type; see the configuration
topic for each object type for specific information.
• To create a group object, click the Add Group ( ) button. Group objects include more than one item.
• To edit an object, click the edit icon ( ) for the object. You cannot edit the contents of a pre-defined
object.
• To delete an object, click the delete icon ( ) for the object. You cannot delete an object if it is currently
being used in a policy or another object, or if it is a pre-defined object.
Configuring Network Objects and Groups

Use network group and network objects (collectively referred to as network objects) to define the addresses
of hosts or networks. You can then use the objects in security policies for purposes of defining traffic matching
criteria, or in settings to define the addresses of servers or other resources.
A network object defines a single host or network address, whereas a network group object can define more
than one address.
The following procedure explains how you can create and edit objects directly through the Objects page. You
can also create network objects while editing an address property by clicking the Create New Network link
shown in the object list.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Objects, then select Network from the table of contents.
• To create an object, click the + button.
• To create a group, click the Add Group ( ) button.
• To edit an object or group, click the edit icon ( ) for the object.
To delete an unreferenced object, click the trash can icon ( ) for the object.
Step 3 Enter a Name for the object and optionally, a description, and define the object contents.
We recommend that you do not use an IP address alone for the name so that you can easily tell object names
from object contents or standalone IP addresses. If you want to use an IP address in the name, prefix it with
something meaningful, such as host-192.168.1.2 or network-192.168.1.0. If you use an IP address as the name,
87
Objects
Configuring Port Objects and Groups
the system adds a vertical bar as a prefix, for example, |192.168.1.2. FDM does not show the bar in the object
selectors, but you will see this naming standard if you examine the running configuration using the show
running-config command in the CLI.
Step 4 Configure the contents of the object.

Network Objects
Select the object Type and configure the contents:
• Network—Enter a network address using one of the following formats:
• IPv4 network including subnet mask, for example, 10.100.10.0/24 or 10.100.10.0/255.255.255.0.
• IPv6 network including prefix, for example, 2001:DB8:0:CD30::/60.
• Host—Enter a host IP address using one of the following formats:

• IPv4 host address, for example, 10.100.10.10.
• IPv6 host address, for example, 2001:DB8::0DB8:800:200C:417A or
2001:DB8:0:0:0DB8:800:200C:417A.
Network Groups
Click the + button to select network objects to add to the group. You can also create new objects.
Step 5 Click OK to save your changes.
Configuring Port Objects and Groups

Use port group and port objects (collectively referred to as port objects) to define the protocols, ports, or ICMP
services for traffic. You can then use the objects in security policies for purposes of defining traffic matching
criteria, for example, to use access rules to allow traffic to specific TCP ports.
A port object defines a single protocol, TCP/UDP port or port range, or ICMP service, whereas a port group
object can define more than one service.
The system includes several pre-defined objects for common services. You can use these objects in your
policies. However, you cannot edit or delete system-defined objects.
Note When creating port group objects, ensure that the combination of objects makes sense. For example,
you cannot have a mixture of protocols in an object if you use it to specify both source and destination
ports in an access rule. Exercise care when editing an object that is already being used, or you could
invalid (and disable) policies that use the object.
can also create port objects while editing a service property by clicking the Create New Port link shown in
the object list.
88
Objects
Configuring Security Zones
Procedure
Step 1 Select Objects, then select Ports from the table of contents.
Step 3 Enter a name for the object and optionally, a description, and define the object contents.
Port Objects
Select the Protocol, then configure the protocol as follows:
• TCP, UDP—Enter the single port or port range number, for example, 80 (for HTTP) or 1-65535 (to
cover all ports).
• ICMP, IPv6-ICMP—Select the ICMP Type and optionally, the Code. Select Any for the type to apply
to all ICMP messages. For information on the types and codes, see the following pages:
• ICMP—http://www.iana.org/assignments/icmp-parameters/icmp-parameters.xml
• ICMPv6—http://www.iana.org/assignments/icmpv6-parameters/icmpv6-parameters.xml
• Other—Select the desired protocol.
Port Groups
Click the + button to select port objects to add to the group. You can also create new objects.
Configuring Security Zones

A security zone is a grouping of interfaces. Zones divide the network into segments to help you manage and
classify traffic. You can define multiple zones, but a given interface can be in one zone only.
The system creates the following zones during initial configuration. You can edit these zones to add or remove
interfaces, or you can delete the zones if you no longer use them.
• inside_zone—Includes the inside interface. If the inside interface is a bridge group, this zone includes
all the bridge group member interfaces instead of the inside Bridge Virtual Interface (BVI). This zone
is intended to represent internal networks.
• outside_zone—Includes the outside interface. This zone is intended to represent networks external to
your control, such as the Internet.
Typically, you would group interfaces by the role they play in your network. For example, you would place
the interface that connects to the Internet in the outside_zone security zone, and all of the interfaces for your
89
Objects
Configuring Application Filter Objects
internal networks in the inside_zone security zone. Then, you could apply access control rules to traffic
coming from the outside zone and going to the inside zone.
Before creating zones, consider the access rules and other policies you want to apply to your networks. For
example, you do not need to put all internal interfaces into the same zone. If you have 4 internal networks,
and you want to treat one differently than the other three, you can create two zones rather than one. If you
have an interface that should allow outside access to a public web server, you might want to use a separate
zone for the interface.
can also create security zones while editing a security zone property by clicking the Create New Security
Zone link shown in the object list.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Objects, then select Security Zones from the table of contents.
• To edit an object, click the edit icon ( ) for the object.
Step 3 Enter a Name for the object and optionally, a description.

Step 4 In the Interfaces list, click + and select the interfaces to add to the zone.
The list shows all named interfaces that are not currently in a zone. You must configure an interface and give
it a name before you can add it to a zone.
If all named interfaces are already in zones, the list is empty. If you are trying to move an interface to a different
zone, you must first remove it from its current zone.
Note You cannot add a bridge group interface (BVI) to a zone. Instead, add the member interfaces. You
can put the members into different zones.

An application filter object defines the applications used in an IP connection, or a filter that defines applications
by type, category, tag, risk, or business relevance. You can use these objects in policies to control traffic
instead of using port specifications.
Although you can specify individual applications, application filters simplify policy creation and administration.
For example, you could create an access control rule that identifies and blocks all high risk, low business
relevance applications. If a user attempts to use one of those applications, the session is blocked.
You can select applications and application filters directly in a policy without using application filter objects.
However, an object is convenient if you want to create several policies for the same group of applications or
filters. The system includes several pre-defined application filters, which you cannot edit or delete.
90
Objects
Note Cisco frequently updates and adds additional application detectors via system and vulnerability database
(VDB) updates. Thus, a rule blocking high risk applications can automatically apply to new applications
without you having to update the rule manually.
can also create application filter objects while editing an access control rule by clicking the Save As Filter
link after adding application criteria to the Applications tab.
Before you begin

When editing a filter, if a selected application was removed by a VDB update, “(Deprecated)” appears after
the application name. You must remove these applications from the filter, or subsequent deployments and
system software upgrades will be blocked.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Objects, then select Application Filters from the table of contents.

Step 4 In the Applications list, click Add + and select the applications and filters to add to the object.
The initial list shows applications in a continually scrolling list. Click Advanced Filter to see the filter options
and to get an easier view for selecting applications. Click Add when you have made your selections. You can
repeat the process to add additional applications or filters.
Note Multiple selections within a single filter criteria have an OR relationship. For example, Risk is High
OR Very High. The relationship between filters is AND, so Risk is High OR Very High, AND
Business Relevance is Low OR Very Low. As you select filters, the list of applications in the display
updates to show only those that meet the criteria. You can use these filters to help you find
applications that you want to add individually, or to verify that you are selecting the desired filters
to add to the rule.
Risks
The likelihood that the application is used for purposes that might be against your organization's security
policy, from very low to very high.
Business Relevance
The likelihood that the application is used within the context of your organization's business operations, as
opposed to recreationally, from very low to very high.
91
Objects
Configuring URL Objects and Groups
Types
The type of application:
• Application Protocol—Application protocols such as HTTP and SSH, which represent communications
between hosts.
• Client Protocol—Clients such as web browsers and email clients, which represent software running on
the host.
• Web Application—Web applications such as MPEG video and Facebook, which represent the content
or requested URL for HTTP traffic.
Categories
A general classification for the application that describes its most essential function.
Tags
Additional information about the application, similar to category.
For encrypted traffic, the system can identify and filter traffic using only the applications tagged SSL Protocol.
Applications without this tag can only be detected in unencrypted or decrypted traffic. Also, the system assigns
the decrypted traffic tag to applications that the system can detect in decrypted traffic only, not encrypted
or unencrypted.
Applications List (bottom of the display)
This list updates as you select filters from the options above the list, so you can see the applications that
currently match the filter. Use this list to verify that your filter is targeting the desired applications when you
intend to add filter criteria to the rule. If your intention is to add specific applications, select them from this
list.

Use URL objects and groups (collectively referred to as URL objects) to define the URL or IP addresses of
web requests. You can use these objects to implement manual URL filtering in access control policies.
A URL object defines a single URL or IP address, whereas a URL group object can define more than one
URL or address.
When creating URL objects, keep the following points in mind:
• If you do not include a path (that is, there is no / character in the URL), the match is based on the server’s
hostname only. The hostname is considered a match if it comes after the :// separator, or after any dot in
the hostname. For example, ign.com matches ign.com and www.ign.com, but it does not match
verisign.com.
• If you include one or more / character, the entire URL string is used for a substring match, including the
server name, path, and any query parameters. However, we recommend that you do not use manual URL
filtering to block or allow individual web pages or parts of sites, as servers can be reorganized and pages
moved to new paths. Substring matching can also lead to unexpected matches, where the string you
include in the URL object also matches paths on unintended servers or strings within query parameters.
92
Objects
• The system disregards the encryption protocol (HTTP vs HTTPS). In other words, if you block a website,
both HTTP and HTTPS traffic to that website is blocked, unless you use an application condition to
target a specific protocol. When creating a URL object, you do not need to specify the protocol when
creating an object. For example, use example.com rather than http://example.com.
• If you plan to use a URL object to match HTTPS traffic in an access control rule, create the object using
the subject common name in the public key certificate used to encrypt the traffic. Also, the system
disregards subdomains within the subject common name, so do not include subdomain information. For
example, use example.com rather than www.example.com.
However, please understand that the subject common name in the certificate might be completely unrelated
to a web site’s domain name. For example, the subject common name in the certificate for youtube.com
is *.google.com (this of course might change at any time). You will get more consistent results if you
use the SSL Decryption policy to decrypt HTTPS traffic so that URL filtering rules work on decrypted
traffic.
Note URL objects will not match HTTPS traffic if the browser resumes a TLS
session because the certificate information is no longer available. Thus,
even if you carefully configure the URL object, you might get inconsistent
results for HTTPS connections.
can also create URL objects while editing a URL property by clicking the Create New URL link shown in
the object list.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Objects, then select URL from the table of contents.

Step 4 Define the object contents.
URL Objects
Enter a URL or IP address in the URL box. You cannot use wildcards in the URL.
URL Groups
Click the + button to select URL objects to add to the group. You can also create new objects.
93
Objects
Configuring Geolocation Objects
Configuring Geolocation Objects

A geolocation object defines countries and continents that host the device that is the source or destination of
traffic. You can use these objects in policies to control traffic instead of using IP addresses. For example,
using geographical location, you could easily restrict access to a particular country without needing to know
all of the potential IP addresses used there.
You can typically select geographical locations directly in a policy without using geolocation objects. However,
an object is convenient if you want to create several policies for the same group of countries and continents.
Note To ensure that you are using up-to-date geographical location data to filter your traffic, Cisco strongly
recommends that you regularly update the geolocation database (GeoDB).
can also create geolocation objects while editing a network property by clicking the Create New Geolocation
link shown in the object list.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Objects, then select Geolocation from the table of contents.

Step 4 In the Continents/Countries list, click Add + and select the continents and countries to add to the object.
Selecting a continent selects all countries within the continent.
Configuring Syslog Servers

A syslog server object identifies a server that can receive connection-oriented or diagnostic system log (syslog)
messages. If you have a syslog server set up for log collection and analysis, create objects to define them and
use the objects in the related policies.
You can send the following types of events to the syslog server:
• Connection events. Configure the syslog server object on the following types of policy: access control
rules and default action.
• Diagnostic events. See Configuring Diagnostic Logging, on page 283.
94
Objects
can also create syslog server objects while editing a syslog server property by clicking the Add Syslog Server
link shown in the object list.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Objects, then select Syslog Servers from the table of contents.
Step 3 Configure the syslog server properties:

• Device Interface—Select the interface through which the syslog server is reached. If the server is
accessible through a bridge group member interface, select the bridge group interface (BVI) instead.
• IP Address—Enter the IP address of the syslog server.
• Port—Enter the UDP port that the server uses for receiving syslog messages. The default is 514. If you
change the default, the port must be in the range 1025 to 65535.
95
Objects
96
PA R T I
The Basics
• Interfaces, on page 99
• Routing, on page 117
CHAPTER 6
Interfaces
The following topics explain how to configure the interfaces on your FTD device.
• About FTD Interfaces, on page 99
• Guidelines and Limitations for Interfaces, on page 102
• Configure a Physical Interface, on page 104
• Configure Bridge Groups, on page 107
• Configure VLAN Subinterfaces and 802.1Q Trunking, on page 110
• Configure Advanced Interface Options, on page 113
• Monitoring Interfaces, on page 116
• Examples for Interfaces, on page 116
About FTD Interfaces

FTD includes data interfaces as well as a Management/Diagnostic interface.
When you attach a cable to an interface connection, you need to configure the interface. At minimum, you
need to name the interface and enable it for it to pass traffic. If the interface is a member of a bridge group,
this is sufficient. For non-bridge group members, you also need to give the interface an IP address. If you
intend to create VLAN subinterfaces rather than a single physical interface on a given port, you would typically
configure the IP addresses on the subinterface, not on the physical interface. VLAN subinterfaces let you
divide a physical interface into multiple logical interfaces that are tagged with different VLAN IDs, which is
useful when you connect to a trunk port on a switch.
The interface list shows the available interfaces, their names, addresses, and states. You can change the state
of an interface, on or off, directly in the list of interfaces. The list shows the interface characteristics based
on your configuration. Use the open/close arrow on a bridge group interface to view the member interfaces,
which also appear by themselves in the list.
The following topics explain the limitations of configuring interfaces through the FDM as well as other
interface management concepts.
Interface Modes
You can configure one of the following modes for each interface:
99
The Basics
Management/Diagnostic Interface
Routed
Each Layer 3 routed interface requires an IP address on a unique subnet. You would typically attach
these interfaces to switches, a port on another router, or to an ISP/WAN gateway.
BridgeGroupMember
A bridge group is a group of interfaces that the FTD device bridges instead of routes. All interfaces are
on the same network. The bridge group is represented by a Bridge Virtual Interface (BVI) that has an IP
address on the bridge network.
You can route between routed interfaces and BVIs, if you name the BVI. In this case, the BVI acts as
the gateway between member interfaces and routed interfaces. If you do not name the BVI, traffic on
the bridge group member interfaces cannot leave the bridge group. Normally, you would name the
interface so that you can route member interfaces to the internet.
One use for a bridge group in routed mode is to use extra interfaces on the FTD device instead of an
external switch. You can attach endpoints directly to bridge group member interfaces. You can also
attach switches to add more endpoints to the same network as the BVI.
Management/Diagnostic Interface
The physical port labeled Management actually has two separate interfaces associated with it.
• Management virtual interface—This IP address is used for system communication. This is the address
the system uses for Smart Licensing and to retrieve database updates. You can open management sessions
to it (FDM and CLI). You must configure a management address, which is defined on System Settings >
• Diagnostic virtual interface—You can use this interface to send syslog messages to an external syslog
server. Configuring an IP address for the Diagnostic interface is optional. The main reason to configure
the interface is if you want to use it for syslog messages. This interface appears, and is configurable, on
the Device > Interfaces page. The Diagnostic interface only allows management traffic, and does not
allow through traffic.
One way to configure Management/Diagnostic is to not wire the physical port to a network. Instead, configure
the Management IP address only, and configure it to use the data interfaces as the gateway for obtaining
updates from the internet. Then, open the inside interfaces to HTTPS/SSH traffic (by default, HTTPS is
enabled) and open the FDM using the inside IP address (see Configuring the Management Access List, on
page 281).
Recommendations for Configuring a Separate Management Network

If you want to use a separate management network, wire the physical Management interface to a switch or
router.
Then, configure the following:
• Select Device > System Settings > Management Interface and configure IPv4 or IPv6 addresses (or
both) on the attached network. If you want to, you can configure a DHCP server to provide IPv4 addresses
to other endpoints on the network. If there is a router with a route to the internet on the management
network, use that as the gateway. Otherwise, use the data interfaces as the gateway.
• Configure an address for the Diagnostic interface (on Device > Interfaces) only if you intend to send
syslog messages through the interface to a syslog server. Otherwise, do not configure an address for
Diagnostic; it is not needed. Any IP address you configure must be on the same subnet as the management
100
The Basics
Limitations for Management/Diagnostic Interface Configuration for a Separate Management Network
IP address and cannot be the in DHCP server pool. For example, if you use 192.168.45.45 as the
management address, and 192.168.45.46-192.168.45.254 as the DHCP pool, you can configure Diagnostic
using any address from 192.168.45.1 to 192.168.45.44.
Limitations for Management/Diagnostic Interface Configuration for a Separate Management

Network
If you wire the physical Management interface, ensure that you follow these limitations:
• If you want a DHCP server on the management network, configure it on the Management interface
(Device > System Settings > Management Interface). You cannot configure a DHCP server on the
Diagnostic interface.
• If there is another DHCP server on the management network, disable it or the DHCP server running on
Management. As a rule, a given subnet should have no more than one DHCP server.
• If you configure addresses for both Management and Diagnostic, ensure that they are on the same subnet.
• You can use the data interfaces as the management gateway even if you configure an IP address for
Diagnostic. But Diagnostic will not use the data interfaces as a gateway. If you need a path from Diagnostic
to other networks, another router on the management network needs to route the traffic originating from
the Diagnostic IP address. If necessary, configure static routes for the Diagnostic interface (select Device >
Routing).
Security Zones
Each interface can be assigned to a single security zone. You then apply your security policy based on zones.
For example, you can assign the inside interface to the inside zone; and the outside interface to the outside
zone. You can configure your access control policy to enable traffic to go from inside to outside, but not from
outside to inside, for example.
For bridge groups, you add member interfaces to the zones, you cannot add the Bridge Virtual Interface (BVI).
You do not include the Management/Diagnostic interface in a zone. Zones apply to data interfaces only.
You can create security zones on the Objects page.
IPv6 Addressing
You can configure two types of unicast addresses for IPv6:
• Global—The global address is a public address that you can use on the public network. For a bridge
group, you configure the global address on the Bridge Virtual Interface (BVI), not on each member
interface. You cannot specify any of the following as a global address.
• Internally reserved IPv6 addresses: fd00::/56 (from=fd00:: to= fd00:0000:0000:00ff:ffff:ffff:ffff:ffff)
• An unspecified address, such as ::/128
• The loopback address, ::1/128
• multicast addresses, ff00::/8
• Link-local addresses, fe80::/10
101
The Basics
Auto-MDI/MDIX Feature
• Link-local—The link-local address is a private address that you can only use on the directly-connected
network. Routers do not forward packets using link-local addresses; they are only for communication
on a particular physical network segment. They can be used for address configuration or for the Network
Discovery functions such as address resolution and neighbor discovery. In a bridge group, enabling IPv6
on the BVI automatically configures link-local addresses for each bridge group member interface. Each
interface must have its own address because the link-local address is only available on a segment, and
is tied to the interface MAC address.
At a minimum, you need to configure a link-local address for IPv6 to operate. If you configure a global address,
a link-local address is automatically configured on the interface, so you do not also need to specifically
configure a link-local address. If you do not configure a global address, then you need to configure the link-local
address, either automatically or manually.
Auto-MDI/MDIX Feature
For RJ-45 interfaces, the default auto-negotiation setting also includes the Auto-MDI/MDIX feature.
Auto-MDI/MDIX eliminates the need for crossover cabling by performing an internal crossover when a
straight cable is detected during the auto-negotiation phase. Either the speed or duplex must be set to
auto-negotiate to enable Auto-MDI/MDIX for the interface. If you explicitly set both the speed and duplex
to a fixed value, thus disabling auto-negotiation for both settings, then Auto-MDI/MDIX is also disabled. For
Gigabit Ethernet, when the speed and duplex are set to 1000 and full, then the interface always auto-negotiates;
therefore Auto-MDI/MDIX is always enabled and you cannot disable it.
Guidelines and Limitations for Interfaces

The following topics cover some of the limitations for interfaces.
Limitations for Interface Configuration

When you use the FDM to configure the device, there are several limitations to interface configuration. If you
need any of the following features, you must use the FMC to configure the device.
• Routed firewall mode only is supported. You cannot configure transparent firewall mode interfaces.
• You cannot configure passive or ERSPAN interfaces.
• You cannot configure interfaces to be inline (in an inline set), or inline tap, for IPS-only processing.
IPS-only mode interfaces bypass many firewall checks and only support IPS security policy. In comparison,
Firewall mode interfaces subject traffic to firewall functions such as maintaining flows, tracking flow
states at both IP and TCP layers, IP defragmentation, and TCP normalization. You can also optionally
configure IPS functions for this firewall mode traffic according to your security policy.
• You cannot configure EtherChannel or redundant interfaces.
• You can only add one bridge group.
• You cannot configure PPPoE for IPv4. If the Internet interface is connected to a DSL, cable modem, or
other connection to your ISP, and your ISP uses PPPoE to provide your IP address, you must use the
FMC instead of the FDM.
102
The Basics
Maximum Number of VLAN Subinterfaces by Device Model
• For the ASA 5512-X, 5515-X, 5525-X, 5545-X, and 5555-X, you can install an optional network interface
module. Modules are only discovered during bootstrap (that is, during installation, when switching
between local/remote management, and during a major/minor release upgrade, but not patch or hot fix
upgrades). For a module that includes SFP interfaces, the FDM sets the speed and duplex to auto; however,
the SFP interfaces do not support the speed and duplex set to auto. For these interfaces, select the right
speed (for example, 1000), or select Default for the speed and duplex. The Default setting tells FDM to
simply not configure the options, and thus leave them at their default settings (any existing configuration
is not cleared). Please refer to the network module documentation to determine the maximum speed
supported by the interface. You can also select No Negotiate for the speed setting if the interface accepts
it, but select this option only if you are certain it is supported.
Note If you make a mistake and need to unconfigure No Negotiate, set the option
to Auto and deploy. The deployment will fail. You can then set the option
to Default and deploy again, and this should result in a successful
deployment.
Maximum Number of VLAN Subinterfaces by Device Model

The device model limits the maximum number of VLAN subinterfaces that you can configure. Note that you
can configure subinterfaces on data interfaces only, you cannot configure them on the management interface.
The following table explains the limits for each device model.
Model Maximum VLAN Subinterfaces
ASA 5506-X 30
ASA 5506W-X
ASA 5506H-X
ASA 5508-X 50
ASA 5512-X 100
ASA 5515-X 100
ASA 5516-X 100
ASA 5525-X 200
ASA 5545-X 300
ASA 5555-X 500
103
The Basics
Configure a Physical Interface

At minimum, you must enable a physical interface to use it. You would also typically name it and configure
IP addressing. You would not configure IP addressing if you intend to create VLAN subinterfaces, or if you
intend to add the interface to a bridge group.
You can disable an interface to temporarily prevent transmission on the connected network. You do not need
to remove the interface's configuration.
Procedure
Step 1 Click Device, then click the link in the Interfaces summary.
The interface list shows the available interfaces, their names, addresses, and states.
Step 2 Click the edit icon ( ) for the physical interface you want to edit.
Step 3 Set the following:
a) Set the Interface Name.
104
The Basics
Set the name for the interface, up to 48 characters. Alphabetic characters must be lower case. For example,
inside or outside. Without a name, the rest of the interface configuration is ignored. Unless you configure
subinterfaces, the interface should have a name.
Note If you change the name, the change is automatically reflected everywhere you used the old
name, including security zones, syslog server objects, and DHCP server definitions. However,
you cannot remove the name until you first remove all configurations that use the name, because
you typically cannot use an unnamed interface for any policy or setting.
b) Set the Status slider to the enabled setting ( ).

If you intend to configure subinterfaces for this physical interface, you are probably done. Click Save and
continue with Configure VLAN Subinterfaces and 802.1Q Trunking, on page 110. Otherwise, continue.
Note Even when configuring subinterfaces, it is valid to name the interface and supply IP addresses.
This is not the typical setup, but if you know that is what you need, you can configure it.
c) (Optional) Set the Description.

The description can be up to 200 characters on a single line, without carriage returns.
Step 4 Click the IPv4 Address tab and configure the IPv4 address.
Select one of the following options from the Type field:
• DHCP—Choose this option if the address should be obtained from the DHCP server on the network.
Change the following options if necessary:
• Route Metric—If you obtain the default route from the DHCP server, the administrative distance
to the learned route, between 1 and 255. The default is 1.
• Obtain Default Route—Whether to get the default route from the DHCP server. You would
normally select this option, which is the default.
• Static—Choose this option if you want to assign an address that should not change. Type in the interface's
IP address and the subnet mask for the network attached to the interface. For example, if you attach the
10.100.10.0/24 network, you could enter 10.100.10.1/24. Ensure that the address is not already used on
the network.
Note For an existing interface, your ability to change the address is constrained if you have a DHCP
server configured for the interface. The new IP address must be on the same subnet as the
DHCP address pool, and it cannot be part of that pool. If you need to configure an address on
a different subnet, first delete the DHCP server configuration. See Configuring the DHCP
Server, on page 284.
Step 5 (Optional.) Click the IPv6 Address tab and configure the IPv6 address.
• State—To enable IPv6 processing and to automatically configure the link-local address when you do
not configure the global address, select Enabled. The link local address is generated based on the interface
MAC addresses (Modified EUI-64 format).
Note Disabling IPv6 does not disable IPv6 processing on an interface that is configured with an
explicit IPv6 address or that is enabled for autoconfiguration.
105
The Basics
• Address Auto Configuration—Select this option to have the address automatically configured. IPv6
stateless autoconfiguration will generate a global IPv6 address only if the link on which the device resides
has a router configured to provide IPv6 services, including the advertisement of an IPv6 global prefix
for use on the link. If IPv6 routing services are not available on the link, you will get a link-local IPv6
address only, which you cannot access outside of the device's immediate network link. The link local
address is based on the Modified EUI-64 interface ID.
Although RFC 4862 specifies that hosts configured for stateless autoconfiguration do not send Router
Advertisement messages, the FTD device does send Router Advertisement messages in this case. Select
Suppress RA to suppress messages and conform to the RFC.
• Static Address/Prefix—If you do not use stateless autoconfiguration, enter the full static global IPv6
address and network prefix. For example, 2001:0DB8::BA98:0:3210/48. For more information on IPv6
addressing, see IPv6 Addressing, on page 101.
If you want to use the address as link local only, select the Link - Local option. Link local addresses are
not accessible outside the local network. You cannot configure a link-local address on a bridge group
interface.
Note A link-local address should start with FE8, FE9, FEA, or FEB, for example
fe80::20d:88ff:feee:6a82. Note that we recommend automatically assigning the link-local
address based on the Modified EUI-64 format. For example, if other devices enforce the use
of the Modified EUI-64 format, then a manually-assigned link-local address may cause packets
to be dropped.
• Suppress RA—Whether to suppress router advertisements. The FTD can participate in router
advertisements so that neighboring devices can dynamically learn a default router address. By default,
router advertisement messages (ICMPv6 Type 134) are periodically sent out each IPv6 configured
interface.
Router advertisements are also sent in response to router solicitation messages (ICMPv6 Type 133).
Router solicitation messages are sent by hosts at system startup so that the host can immediately
autoconfigure without needing to wait for the next scheduled router advertisement message.
You might want to suppress these messages on any interface for which you do not want the FTD device
to supply the IPv6 prefix (for example, the outside interface).
Step 6 (Optional.) Configure Advanced Options, on page 114.

The advanced settings have defaults that are appropriate for most networks. Edit them only if you are resolving
network issues.
Step 7 Click OK.
What to do next
• Add the interfaces to the appropriate security zones. See Configuring Security Zones, on page 89.
106
The Basics
Configure Bridge Groups

A bridge group is a virtual interface that groups one or more interfaces. The main reason to group interfaces
is to create a group of switched interfaces. Thus, you can attach workstations or other endpoint devices directly
to the interfaces included in the bridge group. You do not need to connect them through a separate physical
switch, although you can also attach a switch to a bridge group member.
The group members do not have IP addresses. Instead, all member interfaces share the IP address of the Bridge
Virtual Interface (BVI). If you enable IPv6 on the BVI, member interfaces are automatically assigned unique
link-local addresses.
You enable and disable the member interfaces individually. Thus, you can disable any unused interfaces
without needing to remove them from the bridge group. The bridge group itself is always enabled.
You typically configure a DHCP server on the bridge group interface (BVI), which provides IP addresses for
any endpoints connected through member interfaces. However, you can configure static addresses on the
endpoints connected to the member interfaces if you prefer. All endpoints within the bridge group must have
IP addresses on the same subnet as the bridge group IP address.
Guidelines and Limitations
• You can add one bridge group.
• For all ASA 5506-X models, on a new version 6.2+ system, or a reimaged 6.2+ system, the device comes
pre-configured with bridge group BVI1, named inside, which includes all data interfaces except for the
outside interface. Thus, the device is pre-configured with one port used for linking to the Internet or
other upstream network, and all other ports enabled and available for direct connections to endpoints. If
you want to use an inside interface for a new subnet, you must first remove the needed interfaces from
BVI1.
Before you begin

Configure the interfaces that will be members of the bridge group. Specifically, each member interface must
meet the following requirements:
• The interface must have a name.
• The interface cannot have any IPv4 or IPv6 addresses defined for it, either static or served through DHCP.
If you need to remove the address from an interface that you are currently using, you might also need to
remove other configurations for the interface, such as static routes, DHCP server, or NAT rules, that
depend on the interface having an address.
• You must remove the interface from its security zone (if it is in a zone), and delete any NAT rules for
the interface, before you can add it to a bridge group.
Procedure
The interface list shows the available interfaces, their names, addresses, and states. If there is already a bridge
group, it is a folder. Click the open/close arrow to view the member interfaces. Member interfaces also appear
separately in the list.
107
The Basics
• Click the edit icon ( ) for the BVI1 bridge group.

• Select Add Bridge Group Interface from the gear drop-down list to create a new group.
Note You can have a single bridge group. If you already have a bridge group defined, you should
edit that group instead of trying to create a new one. If you need to create a new bridge group,
you must first delete the existing bridge group.
• Click the delete icon ( ) for the bridge group if you no longer need it. When you delete a bridge group,
its members become standard routed interfaces, and any NAT rules or security zone membership are
retained. You can edit the interfaces to give them IP addresses. If you want to add them to a new bridge
group, first you need to remove the NAT rules and remove the interface from its security zone.
Step 3 Configure the following:
a) (Optional) Set the Interface Name.

Set the name for the bridge group, up to 48 characters. Alphabetic characters must be lower case. For
example, inside or outside. Set the name if you want this BVI to participate in routing between it and
other named interfaces.
b) (Optional) Set the Description.
108
The Basics
c) Edit the Bridge Group Members list.
You can add up to 64 interfaces or subinterfaces to a single bridge group.
• Add an interface—Click the plus icon ( ) , click one or more interfaces, and then click OK.
• Remove an interface—Mouse over an interface and click the x on the right side.
• Static—Choose this option if you want to assign an address that should not change. Type in the bridge
group's IP address and the subnet mask. All attached endpoints will be on this network. For models with
a pre-configured bridge group, the default for the BVI1 “inside” network is 192.168.1.1/24 (i.e.
255.255.255.0). Ensure that the address is not already used on the network.
Note For an existing bridge group, your ability to change the address is constrained if you have a
DHCP server configured for the group. The new IP address must be on the same subnet as the
• Dynamic (DHCP)—Choose this option if the address should be obtained from the DHCP server on the
network. This is not the typical option for bridge groups, but you can configure it if needed. Change the
following options if necessary:
interface.
109
The Basics
Configure VLAN Subinterfaces and 802.1Q Trunking
to be dropped.
• Suppress RA—Whether to suppress router advertisements. The FTD device can participate in router
interface.

You configure most advanced options on bridge group member interfaces, but some are available for the
bridge group interface.
network issues.
Step 7 Click OK.
What to do next
• Ensure that all member interfaces that you intend to use are enabled.
• Configure a DHCP server for the bridge group. See Configuring the DHCP Server, on page 284.
• Add the member interfaces to the appropriate security zones. See Configuring Security Zones, on page
89.
• Ensure that policies, such as identity, NAT, and access, supply the required services for the bridge group
and member interfaces.

VLAN subinterfaces let you divide a physical interface into multiple logical interfaces that are tagged with
different VLAN IDs. An interface with one or more VLAN subinterfaces is automatically configured as an
802.1Q trunk. Because VLANs allow you to keep traffic separate on a given physical interface, you can
increase the number of interfaces available to your network without adding additional physical interfaces or
devices.
Create subinterfaces if you attach the physical interface to a trunk port on a switch. Create a subinterface for
each VLAN that can appear on the switch trunk port. If you attach the physical interface to an access port on
the switch, there is no point in creating a subinterface.
110
The Basics
Guidelines and Limitations

• Preventing untagged packets on the physical interface—If you use subinterfaces, you typically do not
also want the physical interface to pass traffic, because the physical interface passes untagged packets.
Because the physical interface must be enabled for the subinterface to pass traffic, ensure that the physical
interface does not pass traffic by not naming the interface. If you want to let the physical interface pass
untagged packets, you can name the interface as usual.
• You cannot configure IP addresses on bridge group member interfaces, although you can modify advanced
settings as needed.
• All subinterfaces on the same parent interface must be either bridge group members or routed interfaces;
you cannot mix and match.
• FTD does not support the Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP), so you must configure the connected
switch port to trunk unconditionally.
• You might want to assign unique MAC addresses to subinterfaces defined on the FTD device, because
they use the same burned-in MAC address of the parent interface. For example, your service provider
might perform access control based on the MAC address. Also, because IPv6 link-local addresses are
generated based on the MAC address, assigning unique MAC addresses to subinterfaces allows for unique
IPv6 link-local addresses, which can avoid traffic disruption in certain instances on the FTD device.
Procedure

• Select Add Subinterface from the gear drop-down list to create a new subinterface.
• Click the edit icon ( ) for the subinterface you want to edit.
If you no longer need a subinterface, click the delete icon ( ) for the subinterface to delete it.
Step 3 Set the Status slider to the enabled setting ( ).

Step 4 Configure the parent interface, name, and description:
a) Choose the Parent Interface.
The parent interface is the physical interface to which you want to add the subinterface. You cannot change
the parent interface after you create the subinterface.
b) Set the Subinterface Name, up to 48 characters.
Alphabetic characters must be lower case. For example, inside or outside. Without a name, the rest of
the interface configuration is ignored.
c) (Optional) Set a Description.
111
The Basics
d) Set the VLAN ID.
Enter the VLAN ID between 1 and 4094 that will be used to tag the packets on this subinterface.
e) Set the Subinterface ID.
Enter the subinterface ID as an integer between 1 and 4294967295. This ID is appended to the interface
ID; for example Ethernet1/1.100. You can match the VLAN ID for convenience, but it is not required.
You cannot change the ID after you create the subinterface.
• DHCP—Choose this option if the address should be obtained from the DHCP server on the network.
Change the following options if necessary:
• Static—Choose this option if you want to assign an address that should not change. Type in the interface's
IP address and the subnet mask for the network attached to the interface. For example, if you attach the
10.100.10.0/24 network, you could enter 10.100.10.1/24. Ensure that the address is not already used on
the network.
Note For an existing interface, your ability to change the address is constrained if you have a DHCP
server configured for the interface. The new IP address must be on the same subnet as the
• Address Auto Configuration—Select this option to have the address automatically configured. IPv6
stateless autoconfiguration will generate a global IPv6 address only if the link on which the device resides
has a router configured to provide IPv6 services, including the advertisement of an IPv6 global prefix
for use on the link. If IPv6 routing services are not available on the link, you will get a link-local IPv6
address only, which you cannot access outside of the device's immediate network link. The link local
address is based on the Modified EUI-64 interface ID.
Although RFC 4862 specifies that hosts configured for stateless autoconfiguration do not send Router
Advertisement messages, the FTD device does send Router Advertisement messages in this case. Select
Suppress RA to suppress messages and conform to the RFC.
112
The Basics
Configure Advanced Interface Options
interface.
to be dropped.
• Suppress RA—Whether to suppress router advertisements. The FTD can participate in router
interface.

network issues.
Step 8 Click OK.
What to do next
• Add the subinterfaces to the appropriate security zones. See Configuring Security Zones, on page 89.
Configure Advanced Interface Options

Advanced options include setting the MTU, hardware settings, management only, MAC address, and other
settings.
About the MTU

The MTU specifies the maximum frame payload size that the FTD device can transmit on a given Ethernet
interface. The MTU value is the frame size without Ethernet headers, VLAN tagging, or other overhead. For
example, when you set the MTU to 1500, the expected frame size is 1518 bytes including the headers, or 1522
when using VLAN. Do not set the MTU value higher to accommodate these headers.
113
The Basics
Path MTU Discovery
Path MTU Discovery

The FTD device supports Path MTU Discovery (as defined in RFC 1191), which lets all devices in a network
path between two hosts coordinate the MTU so they can standardize on the lowest MTU in the path.
MTU and Fragmentation

For IPv4, if an outgoing IP packet is larger than the specified MTU, it is fragmented into 2 or more frames.
Fragments are reassembled at the destination (and sometimes at intermediate hops), and fragmentation can
cause performance degradation. For IPv6, packets are typically not allowed to be fragmented at all. Therefore,
your IP packets should fit within the MTU size to avoid fragmentation.
For UDP or ICMP, the application should take the MTU into account to avoid fragmentation.
Note The FTD device can receive frames larger than the configured MTU as long as there is room in memory.
MTU and Jumbo Frames

A larger MTU lets you send larger packets. Larger packets might be more efficient for your network. See the
following guidelines:
• Matching MTUs on the traffic path—We recommend that you set the MTU on all FTD interfaces and
other device interfaces along the traffic path to be the same. Matching MTUs prevents intermediate
devices from fragmenting the packets.
• Accommodating jumbo frames—A jumbo frame is an Ethernet packet larger than the standard maximum
of 1522 bytes (including Layer 2 header and VLAN header), up to 9216 bytes. You can set the MTU to
9000 bytes or higher to accommodate jumbo frames. The maximum depends on the model.
Note Increasing the MTU assigns more memory for jumbo frames, which might
limit the maximum usage of other features, such as access rules. If you
increase the MTU above the default 1500 on ASA 5500-X series devices ,
you must reboot the system.
Configure Advanced Options

Advanced interface options have default settings that are appropriate for most networks. Configure them only
if you are resolving networking problems.
The following procedure assumes the interface is already defined. You can also edit these settings while
initially editing or creating the interface.
Limitations
• For bridge groups, you configure most of these options on the member interfaces. Except for DAD
attempts, these options are not available for the Bridge Virtual Interface (BVI).
114
The Basics
Configure Advanced Options
Procedure
Step 2 Click the edit icon ( ) for the interface you want to edit.
Step 3 Click Advanced Options.
Step 4 To make a data interface management only, select Management Only.
A management only interface does not allow through traffic, so there is very little value in setting a data
interface as management only. You cannot change this setting for the Management/Diagnostic interface, which
is always management only.
Step 5 Change the MTU (maximum transmission unit) to the desired value.
The default MTU is 1500 bytes. The minimum and maximum depend on your platform. Set a high value if
you typically see jumbo frames on your network.
Note If you increase MTU above 1500 on ASA 5500-X series devices, , you must reboot the device.
Step 6 (Physical interface only.) Modify the speed and duplex settings.
The default is that the interface negotiates the best duplex and speed with the interface at the other end of the
wire, but you can force a specific duplex or speed if necessary. Before setting these options for interfaces on
a network module, please read Limitations for Interface Configuration, on page 102.
• Duplex—Choose Auto, Half or Full. SFP interfaces only support Full duplex.
• Speed—Choose a speed (varies depending on the model), or Auto.
Step 7 Modify the IPv6 Configuration settings.

• Enable DHCP for IPv6 address configuration—Whether to set the Managed Address Configuration
flag in the IPv6 router advertisement packet. This flag informs IPv6 autoconfiguration clients that they
should use DHCPv6 to obtain addresses, in addition to the derived stateless autoconfiguration address.
• Enable DHCP for IPv6 non-address configuration—Whether to set the Other Address Configuration
flag in the IPv6 router advertisement packet. This flag informs IPv6 autoconfiguration clients that they
should use DHCPv6 to obtain additional information from DHCPv6, such as the DNS server address.
• DAD Attempts—How often the interface performs Duplicate Address Detection (DAD), from 0 - 600.
The default is 1. During the stateless autoconfiguration process, DAD verifies the uniqueness of new
unicast IPv6 addresses before the addresses are assigned to interfaces. If the duplicate address is the
link-local address of the interface, the processing of IPv6 packets is disabled on the interface. If the
duplicate address is a global address, the address is not used. The interface uses neighbor solicitation
messages to perform Duplicate Address Detection. Set the value to 0 to disable duplicate address detection
(DAD) processing.
Step 8 Click OK.
115
The Basics
Monitoring Interfaces
Monitoring Interfaces
You can view some basic information about interfaces in the following areas:
• Device. Use the port graphic to monitor the current state of the interfaces. Mouse over a port to see its
IP addresses and enabled and link statuses. The IP addresses can be statically assigned or obtained using
DHCP.
Interface ports use the following color coding:
• Green—The interface is configured, enabled, and the link is up.
• Gray—The interface is not enabled.
• Orange/Red—The interface is configured and enabled, but the link is down. If the interface is wired,
this is an error condition that needs correction. If the interface is not wired, this is the expected
status.
• Monitoring > System. The Throughput dashboard shows information on traffic flowing through the
system. You can view information on all interfaces, or you can select a specific interface to examine.
• Monitoring > Ingress Zones and Egress Zones. These dashboards show statistics based on zones, which
are composed of interfaces. You can drill into this information for more detail.
Monitoring Interfaces in the CLI

You can also log into the device CLI and use the following commands to get more detailed information about
interface-related behavior and statistics.
• show interface displays interface statistics and configuration information. This command has many
keywords you can use to get to the information you need. Use ? as a keyword to see the available options.
• show ipv6 interface displays IPv6 configuration information about the interfaces.
• show bridge-group displays information about Bridge Virtual Interfaces (BVI), including member
information and IP addresses.
• show conn displays information about the connections currently established through the interfaces.
• show traffic displays statistics about traffic flowing through each interface.
• show ipv6 traffic displays statistics about IPv6 traffic flowing through the device.
• show dhcpd displays statistics and other information about DHCP usage on the interfaces, particularly
about the DHCP servers configured on interfaces.
Examples for Interfaces

The use case chapter includes the following interface-related examples:
• How to Configure the Device in FDM, on page 31
• How to Add a Subnet, on page 57
116
CHAPTER 7
Routing
The system uses a routing table to determine the egress interface for packets entering the system. The following
topics explain routing basics and how to configure routing on the device.
• Routing Overview, on page 117
• Static Routes, on page 119
• Monitoring Routing, on page 121
Routing Overview
The following topics describe how routing behaves within the FTD device. Routing is the act of moving
information across a network from a source to a destination. Along the way, at least one intermediate node is
typically encountered. Routing involves two basic activities: determining optimal routing paths and transporting
packets through a network.
The Routing Table and Route Selection

When NAT translations (xlates) and rules do not determine the egress interface, the system uses the routing
table to determine the path for a packet.
Routes in the routing table include a metric called “administrative distance” that provides a relative priority
to a given route. If a packet matches more than one route entry, the one with the lowest distance is used.
Directly connected networks (those defined on an interface) have the distance 0, so they are always preferred.
Static routes have a default distance of 1, but you can create them with any distance between 1-254.
Routes that identify a specific destination take precedence over the default route (the route whose destination
is 0.0.0.0/0 or ::/0).
How Forwarding Decisions Are Made

Forwarding decisions are made as follows:
• If the destination does not match an entry in the routing table, the packet is forwarded through the interface
specified for the default route. If a default route has not been configured, the packet is discarded.
• If the destination matches a single entry in the routing table, the packet is forwarded through the interface
associated with that route.
117
The Basics
Routing Table for Management Traffic
• If the destination matches more than one entry in the routing table, then the packet is forwarded out of
the interface associated with the route that has the longer network prefix length.
For example, a packet destined for 192.168.32.1 arrives on an interface with the following routes in the routing
table:
• 192.168.32.0/24 gateway 10.1.1.2
• 192.168.32.0/19 gateway 10.1.1.3
In this case, a packet destined to 192.168.32.1 is directed toward 10.1.1.2, because 192.168.32.1 falls within
the 192.168.32.0/24 network. It also falls within the other route in the routing table, but 192.168.32.0/24 has
the longest prefix within the routing table (24 bits verses 19 bits). Longer prefixes are always preferred over
shorter ones when forwarding a packet.
Note Existing connections continue to use their established interfaces even if a new similar connection would
result in different behavior due to a change in routes.
Routing Table for Management Traffic

As a standard security practice, it is often necessary to segregate and isolate management (from-the-device)
traffic from data traffic. To achieve this isolation, the FTD device uses a separate routing table for
management-only traffic vs. data traffic. Separate routing tables means that you can create separate default
routes for data and management as well.
Types of Traffic for Each Routing Table
Through-the-device traffic always uses the data routing table.
From-the-device traffic, depending on the type, uses either the management-only routing table or the data
routing table by default. If a match is not found in the default routing table, it checks the other routing table.
• Management-only table from-the-device traffic includes AAA server communications.
• Data table from-the-device traffic includes DNS server lookups and DDNS. An exception is if you only
specify the Diagnostic interface for DNS, then the FTD device will only use the management-only table.
Interfaces Included in the Management-Only Routing Table

Management-only interfaces include any the Management x/x interfaces as well as any interfaces that you
have configured to be management-only.
Note The Management virtual interface uses its own Linux routing table that is not part of the FTD route
lookup. Traffic originating on the Management interface includes the FDM management sessions,
licensing communication, and database updates. The Diagnostic logical interface, on the other hand,
uses the management-only routing table described in this section.
Fallback to the Other Routing Table

If a match is not found in the default routing table, it checks the other routing table.
118
The Basics
Equal-Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) Routing
Using the Non-Default Routing Table

If you need from-the-box traffic to go out an interface that isn't in its default routing table, then you might
need to specify that interface when you configure it, rather than relying on the fall back to the other table. The
FTD will only check routes for the specified interface. For example, if you need to communicate with a
RADIUS server on a data interface, then specify that interface in the RADIUS configuration. Otherwise, if
there is a default route in the management-only routing table, then it will match the default route and never
fall back to the data routing table.
Equal-Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) Routing

The FTD device supports Equal-Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) routing.
You can have up to 8 equal cost static or dynamic routes per interface. For example, you can configure multiple
default routes on the outside interface that specify different gateways.
route for 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 through outside to 10.1.1.2

In this case, traffic is load-balanced on the outside interface between 10.1.1.2, 10.1.1.3, and 10.1.1.4. Traffic
is distributed among the specified gateways based on an algorithm that hashes the source and destination IP
addresses, incoming interface, protocol, source and destination ports.
Static Routes
You can create static routes to provide basic routing for your network.
About Static and Default Routes

To route traffic to a non-connected host or network, you must define a route to the host or network, either
using static or dynamic routing. Generally, you must configure at least one static route: a default route for all
traffic that is not routed by other means to a default network gateway, typically the next hop router.
Default Route
The simplest option is to configure a default static route to send all traffic to an upstream router, relying on
the router to route the traffic for you. A default route identifies the gateway IP address to which the FTD
device sends all IP packets for which it does not have a learned or static route. A default static route is simply
a static route with 0.0.0.0/0 (IPv4) or ::/0 (IPv6) as the destination IP address.
You should always define a default route.
Because the FTD device uses separate routing tables for data traffic and for management traffic, you can
optionally configure a default route for data traffic and another default route for management traffic. Note
that from-the-device traffic uses either the management-only or data routing table by default depending on
the type, but will fall back to the other routing table if a route is not found. Default routes will always match
traffic, and will prevent a fall back to the other routing table. In this case, you must specify the interface you
want to use for egress traffic if that interface is not in the default routing table. The Diagnostic interface is
included in the management-only table. The special Management interface uses a separate Linux routing table,
and has its own default route.
119
The Basics
Static Routes
Static Routes
You might want to use static routes in the following cases:
• Your networks use an unsupported router discovery protocol.
• Your network is small and you can easily manage static routes.
• You do not want the traffic or CPU overhead associated with routing protocols.
• In some cases, a default route is not enough. The default gateway might not be able to reach the destination
network, so you must also configure more specific static routes. For example, if the default gateway is
outside, then the default route cannot direct traffic to any inside networks that are not directly connected
to the FTD device.
• You are using a feature that does not support dynamic routing protocols.
Guidelines for Static Routing

Bridge Groups
• In routed mode, you must specify the BVI as the gateway; you cannot specify the member interface.
• For traffic that originates on the FTD device (such as syslog or SNMP) that is destined through a bridge
group member interface for a non-directly connected network, you need to configure either a default
route or static routes so the FTD device knows out of which bridge group member interface to send
traffic. If you have servers that cannot all be reached through a single default route, then you must
configure static routes.
Configuring Static Routes

Define static routes to tell the system where to send packets that are not bound for networks that are directly
connected to the interfaces on the system.
You need at least one static route, the default route, for network 0.0.0.0/0. This route defines where to send
packets whose egress interface cannot be determined by existing NAT xlates (translations) or static NAT
rules, or other static routes.
You might need other static routes if the default gateway cannot be used to get to all networks. For example,
the default route is usually an upstream router on the outside interface. If there are additional inside networks
that are not directly connected to the device, and they cannot be accessed through the default gateway, you
need static routes for each of those inside networks.
You cannot define static routes for the networks that are directly connected to system interfaces. The system
automatically creates these routes.
Procedure
Step 1 Click Device, then click the link in the Routing summary.
Step 2 On the Static Routing page, do one of the following:
• To add a new route, click +.
120
The Basics
Monitoring Routing
• Click the edit icon ( ) for the route you want to edit.
If you no longer need a route, click the trash can icon for the route to delete it.
Step 3 Configure the route properties

• Name—A display name for the route.
• Description—An optional description of the purpose for the route.
• Interface—Select the interface through which you want to send traffic. The gateway address needs to
be accessible through this interface.
For bridge groups, you configure the route for the bridge group interface (BVI), not for the member
interfaces.
• Protocol—Select whether the route is for an IPv4 or IPv6 address.
• Networks—Select the network objects that identify the destination networks or hosts that should use
the gateway in this route.
To define a default route, use the pre-defined any-ipv4 or any-ipv6 network objects, or create an object
for the 0.0.0.0/0 (IPv4) or ::/0 (IPv6) network.
• Gateway—Select the host network object that identifies the IP address for the gateway. Traffic is sent
to this address. You cannot use the same gateway for routes on more than one interface.
• Metric—The administrative distance for the route, between 1 and 254. The default for static routes is
1. If there are additional routers between the interface and the gateway, enter the number of hops as the
administrative distance.
Administrative distance is a parameter used to compare routes. The lower the number, the higher
precedence the route is given. Connected routes (networks directly connected to an interface on the
device) always take precedence over static routes.
Step 4 Click OK.
Monitoring Routing
To monitor and troubleshoot routing, log into the device CLI and use the following commands.
• show route displays the routing table for the data interfaces, including routes for directly-connected
networks.
• show ipv6 route displays the IPv6 routing table for the data interfaces, including routes for
directly-connected networks.
• show network displays the configuration for the virtual Management interface, including the management
gateway. Routing through the virtual Management interface is not handled by the data interface routing
table, unless you specify data-interfaces as the management gateway.
• show network-static-routes displays static routes configured for the virtual Management interface using
the configure network static-routes command. Normally, there will not be any static routes, as the
121
The Basics
Monitoring Routing
management gateway suffices for management routing in most cases. These routes are not available to
traffic on the data interfaces. This command is not available in the CLI console.
122
PA R T II
Security Policies
• Identity Policies, on page 125
• Access Control, on page 139
• Network Address Translation (NAT), on page 161
CHAPTER 8
Identity Policies
You can use identity policies to collect user identity information from connections. You can then view usage
based on user identity in the dashboards, and configure access control based on user or user group.
• Identity Policy Overview, on page 125
• Configuring Identity Policies, on page 128
• Enabling Transparent User Authentication, on page 134
• Monitoring Identity Policies, on page 137
• Examples for Identity Policies, on page 137
Identity Policy Overview

You can use identity policies to detect the user who is associated with a connection. By identifying the user,
you can correlate threat, endpoint, and network intelligence with user identity information. By linking network
behavior, traffic, and events directly to individual users, the system can help you identify the source of policy
breaches, attacks, or network vulnerabilities.
For example, you can identify who owns the host targeted by an intrusion event, and who initiated an internal
attack or port scan. You can also identify high bandwidth users and users who are accessing undesirable web
sites or applications.
User detection goes beyond collecting data for analysis. You can also write access rules based on user name
or user group name, selectively allowing or blocking access to resources based on user identity.
Establishing User Identity through Active Authentication

Authentication is the act of confirming the identity of a user.
With active authentication, when an HTTP traffic flow comes from an IP address for which the system has
no user-identity mapping, you can decide whether to authenticate the user who initiated the traffic flow against
the directory configured for the system. If the user successfully authenticates, the IP address is considered to
have the identity of the authenticated user.
Failure to authenticate does not prevent network access for the user. Your access rules ultimately decide what
access to provide these users.
125
Security Policies
Limitations on Number of Users
Limitations on Number of Users

FDM can download information on up to 2000 users from the directory server.
If your directory server includes more than 2000 user accounts, you will not see all possible names when
selecting users in an access rule or when viewing user-based dashboard information. You can write rules on
only those names that were downloaded.
The limit also applies to the names associated with groups. If a group has more than 2000 members, only the
2000 names that were downloaded can be matched against the group membership.
If you have more than 2000 users, consider using the FMC (the remote manager) instead of FDM. FMC
supports significantly more users.
Supported Directory Servers

You can use Microsoft Active Directory (AD) on Windows Server 2008 and 2012.
Note the following about your server configuration:
• If you want to perform user control on user groups or on users within groups, you must configure user
groups on the directory server. The system cannot perform user group control if the server organizes the
users in basic object hierarchy.
• The directory server must use the field names listed in the following table in order for the system to
retrieve user metadata from the servers for that field.
Metadata Active Directory Field
LDAP user name samaccountname
first name givenname
last name sn
email address mail

userprincipalname (if mail has no value)
department department
distinguishedname (if department has no value)
telephone number telephonenumber
Determining the Directory Base DN

When you configure directory properties, you need to specify the common base distinguished name (DN) for
users and groups. The base is defined in your directory server, and differs from network to network. You must
enter the correct bases for identity policies to work. If the base is wrong, the system cannot determine user or
group names, and thus identity-based policies will be inoperable.
126
Security Policies
Dealing with Unknown Users
Tip To get the correct bases, consult the administrator who is responsible for the directory servers.
For active directory, you can determine the correct bases by logging into the Active Directory server as domain
administrator, and using the dsquery command at a command prompt as follows to determine the bases:
User search base
Enter the dsquery user command with a known username (partial or complete) to determine the base
distinguished name. For example, the following command uses the partial name “John*” to return
information for all users that start with “John.”
C:\Users\Administrator>dsquery user -name “John*”

“CN=John Doe,CN=Users,DC=csc-lab,DC=example,DC=com”
The base DN would be “DC=csc-lab,DC=example,DC=com.”

Group search base
Enter the dsquery group command with a known group name to determine the base distinguished name.
For example, the following command uses the group name Employees to return the distinguished name:
C:\>dsquery group -name “Employees”

“CN=Employees,CN=Users,DC=csc-lab,DC=example,DC=com”
The group base DN would be “DC=csc-lab,DC=example,DC=com.”

You can also use the ADSI Edit program to browse the Active Directory structure (Start > Run > adsiedit.msc).
In ADSI Edit, right click any object, such as an organizational unit (OU), group, or user, and choose Properties
to view the distinguished name. You can then copy the string of DC values as the base.
To verify that you have the correct base:
1. Click the Test Connection button in the directory properties to verify connectivity. Resolve any problems,
and save the directory properties.
2. Commit changes to the device.
3. Create an access rule, select the Users tab, and try to add known user and group names from the directory.
You should see auto-complete suggestions as you type for matching users and groups in the realm that
contains the directory. If these suggestions appear in a drop-down list, then the system was able to query
the directory successfully. If you see no suggestions, and you are certain the string you typed should
appear in a user or group name, you need to correct the corresponding search base.
Dealing with Unknown Users

When you configure the directory server for the identity policy, the system downloads user and group
membership information from the directory server. This information is refreshed every 24 hours at midnight,
or whenever you edit and save the directory configuration (even if you do not make any changes).
If a user succeeds in authenticating when prompted by an active authentication identity rule, but the user’s
name is not in the downloaded user identity information, the user is marked as Unknown. You will not see
the user’s ID in identity-related dashboards, nor will the user match group rules.
127
Security Policies
Configuring Identity Policies
However, any access control rules for the Unknown user will apply. For example, if you block connections
for Unknown users, these users are blocked even though they succeeded in authenticating (meaning that the
directory server recognizes the user and the password is valid).
Thus, when you make changes to the directory server, such as adding or deleting users, or changing group
membership, these changes are not reflected in policy enforcement until the system downloads the updates
from the directory.
If you do not want to wait until the daily midnight update, you can force an update by editing the directory
server information (from Policies > Identity, click the Directory Server button). Click Save, then deploy
changes. The system will immediately download the updates.
Note You can check whether new or deleted user information is on the system by going to Policies > Access
Control, clicking the Add Rule (+) button, and looking at the list of users on the Users tab. If you
cannot find a new user, or you can find a deleted user, then the system has old information.
Configuring Identity Policies

You can use identity policies to collect user identity information from connections. You can then view usage
based on user identity in the dashboards, and configure access control based on user or user group.
The following is an overview of how to configure the elements required to obtain user identity through identity
policies.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Policies > Identity.

If you have not yet defined an identity policy, you are prompted to start a wizard to configure it. Click Get
Started to start the wizard. The wizard walks you through the following steps:
a) Configure Directory Server, on page 129
b) Configure the Active Authentication Captive Portal, on page 130
Step 2 Manage the identity policy.
After you configure identity settings, this page lists all rules in order. Rules are matched against traffic from
top to bottom with the first match determining the action to apply. You can do the following from this page:
• To enable or disable the identity policy, click the Identity Policy toggle.
• To change the directory server configuration, click the Directory Server button ( ).
• To change the active authentication captive portal configuration, click the Active Authentication button
( ).
• To move a rule, edit it and select the new location from the Order drop-down list.
• To configure rules:
• To create a new rule, click the + button.
128
Security Policies
Configure Directory Server
• To edit an existing rule, click the edit icon ( ) for the rule (in the Actions column). You can also
selectively edit a rule property by clicking on the property in the table.
• To delete a rule you no longer need, click the delete icon ( ) for the rule (in the Actions column).
For more information on creating and editing identity rules, see Configure Identity Rules, on page 131.
Configure Directory Server

The directory server contains information about the users and user groups who are allowed access to your
network. The system downloads updated information about all users and groups every day in the last hour of
the day (UTC).
Work with your directory administrator to get the values required to configure the directory server properties.
Note After you add the realm, you can verify your settings and test the connection by clicking the Directory
Server button and then clicking the Test button in the Directory Server dialog box. If the test fails,
verify all fields and ensure there is a network path between the management IP address and the directory
server.
Procedure

• If you have not configured the directory or identity rules yet, click Get Started to start the Identity Policy
wizard. You are first prompted to configure the directory server.
• Click the Directory Server button ( ).
Step 3 Fill in the following information about your directory server:

• Name—A name for the directory realm.
• Type—The type of directory server. Active Directory is the only supported type, and you cannot change
this field.
• Directory Username, Directory Password—The distinguished username and password for a user with
appropriate rights to the user information you want to retrieve. For Active Directory, the user does not
need elevated privileges. You can specify any user in the domain. The username must be fully qualified;
for example, [email protected] (not simply Administrator).
• Base DN—The directory tree for searching or querying user and group information, that is, the common
parent for users and groups. For example, dc=example,dc=com. For information on finding the base DN,
see Determining the Directory Base DN, on page 126.
• AD Primary Domain— The fully qualified Active Directory domain name that the device should join.
For example, example.com.
129
Security Policies
Configure the Active Authentication Captive Portal
• Hostname/IP Address—The hostname or IP address of the directory server. If you use an encrypted
connection to the server, you must enter the fully-qualified domain name, not the IP address.
• Port—The port number used for communications with the server. The default is 389. Use port 636 if
you select LDAPS as the encryption method.
• Encryption—To use an encrypted connection for downloading user and group information, select the
desired method, STARTTLS or LDAPS. The default is None, which means that user and group
information is downloaded in clear text.
• STARTTLS negotiates the encryption method, and uses the strongest method supported by the
directory server. Use port 389.
• LDAPS requires LDAP over SSL. Use port 636.
• SSL Certificate—If you select an encryption method, upload a CA certificate to enable a trusted
connection between the system and the directory server. If you are using a certificate to authenticate, the
name of the server in the certificate must match the server Hostname / IP Address. For example, if you
use 10.10.10.250 as the IP address but ad.example.com in the certificate, the connection fails.
Step 4 Click Next (in the wizard) or Save.
Configure the Active Authentication Captive Portal

When an identity rule requires active authentication for a user, the user is redirected to the captive portal port
on the interface through which they are connected and then they are prompted to authenticate. If you do not
upload a certificate, users are presented with a self-signed certificate. Users will have to accept the certificate
if you do not upload a certificate that their browsers already trust.
Note For the HTTP Basic, HTTP Response Page, and NTLM authentication methods, the user is redirected
to the captive portal using the IP address of the interface. However, for HTTP Negotiate, the user is
redirected using the fully-qualified DNS name firewall-hostname.AD-domain-name. If you want to use
HTTP Negotiate, you must also update your DNS server to map this name to the IP addresses of all
inside interfaces where you are requiring active authentication. Otherwise, the redirection cannot complete,
and users cannot authenticate.
Before you begin

Ensure that time settings are consistent among the directory servers, FTD device, and clients. A time shift
among these devices can prevent successful user authentication. "Consistent" means that you can use different
time zones, but the time should be the same relative to those zones; for example, 10 AM PST = 1 PM EST.
Procedure

130
Security Policies
Configure Identity Rules
• If you are using the Get Started wizard, click Next after configuring the directory server.
• Click the Active Authentication button ( ).
Step 3 Configure the following options:

• Server Certificate—The CA certificate to present to users during active authentication. The certificate
must be an X509 certificate in PEM or DER format. Paste in the certificate, or click Upload Certificate
and select the certificate file. The default is to present a self-signed certificate during user authentication.
• Certificate Key—The key for the server certificate. Paste in the key, or click Upload Key and select
the key file.
• Port—The captive portal port. The default is 885 (TCP). If you configure a different port, it must be in
the range 1025-65535.
Step 4 Click Save.

Identity rules determine whether user identity information should be collected for matching traffic. You can
configure No Authentication if you do not want to get user identity information for matching traffic.
Keep in mind that regardless of your rule configuration, active authentication is performed on HTTP traffic
only. Thus, you do not need to create rules to exclude non-HTTP traffic from active authentication. You can
simply apply an active authentication rule to all sources and destinations if you want to get user identity
information for all HTTP traffic.
Note Also keep in mind that a failure to authentication has no impact on network access. Identity policies
collect user identity information only. You must use access rules if you want to prevent users who failed
to authenticate from accessing the network.
Procedure

Step 2 Do any of the following:
• To edit an existing rule, click the edit icon ( ) for the rule.
To delete a rule you no longer need, click the delete icon ( ) for the rule.
Step 3 In Order, select where you want to insert the rule in the ordered list of rules.
Rules are applied on a first-match basis, so you must ensure that rules with highly specific traffic matching
criteria appear above policies that have more general criteria that would otherwise apply to the matching
traffic.
The default is to add the rule to the end of the list. If you want to change a rule's location later, edit this option.
131
Security Policies
Step 4 Select the type of User Authentication.

You must select the AD identity realm that includes the user accounts for passive and active authentication
rules.
• Active—Use active authentication to determine user identity. Active authentication is applied to HTTP
traffic only. If any other type of traffic matches an identity policy that requires or allows active
authentication, then active authentication will not be attempted.
• No Auth—Do not obtain user identity. Identity-based access rules will not be applied to this traffic.
These users are marked as No Authentication Required.
Step 5 (Active Authentication only.) Select the authentication method (Type) supported by your directory server.
• HTTP Basic—Authenticate users using an unencrypted HTTP Basic Authentication (BA) connection.
Users log in to the network using their browser's default authentication popup window. This is the default.
• NTLM—Authenticate users using an NT LAN Manager (NTLM) connection. This selection is only
available when you select an AD realm. Users log in to the network using their browser's default
authentication popup window, although you can configure IE and Firefox browsers to transparently
authenticate using their Windows domain login (see Enabling Transparent User Authentication, on page
134).
• HTTP Negotiate—Allow the device to negotiate the method between the user agent (the application
the user is using to initiate the traffic flow) and the Active Directory server. Negotiation results in the
strongest commonly supported method being used, in order, NTLM, then basic. Users log in to the
network using their browser's default authentication popup window.
• HTTP Response Page—Prompt users to authenticate using a system-provided web page. This is a form
of HTTP Basic authentication.
Note For the HTTP Basic, HTTP Response Page, and NTLM authentication methods, the user is redirected
to the captive portal using the IP address of the interface. However, for HTTP Negotiate, the user
is redirected using the fully-qualified DNS name firewall-hostname.AD-domain-name. If you want
to use HTTP Negotiate, you must also update your DNS server to map this name to the IP addresses
of all inside interfaces where you are requiring active authentication. Otherwise, the redirection
cannot complete, and users cannot authenticate.
Step 6 (Active authentication only.) Select Fall Back as Guest > On/Off to determine whether users who fail active
authentication are labeled as Guest users.
Users get 3 chances to successfully authenticate. If they fail, your selection for this option determines how
the user is marked. You can write access rules based on these values.
• Fall Back as Guest > On—Users are marked as Guest.
• Fall Back as Guest > Off—Users are marked as Failed Authentication.
Step 7 Define the traffic matching criteria on the Source/Destination tab.

Keep in mind that active authentication will be attempted with HTTP traffic only. Therefore, there is no need
to configure No Auth rules for non-HTTP traffic, and there is no point in creating Active Authentication rules
for any non-HTTP traffic.
The Source/Destination criteria of an identity rule define the security zones (interfaces) through which the
traffic passes, the IP addresses or the country or continent (geographical location) for the IP address, or the
protocols and ports used in the traffic. The default is any zone, address, geographical location, protocol, and
port.
132
Security Policies
To modify a condition, you click the + button within that condition, select the desired object or element, and
click OK in the popup dialog box. If the criterion requires an object, you can click Create New Object if the
object you require does not exist. Click the x for an object or element to remove it from the policy.
You can configure the following traffic matching criteria.
Source Zones, Destination Zones
The security zone objects that define the interfaces through which the traffic passes. You can define one, both,
or neither criteria: any criteria not specified applies to traffic on any interface.
• To match traffic leaving the device from an interface in the zone, add that zone to the Destination Zones.
• To match traffic entering the device from an interface in the zone, add that zone to the Source Zones.
• If you add both source and destination zone conditions to a rule, matching traffic must originate from
one of the specified source zones and egress through one of the destination zones.
Use this criteria when the rule should apply based on where the traffic enters or exits the device. For example,
if you want to ensure that user identity is collected from all traffic originating from inside networks, select an
inside zone as the Source Zones while leaving the destination zone empty.
Source Networks, Destination Networks
The network objects or geographical locations that define the network addresses or locations of the traffic.
• To match traffic from an IP address or geographical location, configure the Source Networks.
• To match traffic to an IP address or geographical location, configure the Destination Networks.
• If you add both source and destination network conditions to a rule, matching traffic must originate from
one of the specified IP addresses and be destined for one of the destination IP addresses.
When you add this criteria, you select from the following tabs:
• Network—Select the network objects or groups that define the source or destination IP addresses for
the traffic you want to control.
• Geolocation—Select the geographical location to control traffic based on its source or destination country
or continent. Selecting a continent selects all countries within the continent. Besides selecting geographical
location directly in the rule, you can also select a geolocation object that you created to define the location.
Using geographical location, you could easily restrict access to a particular country without needing to
know all of the potential IP addresses used there.
Note To ensure you are using up-to-date geographical location data to filter your traffic, Cisco
strongly recommends that you regularly update the geolocation database (GeoDB).
Source Ports, Destination Ports/Protocols

The port objects that define the protocols used in the traffic. For TCP/UDP, this can include ports.
• To match traffic from a protocol or port, configure the Source Ports. Source ports can be TCP/UDP
only.
• To match traffic to a protocol or port, configure the Destination Ports/Protocols.
• To match traffic both originating from specific TCP/UDP ports and destined for specific TCP/UDP ports,
configure both. If you add both source and destination ports to a condition, you can only add ports that
133
Security Policies
Enabling Transparent User Authentication
share a single transport protocol, TCP or UDP. For example, you could target traffic from port TCP/80
to port TCP/8080.
Step 8 Click OK.
Enabling Transparent User Authentication

If you configure the identity policy to allow for active authentication, you can use the following authentication
methods to acquire user identity:
HTTP Basic
With HTTP basic authentication, users are always prompted to authenticate with their directory username
and password. The password is transmitted in clear text. For that reason, basic authentication is not
considered a secure form of authentication.
Basic is the default authentication mechanism.
HTTP Response Page
This is a type of HTTP basic authentication, where the user is presented with a login browser page.
NTLM, HTTP Negotiate (Integrated Windows Authentication for Active Directory)
With integrated Windows authentication, you take advantage of the fact that users log into a domain to
use their workstation. The browser tries to use this domain login when accessing a server, including the
FTD captive portal during active authentication. The password is not transmitted. If authentication is
successful, the user is transparently authenticated; the user is unaware that any authentication challenge
was made or satisfied.
If the browser cannot satisfy an authentication request using the domain login credentials, the user is
prompted for username and password, which is the same user experience as basic authentication. Thus,
if you configure integrated Windows authentication, it can reduce the need for users to supply credentials
when accessing the network or servers in the same domain.
Note that HTTP Negotiate picks the strongest method supported by both the Active directory server and
the user agent. If negotiation selects HTTP Basic as the authentication method, you will not get transparent
authentication. The order of strength is NTLM, then basic. Negotiation must select NTLM for transparent
authentication to be possible.
You must configure client browsers to support integrated Windows authentication to enable transparent
authentication. The following sections explain the general requirements and basic configuration of integrated
Windows authentication for some commonly used browsers that support it. Users should consult the help for
their browser (or other user agent) for more detailed information, because the techniques can change between
software releases.
Tip Not all browsers support integrated Windows authentication, such as Chrome and Safari (based on the
versions available when this was written). Users will be prompted for username and password. Consult
the browser’s documentation to determine if support is available in the version you use.
134
Security Policies
Requirements for Transparent Authentication
Requirements for Transparent Authentication

Users must configure their browser or user agent to implement transparent authentication. They can do this
individually, or you can configure it for them and push the configuration to client workstations using your
software distribution tools. If you decide to have users do it themselves, ensure that you provide the specific
configuration parameters that work for your network.
Regardless of browser or user agent, you must implement the following general configuration:
• Add the FTD interface through which users connect to the network to the Trusted Sites list. You can use
the IP address or if available, the fully-qualified domain name (for example, inside.example.com). You
can also use wildcards or partial addresses to create a generalized trusted site. For example, you can
typically cover all internal sites using *.example.com or simply example.com, trusting all servers in your
network (use your own domain name). If you add the specific address of the interface, you might need
to add several addresses to the trusted sites to account for all user access points to the network.
• Integrated Windows authentication does not work through a proxy server. Therefore, you must either
not use a proxy, or you must add the FTD interface to the addresses excluded from going through the
proxy. If you decide that you must use a proxy, users will be prompted for authentication even if you
use NTLM.
Tip Configuring transparent authentication is not a requirement, but a convenience to end users. If you do
not configure transparent authentication, users are presented with a login challenge for all authentication
methods.
Configuring Internet Explorer for Transparent Authentication

To configure Internet Explorer for NTLM transparent authentication:
Procedure
Step 1 Select Tools > Internet Options.

Step 2 Select the Security tab, select the Local Intranet zone, then do the following:
a) Click the Sites button to open the list of trusted sites.
b) Ensure that at least one of the following options is selected:
• Automatically detect intranet network. If you select this option, all other options are disabled.
• Include all sites that bypass the proxy.
c) Click Advanced to open the Local Intranet Sites dialog box, then paste the URL you want to trust into
the Add Site box and click Add.
Repeat the process if you have more than one URL. Use wildcards to specify a partial URL, such as
http://*.example.com or simply *.example.com.
Close the dialog boxes to return to the Internet Options dialog box.
d) With Local Intranet still selected, click Custom Level to open the Security Settings dialog box. Find
the User Authentication > Logon setting and select Automatic logon only in Intranet zone. Click OK.
135
Security Policies
Configuring Firefox for Transparent Authentication
Step 3 In the Internet Options dialog box, click the Connections tab, then click LAN Settings.
If Use a proxy server for your LAN is selected, you need to ensure that the FTD interface bypasses the
proxy. Do any of the following as appropriate:
• Select Bypass proxy server for local addresses.
• Click Advanced and enter the address into the Do not use proxy server for addresses beginning with
box. You can use wildcards, for example, *.example.com.
Configuring Firefox for Transparent Authentication

To configure Firefox for NTLM transparent authentication:
Procedure
Step 1 Open about:config. Use the filter bar to help you locate the preferences that you need to modify.
Step 2 To support NTLM, modify the following preferences (filter on network.automatic):
• network.automatic-ntlm-auth.trusted-uris—Double-click the preference, enter the URL, and click
OK. You can enter multiple URLs by separating them with commas; including the protocol is optional.
For example:
http://host.example.com, http://hostname, myhost.example.com
You can also use partial URLs. Firefox matches the end of the string, not a random substring. Thus, you
could include your entire internal network by specifying just your domain name. For example:
example.com
• network.automatic-ntlm-auth.allow-proxies—Ensure that the value is true, which is the default.

Double-click to change the value if it is currently false.
Step 3 Check the HTTP proxy settings. You can find these by selecting Tools > Options, then click the Network
tab in the Options dialog box. Click the Settings button in the Connection group.
• If No Proxy is selected, there is nothing to configure.
• If Use System Proxy Settings is selected, you need to modify the network.proxy.no_proxies_on
property in about:config to add the trusted URIs you included in
network.automatic-ntlm-auth.trusted-uris.
• If Manual Proxy Configuration is selected, update the No Proxy For list to include these trusted URIs.
• If one of the other options is selected, ensure that the properties used for those configurations exclude
the same trusted URIs.
136
Security Policies
Monitoring Identity Policies
Monitoring Identity Policies

If identity policies that require authentication are working correctly, you should see user information on the
Monitoring > Users dashboard and other dashboards that include user information.
In addition, events shown in Monitoring > Events should include user information.
If you do not see any user information, verify that the directory server is functioning correctly. Use the Test
button in the directory server configuration dialog box to verify connectivity.
If the directory server is functioning and usable, verify that the traffic matching criteria on the identity rules
that require active authentication are written in a way that will match your users. For example, ensure that the
source zone contains the interfaces through which your user traffic will enter the device. The active
authentication identity rules match HTTP traffic only, so users must be sending that type of traffic through
the device.
Examples for Identity Policies

The use case chapter includes an example of implementing identity policies. Please see How to Gain Insight
Into Your Network Traffic, on page 36.
137
Security Policies
Examples for Identity Policies
138
CHAPTER 9
Access Control
The following topics explain access control rules. These rules control which traffic is allowed to pass through
the device, and apply advanced services to the traffic, such as intrusion inspection.
• Access Control Overview, on page 139
• License Requirements for Access Control, on page 146
• Guidelines and Limitations for Access Control Policies, on page 147
• Configuring the Access Control Policy, on page 148
• Monitoring Access Control Policies, on page 158
• Examples for Access Control, on page 159
Access Control Overview

The following topics explain access control policies.
Access Control Rules and the Default Action

Use the access control policy to allow or block access to network resources. The policy consists of a set of
ordered rules, which are evaluated from top to bottom. The rule applied to traffic is the first one where all the
traffic criteria are matched.
You can control access based on:
• Traditional network characteristics such as source and destination IP addresses, protocol, ports, and
interfaces (in the form of security zones).
• The application that is being used. You can control access based on the specific application, or you can
create rules that cover categories of applications, applications tagged with a particular characteristic, the
type of application (client, server, web), or the application's risk or business relevance rating.
• The destination URL of a web request, including the generalized category of the URL. You can refine
category matches based on the public reputation of the target site.
• The user who is making the request, or the user groups to which the user belongs.
For unencrypted traffic that you allow, you can apply IPS inspection to check for threats and block traffic that
appears to be an attack. You can also use file policies to check for prohibited files or malware.
139
Security Policies
Application Filtering
Any traffic that does not match an access rule is handled by the access control Default Action. If you allow
traffic by default, you can apply intrusion inspection to the traffic. However, you cannot perform file or
malware inspection on traffic handled by the default action.
Application Filtering
You can use access control rules to filter traffic based on the application used in the connection. The system
can recognize a wide variety of applications, so that you do not need to figure out how to block one web
application without blocking all web applications.
For some popular applications, you can filter on different aspects of the application. For example, you could
create a rule that blocks Facebook Games without blocking all of Facebook.
You can also create rules based on general application characteristics, blocking or allowing entire groups of
applications by selecting risk or business relevance, type, category, or tag. However, as you select categories
in an application filter, look over the list of matching applications to ensure you are not including
unintended applications. For a detailed explanation of the possible groupings, see Application Criteria, on
page 152.
Application Control for Encrypted and Decrypted Traffic

If an application uses encryption, the system might not be able to identify the application.
The system can detect application traffic encrypted with StartTLS, including SMTPS, POPS, FTPS, TelnetS,
and IMAPS. In addition, it can identify certain encrypted applications based on the Server Name Indication
in the TLS ClientHello message, or the subject distinguished name value from the server certificate.
Use the application filters dialog box to determine if your application requires decryption by selecting the
following Tags, then examining the list of applications.
• SSL Protocol—You do not need to decrypt traffic tagged as SSL Protocol. The system can recognize
this traffic and apply your access control action. Access control rules for the listed applications should
match to expected connections.
• Decrypted Traffic—The system can recognize this traffic only if you first decrypt the traffic. Because
you cannot configure SSL decryption using FDM, access control rules for these applications do not work.
For example, at the time of this writing, Dropbox has this tag. Thus, access rules for the Dropbox
application will not match Dropbox connections.
Best Practices for Application Filtering

Please keep the following recommendations in mind when designing your application filtering access control
rules.
• To handle traffic referred by a web server, such as advertisement traffic, match the referred application
rather than the referring application.
• Avoid combining application and URL criteria in the same rule, especially for encrypted traffic.
• If you write a rule for traffic that is tagged Decrypted Traffic, ensure that you have an SSL Decryption
rule that will decrypt the matching traffic. These applications can be identified in decrypted connections
only.
140
Security Policies
URL Filtering
• The system can detect multiple types of Skype application traffic. To control Skype traffic, choose the
Skype tag from the Application Filters list rather than selecting individual applications. This ensures that
the system can detect and control all Skype traffic the same way.
• To control access to Zoho mail, select both the Zoho and Zoho Mail applications.
URL Filtering
You can use access control rules to filter traffic based on the URL used in an HTTP or HTTPS connection.
Note that URL filtering for HTTP is more straight-forward than it is for HTTPS, because HTTPS is encrypted.
You can use the following techniques to implement URL filtering.
• Category and reputation-based URL filtering—With a URL filtering license, you can control access to
web sites based on the URL’s general classification (category) and risk level (reputation). This is by far
the easiest and most effective way to block unwanted sites.
• Manual URL filtering—With any license, you can manually specify individual URLs, and groups of
URLs, to achieve granular, custom control over web traffic. The main purpose of manual filtering is to
create exceptions to category-based block rules, but you can use manual rules for other purposes.
The following topics provide more information on URL filtering.
Filtering URLs by Category and Reputation

With a URL filtering license, you can control access to web sites based on the category and reputation of the
requested URLs:
• Category—A general classification for the URL. For example, ebay.com belongs to the Auctions category,
and monster.com belongs to the Job Search category. A URL can belong to more than one category.
• Reputation—How likely the URL is to be used for purposes that might be against your organization’s
security policy. Reputations range from High Risk (level 1) to Well Known (level 5).
URL categories and reputations help you quickly configure URL filtering. For example, you can use access
control to block high risk URLs in the Abused Drugs category.
Using category and reputation data also simplifies policy creation and administration. Sites that represent
security threats, or that serve undesirable content, might appear and disappear faster than you can update and
deploy new policies. As Cisco updates the URL database with new sites, changed classifications, and changed
reputations, your rules automatically adjust to the new information. You do not need to edit your rules to
account for new sites.
If you enable regular URL database updates, you can ensure that the system uses up-to-date information for
URL filtering. You can also enable communications with Cisco Collective Security Intelligence (CSI) to
obtain the latest threat intelligence for URLs with unknown category and reputation. For more information,
see Configuring URL Filtering Preferences, on page 289.
Note To see URL category and reputation information in events and application details, you must create at
least one rule with a URL condition.
141
Security Policies
Looking Up the Category and Reputation for a URL
Looking Up the Category and Reputation for a URL

You can check on the category and reputation for a particular URL by using the following site. You can use
this information to help you check the behavior of your category and reputation based URL filtering rules.
https://www.brightcloud.com/tools/url-ip-lookup.php
Manual URL Filtering

You can supplement or selectively override category and reputation-based URL filtering by manually filtering
individual URLs or groups of URLs. You can perform this type of URL filtering without a special license.
For example, you might use access control to block a category of web sites that are not appropriate for your
organization. However, if the category contains a web site that is appropriate, and to which you want to provide
access, you can create a manual Allow rule for that site and place it before the Block rule for the category.
To configure manual URL filtering, you create a URL object with the destination URL. How this URL is
interpreted is based on the following rules:
• If you do not include a path (that is, there is no / character in the URL), the match is based on the server’s
hostname only. The hostname is considered a match if it comes after the :// separator, or after any dot in
the hostname. For example, ign.com matches ign.com and www.ign.com, but it does not match
verisign.com.
• If you include one or more / character, the entire URL string is used for a substring match, including the
server name, path, and any query parameters. However, we recommend that you do not use manual URL
filtering to block or allow individual web pages or parts of sites, as servers can be reorganized and pages
moved to new paths. Substring matching can also lead to unexpected matches, where the string you
include in the URL object also matches paths on unintended servers or strings within query parameters.
• The system disregards the encryption protocol (HTTP vs HTTPS). In other words, if you block a website,
both HTTP and HTTPS traffic to that website is blocked, unless you use an application condition to
target a specific protocol. When creating a URL object, you do not need to specify the protocol when
creating an object. For example, use example.com rather than http://example.com.
• If you plan to use a URL object to match HTTPS traffic in an access control rule, create the object using
the subject common name in the public key certificate used to encrypt the traffic. Also, the system
disregards subdomains within the subject common name, so do not include subdomain information. For
example, use example.com rather than www.example.com.
However, please understand that the subject common name in the certificate might be completely unrelated
to a web site’s domain name. For example, the subject common name in the certificate for youtube.com
is *.google.com (this of course might change at any time). You will get more consistent results if you
use the SSL Decryption policy to decrypt HTTPS traffic so that URL filtering rules work on decrypted
traffic.
Note URL objects will not match HTTPS traffic if the browser resumes a TLS
session because the certificate information is no longer available. Thus,
even if you carefully configure the URL object, you might get inconsistent
results for HTTPS connections.
142
Security Policies
Filtering HTTPS Traffic
Filtering HTTPS Traffic

Because HTTPS traffic is encrypted, performing URL filtering directly on HTTPS traffic is not as
straight-forward as it is on HTTP traffic. For that reason, you should consider using SSL Decryption policies
to decrypt all HTTPS traffic that you intend to filter. That way, the URL filtering access control policies work
on decrypted traffic, and you get the same results you would get for regular HTTP traffic.
However, if you do intend to allow some HTTPS traffic to pass undecrypted into the access control policy,
you need to understand that rules match HTTPS traffic differently than they do for HTTP traffic. To filter
encrypted traffic, the system determines the requested URL based on information passed during the SSL
handshake: the subject common name in the public key certificate used to encrypt the traffic. There might be
little or no relationship between the web site hostname in the URL and the subject common name.
HTTPS filtering, unlike HTTP filtering, disregards subdomains within the subject common name. Do not
include subdomain information when manually filtering HTTPS URLs. For example, use example.com rather
than www.example.com. Also, review the content of the certificates used by the site to ensure you have the
right domain, the one used in the subject common name, and that this name will not conflict with your other
rules (for example, the name for a site you want to block might overlap with one you want to allow). For
example, the subject common name in the certificate for youtube.com is *.google.com (this of course might
change at any time).
Note URL objects will not match HTTPS traffic if the browser resumes a TLS session because the certificate
information is no longer available. Thus, even if you carefully configure the URL object, you might get
inconsistent results for HTTPS connections.
Controlling Traffic by Encryption Protocol

The system disregards the encryption protocol (HTTP vs HTTPS) when performing URL filtering. This occurs
for both manual and reputation-based URL conditions. In other words, URL filtering treats traffic to the
following web sites identically:
• http://example.com
• https://example.com
To configure a rule that matches only HTTP or HTTPS traffic, but not both, either specify the TCP port in
the Destination condition or add an application condition to the rule. For example, you could allow HTTPS
access to a site while disallowing HTTP access by constructing two access control rules, each with an TCP
port or application, and URL, condition.
The first rule allows HTTPS traffic to the website:
Action: Allow
TCP port or Application: HTTPS (TCP port 443)
URL: example.com
The second rule blocks HTTP access to the same website:
Action: Block
TCP port or Application: HTTP (TCP port 80)
URL: example.com
143
Security Policies
Comparing URL and Application Filtering
Comparing URL and Application Filtering

URL and application filtering have similarities. But you should use them for very distinct purposes:
• URL filtering is best used to block or allow access to an entire web server. For example, if you do not
want to allow any type of gambling on your network, you can create a URL filtering rule to block the
Gambling category. With this rule, users cannot get to any pages on any web server within the category.
• Application filtering is useful for blocking specific applications regardless of the hosting site, or for
blocking specific features of an otherwise allowable web site. For example, you could block just the
Facebook Games application without blocking all of Facebook.
Because combining application and URL criteria can lead to unexpected results, especially for encrypted
traffic, it is a good policy to create separate rules for URL and application criteria. If you do need to combine
application and URL criteria in a single rule, you should place these rules after straight-forward application-only
or URL-only rules, unless the application+URL rule is acting as an exception to a more general application-only
or URL-only rule. Because URL filtering block rules are more broad than application filtering, you should
place them above application-only rules.
If you do combine application and URL criteria, you might need to monitor your network more carefully to
ensure that you are not allowing access to unwanted sites and applications.
Best Practices for Effective URL Filtering

Please keep the following recommendations in mind when designing your URL filtering access control rules.
• Use category and reputation blocking whenever possible. This ensures that new sites get blocked
automatically as they are added to the categories, and that blocking based on reputation is adjusted if a
site becomes more (or less) reputable.
• When using URL category matching, note that there are cases where the login page for a site is in a
different category than the site itself. For example, Gmail is in the Web-based Email category, whereas
the login page is in the Internet Portals category. If you have different rules with different actions for the
categories, you might get unintended results.
• Use URL objects to target entire web sites and to make exceptions to category blocking rules. That is,
to allow specific sites that would otherwise get blocked in a category rule.
• For the most effective filtering of HTTPS connections, implement SSL decryption rules to decrypt traffic
for which you are writing an access control rule. Any decrypted HTTPS connections are filtered as HTTP
connections in the access control policy, so you avoid all of the limitations for HTTPS filtering.
• Place URL blocking rules before any application filtering rules, because URL filtering blocks entire web
servers, whereas application filtering targets specific application usage regardless of the web server.
What the User Sees When You Block Web Sites

When you block web sites with URL filtering rules, what the user sees differs based on whether the site is
encrypted.
• HTTP connections—The user sees a system default block response page instead of the normal browser
page for timed out or reset connections. This page should make it clear that you blocked the connection
on purpose.
• HTTPS (encrypted) connections—The user does not see the system default block response page. Instead,
the user sees the browser’s default page for a secure connection failure. The error message does not
144
Security Policies
Intrusion, File, and Malware Inspection
indicate the site was blocked due to policy. Instead, errors might indicate that there are no common
encryption algorithms. It will not be obvious from this message that you blocked the connection on
purpose.
In addition, web sites might be blocked by other access control rules that are not explicitly URL filtering rules,
or even by the default action. For example, if you block entire networks or geolocations, any web sites on
that network or in that geographic location are also blocked. Users blocked by these rules may, or may not,
get a response page as described in the limitations below.
If you implement URL filtering, consider explaining to end users what they might see when a site is intentionally
blocked, and what types of site you are blocking. Otherwise, they might spend a good deal of time
troubleshooting blocked connections.
Limitations of HTTP Response Pages

HTTP response pages do not always appear when the system blocks web traffic.
• The system does not display a response page when web traffic is blocked as a result of a promoted access
control rule (an early-placed blocking rule with only simple network conditions).
• The system does not display a response page when web traffic is blocked before the system identifies
the requested URL.
• The system does not display a response page for encrypted connections blocked by access control rules.
Intrusion, File, and Malware Inspection

Intrusion and file policies work together as the last line of defense before traffic is allowed to its destination:
• Intrusion policies govern the system's intrusion prevention capabilities.
• File policies govern the system's file control and malware defense capabilities.
All other traffic handling occurs before network traffic is examined for intrusions, prohibited files, and malware.
By associating an intrusion or file policy with an access control rule, you are telling the system that before it
passes traffic that matches the access control rule's conditions, you first want to inspect the traffic with an
intrusion policy, a file policy, or both.
You can configure intrusion and file policies on rules that allow traffic only. Inspection is not performed on
rules set to trust or block traffic. In addition, if the default action for the access control policy is allow, you
can configure an intrusion policy but not a file policy.
For any single connection handled by an access control rule, file inspection occurs before intrusion inspection.
That is, the system does not inspect files blocked by a file policy for intrusions. Within file inspection, simple
blocking by type takes precedence over malware inspection and blocking. Until a file is detected and blocked
in a session, packets from the session may be subject to intrusion inspection.
Note By default, the system disables intrusion and file inspection of encrypted payloads. This helps reduce
false positives and improve performance when an encrypted connection matches an access control rule
that has intrusion and file inspection configured. Inspection works with unencrypted traffic only.
145
Security Policies
Best Practices for Access Control Rule Order
Best Practices for Access Control Rule Order

traffic. Consider the following recommendations:
• Specific rules should come before general rules, especially when the specific rules are exceptions to
general rules.
• Any rules that drop traffic based on layer-3/4 criteria only (such as IP address, security zone, and port
number) should come as early as possible. We recommend they come before any rule that requires
inspection, such as those with application or URL criteria, because Layer-3/4 criteria can be evaluated
quickly and without inspection. Of course, any exceptions to these rules must be placed above them.
• Whenever possible, put specific drop rules near the top of the policy. This ensures the earliest possible
decision on undesirable traffic.
• Any rules that include both application and URL criteria should come after straight-forward
application-only or URL-only rules, unless the application+URL rule is acting as an exception to a more
general application-only or URL-only rule. Combining application and URL criteria can lead to unexpected
results, especially for encrypted traffic, so we recommend that you create separate rules for URL and
application filtering whenever possible.
NAT and Access Rules

Access rules always use the real IP addresses when determining an access rule match, even if you configure
NAT. For example, if you configure NAT for an inside server, 10.1.1.5, so that it has a publicly routable IP
address on the outside, 209.165.201.5, then the access rule to allow the outside traffic to access the inside
server needs to reference the server’s real IP address (10.1.1.5), and not the mapped address (209.165.201.5).
How Other Security Policies Impact Access Control

Other security policies can affect how access control rules function and match connections. As you configure
your access rules, keep the following in mind:
• Identity policy—Connections are matched to users (and thus, user groups) only if there is a user mapping
for the source IP address. Access rules that key on user or group membership can match only those
connections for which user identity was successfully collected by your identity policy.
• VPN (site-to-site)—VPN traffic is always evaluated against the access control policy, and connections
are allowed or dropped based on the matching rule. However, the VPN tunnel itself is decrypted before
the access control policy is evaluated. The access control policy evaluates the connections that are
embedded within the VPN tunnel, not the tunnel itself.
License Requirements for Access Control

You do not need a special license to use the access control policy.
However, you do need the following licenses for specific features within the access control policy. For
information on configuring licenses, see Enabling or Disabling Optional Licenses, on page 67.
146
Security Policies
Guidelines and Limitations for Access Control Policies
• URL license—To create rules that use URL categories and reputations as match criteria.
• Threat license—To configure an intrusion policy on an access rule or the default action. You also need
this license to use a file policy (the Malware license is also required).
• Malware license—To configure a file policy on an access rule. The Threat is also required for file
policies.
Guidelines and Limitations for Access Control Policies

Following are some additional limitations for access control. Please consider them when evaluating whether
you are getting the expected results from your rules.
• FDM can download information on up to 2000 users from the directory server. If your directory server
includes more than 2000 user accounts, you will not see all possible names when selecting users in an
access rule or when viewing user-based dashboard information. You can write rules on only those names
that were downloaded.
The 2000 limit also applies to the names associated with groups. If a group has more than 2000 members,
only the 2000 names that were downloaded can be matched against the group membership.
• If a Vulnerability Database (VDB) update removes (deprecates) applications, you must make changes
to any access control rules or application filters that use the application that was deleted. You cannot
deploy changes until you fix these rules. In addition, you cannot install system software updates before
fixing the issue. On the Application Filters object page, or the Application tab of the rule, these applications
say “(Deprecated)” after the application name.
• If you edit a rule that is actively in use, the changes do not apply to established connections that are no
longer being inspected by Snort. The new rule is used to match against future connections. In addition,
if Snort is actively inspecting a connection, it can apply the changed matching or action criteria to an
existing connection. If you need to ensure that your changes apply to all current connections, you can
log into the device CLI and use the clear conn command to end established connections, on the assumption
that the sources for the connections will then attempt to reestablish the connection and thus be matched
appropriately against the new rule.
• It takes 3 to 5 packets for the system to identify the application or URL in a connection. Thus, the correct
access control rule might not be matched immediately for a given connection. However, once the
application/URL is known, the connection is handled based on the matching rule. For encrypted
connections, this happens after the server certificate exchange in the SSL handshake.
• The system applies the default policy action to packets that do not have a payload in a connection where
an application is identified.
• Leave matching criteria empty whenever possible, especially those for security zones, network objects,
and port objects. For example, the system can more efficiently match traffic for all interfaces if you
simply leave the security zone criteria blank, rather than if you create zones that contain all interfaces.
When you specify multiple criteria, the system must match against every combination of the contents of
the criteria you specify.
• If you specify IP addresses for source or destination criteria, do not mix IPv4 and IPv6 addresses in the
same rule. Create separate rules for IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.
• Due to memory limitations, some device models perform most URL filtering with a smaller, less granular,
set of categories and reputations. For example, even if a parent URL's subsites have different URL
147
Security Policies
Configuring the Access Control Policy
categories and reputations, some devices may only store the parent URL's data. For web traffic handled
by these devices, the system may perform cloud lookups to determine category and reputation for sites
not in the local database. Lower-memory devices include the following ASA models: 5506-X, 5506H-X,
5506W-X, 5508-X, 5512-X, 5515-X, 5516-X, and 5525-X.
• GRE tunnels that violate the related RFCs will be dropped. For example, if a GRE tunnel contains
non-zero values in the reserved bits, contrary to the RFCs, it is dropped. If you need to allow non-compliant
GRE tunnels, you need to use a remote manager and configure a prefilter rule that trusts the sessions.
You cannot configure prefilter rules using the FDM.
Configuring the Access Control Policy

Use the access control policy to control access to network resources. The policy consists of a set of ordered
rules, which are evaluated from top to bottom. The rule applied to traffic is the first one where all the traffic
criteria are matched. If no rules match the traffic, the default action shown at the bottom of the page is applied.
To configure the access control policy, select Policies > Access Control.
The access control table lists all rules in order. For each rule:
• Click the > button next to the rule number in the left-most column to open the rule diagram. The diagram
can help you visualize how the rule controls traffic. Click the button again to close the diagram.
• Most cells allow inline editing. For example, you can click the action to select a different one, or click
a source network object to add or change the source criteria.
• To move a rule, hover over the rule until you get the move icon ( ), then click, drag, and drop the rule
to the new location. You can also move a rule by editing it and selecting the new location in the Order
list. It is critical that you put the rules in the order that you want them processed. Specific rules should
be near the top, especially for rules that define exceptions to more general rules
• The right-most column contains the action buttons for a rule; mouse over the cell to see the buttons. You
can edit ( ) or delete ( ) a rule.
The following topics explain how to configure the policy.
Configuring the Default Action

If a connection does not match a specific access rule, it is handled by the default action for the access control
policy.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Policies > Access Control.

Step 2 Click anywhere in the Default Action field.
Step 3 Select the action to apply to matching traffic.
• Trust—Allow traffic without further inspection of any kind.
• Allow—Allow the traffic subject to the intrusion policy.
148
Security Policies
Configuring Access Control Rules
• Block—Drop the traffic unconditionally. The traffic is not inspected.
Step 4 If the action is Allow, select Enable Policy > On under Intrusion Policy and select an intrusion policy.
For an explanation of the policy options, see Intrusion Policy Settings, on page 155.
Step 5 (Optional.) Configure logging for the default action.

You must enable logging for traffic that matches the default action to be included in dashboard data or Event
Viewer. See Logging Settings, on page 157.
Step 6 Click OK.
Configuring Access Control Rules

Use access control rules to control access to network resources. Rules in the access control policy are evaluated
from top to bottom. The rule applied to traffic is the first one where all the traffic criteria are matched.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Policies > Access Control.

To delete a rule you no longer need, click the delete icon ( ) for the rule.
Step 3 In Order, select where you want to insert the rule in the ordered list of rules.
traffic.
The default is to add the rule to the end of the list. If you want to change a rule's location later, edit this option.
Step 4 In Title, enter a name for the rule.

The name cannot contain spaces. You can use alphanumeric characters and these special characters: + . _ -
Step 5 Select the action to apply to matching traffic.

• Trust—Allow traffic without further inspection of any kind.
• Allow—Allow the traffic subject to the intrusion and other inspection settings in the policy.
• Block—Drop the traffic unconditionally. The traffic is not inspected.
Step 6 Define the traffic matching criteria using any combination of the following tabs:
• Source/Destination—The security zones (interfaces) through which the traffic passes, the IP addresses
or the country or continent (geographical location) for the IP address, or the protocols and ports used in
the traffic. The default is any zone, address, geographical location, protocol, and port. See
Source/Destination Criteria, on page 150.
149
Security Policies
Source/Destination Criteria
• Application—The application, or a filter that defines applications by type, category, tag, risk, or business
relevance. The default is any application. See Application Criteria, on page 152.
• URL—The URL or URL category of a web request. The default is any URL. See URL Criteria, on page
153.
• Users—The user or user group. Your identity policies determine whether user and group information is
available for traffic matching. You must configure identity policies to use this criteria. See User Criteria,
on page 154.
click OK in the popup dialog box. If the criterion requires an object, you can click Create New Object if the
object you require does not exist. Click the x for an object or element to remove it from the policy.
When adding conditions to access control rules, consider the following tips:
• You can configure multiple conditions per rule. Traffic must match all the conditions in the rule for the
rule to apply to traffic. For example, you can use a single rule to perform URL filtering for specific hosts
or networks.
• For each condition in a rule, you can add up to 50 criteria. Traffic that matches any of a condition's criteria
satisfies the condition. For example, you can use a single rule to apply application control for up to 50
applications or application filters. Thus, there is an OR relationship among the items in a single condition,
but an AND relationship between condition types (for example, between source/destination and
application).
• Some features require that you enable the appropriate license.
Step 7 (Optional.) For policies that use the Allow action, you can configure further inspection on unencrypted traffic.
Click one of the following links:
• Intrusion Policy—Select Intrusion Policy > On and select the intrusion inspection policy to inspect
traffic for intrusions and exploits. See Intrusion Policy Settings, on page 155.
• File Policy—Select the file policy to inspect traffic for files that contain malware and for files that should
be blocked. See File Policy Settings, on page 156.
Step 8 (Optional.) Configure logging for the rule.

By default, connection events are not generated for traffic that matches a rule, although file events are generated
by default if you select a file policy. You can change this behavior. You must enable logging for traffic that
matches the policy to be included in dashboard data or Event Viewer. See Logging Settings, on page 157.
Intrusion events are always generated for intrusion rules set to drop or alert regardless of the logging
configuration on the matching access rule.
Step 9 Click OK.
The Source/Destination criteria of an access rule define the security zones (interfaces) through which the
traffic passes, the IP addresses or the country or continent (geographical location) for the IP address, or the
protocols and ports used in the traffic. The default is any zone, address, geographical location, protocol, and
port.
150
Security Policies
click OK. If the criterion requires an object, you can click Create New Object if the object you require does
not exist. Click the x for an object or element to remove it from the policy.
You can use the following criteria to identify the source and destination to match in the rule.
Source Zones, Destination Zones
The security zone objects that define the interfaces through which the traffic passes. You can define one,
both, or neither criteria: any criteria not specified applies to traffic on any interface.
• To match traffic leaving the device from an interface in the zone, add that zone to the Destination
Zones.
• To match traffic entering the device from an interface in the zone, add that zone to the Source
Zones.
• If you add both source and destination zone conditions to a rule, matching traffic must originate
from one of the specified source zones and egress through one of the destination zones.
Use this criteria when the rule should apply based on where the traffic enters or exits the device. For
example, if you want to ensure that all traffic going to inside hosts gets intrusion inspection, you would
select your inside zone as the Destination Zones while leaving the source zone empty. To implement
intrusion filtering in the rule, the rule action must be Allow, and you must select an intrusion policy in
the rule.
Source Networks, Destination Networks
The network objects or geographical locations that define the network addresses or locations of the traffic.
• To match traffic from an IP address or geographical location, configure the Source Networks.
• To match traffic to an IP address or geographical location, configure the Destination Networks.
• If you add both source and destination network conditions to a rule, matching traffic must originate
from one of the specified IP addresses and be destined for one of the destination IP addresses.
When you add this criteria, you select from the following tabs:
• Network—Select the network objects or groups that define the source or destination IP addresses
for the traffic you want to control.
• Geolocation—Select the geographical location to control traffic based on its source or destination
country or continent. Selecting a continent selects all countries within the continent. Besides selecting
geographical location directly in the rule, you can also select a geolocation object that you created
to define the location. Using geographical location, you could easily restrict access to a particular
country without needing to know all of the potential IP addresses used there.
Note To ensure that you are using up-to-date geographical location data to filter
your traffic, Cisco strongly recommends that you regularly update the
geolocation database (GeoDB).
151
Security Policies
Application Criteria
Source Ports, Destination Ports/Protocols

The port objects that define the protocols used in the traffic. For TCP/UDP, this can include ports. For
ICMP, it can include codes and types.
• To match traffic from a protocol or port, configure the Source Ports. Source ports can be TCP/UDP
only.
• To match traffic to a protocol or port, configure the Destination Ports/Protocols. If you add only
destination ports to a condition, you can add ports that use different transport protocols. ICMP and
other non-TCP/UDP specifications are allowed in destination ports only; they are not allowed in
source ports.
• To match traffic both originating from specific TCP/UDP ports and destined for specific TCP/UDP
ports, configure both. If you add both source and destination ports to a condition, you can only add
ports that share a single transport protocol, TCP or UDP. For example, you could target traffic from
port TCP/80 to port TCP/8080.
Application Criteria
The Application criteria of an access rule defines the application used in an IP connection, or a filter that
defines applications by type, category, tag, risk, or business relevance. The default is any application.
Although you can specify individual applications in the rule, application filters simplify policy creation and
administration. For example, you could create an access control rule that identifies and blocks all high risk,
low business relevance applications. If a user attempts to use one of those applications, the session is blocked.
In addition, Cisco frequently updates and adds additional application detectors via system and vulnerability
database (VDB) updates. Thus, a rule blocking high risk applications can automatically apply to new
applications without you having to update the rule manually.
You can specify applications and filters directly in the rule, or create application filter objects that define those
characteristics. The specifications are equivalent, although using objects can make it easier to stay within the
50-items-per-criteria system limit if you are creating a complex rule.
To modify the application and filters list, you click the + button within the condition, select the desired
applications or application filter objects, which are listed on separate tabs, and click OK in the popup dialog
box. On either tab, you can click Advanced Filter to select filter criteria or to help you search for specific
applications. Click the x for an application, filter, or object to remove it from the policy. Click the Save As
Filter link to save the combined criteria that is not already an object as a new application filter object.
Note If a selected application was removed by a VDB update, “(Deprecated)” appears after the application
name. You must remove these applications from the filter, or subsequent deployments and system
software upgrades will be blocked.
You can use the following Advanced Filter criteria to identify the application or filter to match in the rule.
These are the same elements used in application filter objects.
152
Security Policies
URL Criteria
Note Multiple selections within a single filter criteria have an OR relationship. For example, Risk is High OR
Very High. The relationship between filters is AND, so Risk is High OR Very High, AND Business
Relevance is Low OR Very Low. As you select filters, the list of applications in the display updates to
show only those that meet the criteria. You can use these filters to help you find applications that you
want to add individually, or to verify that you are selecting the desired filters to add to the rule.
Risks
The likelihood that the application is used for purposes that might be against your organization's security
policy, from very low to very high.
Business Relevance
The likelihood that the application is used within the context of your organization's business operations,
as opposed to recreationally, from very low to very high.
Types
The type of application:
• Application Protocol—Application protocols such as HTTP and SSH, which represent
communications between hosts.
• Client Protocol—Clients such as web browsers and email clients, which represent software running
on the host.
• Web Application—Web applications such as MPEG video and Facebook, which represent the
content or requested URL for HTTP traffic.
Categories
A general classification for the application that describes its most essential function.
Tags
Additional information about the application, similar to category.
For encrypted traffic, the system can identify and filter traffic using only the applications tagged SSL
Protocol. Applications without this tag can only be detected in unencrypted or decrypted traffic. Also,
the system assigns the decrypted traffic tag to applications that the system can detect in decrypted traffic
only, not encrypted or unencrypted.
Applications List (bottom of the display)
This list updates as you select filters from the options above the list, so you can see the applications that
currently match the filter. Use this list to verify that your filter is targeting the desired applications when
you intend to add filter criteria to the rule. If your intention is to add specific applications, select them
from this list.
URL Criteria
The URL criteria of an access rule defines the URL used in a web request, or the category to which the
requested URL belongs. For category matches, you can also specify the relative reputation of sites to allow
or block. The default is to allow all URLs.
153
Security Policies
User Criteria
URL categories and reputations allow you to quickly create URL conditions for access control rules. For
example, you could block all Gambling sites, or high risk Social Networking sites. If a user attempts to browse
to any URL with that category and reputation combination, the session is blocked.
Using category and reputation data also simplifies policy creation and administration. It grants you assurance
that the system will control web traffic as expected. Finally, because Cisco's threat intelligence is continually
updated with new URLs, as well as new categories and risks for existing URLs, you can ensure that the system
uses up-to-date information to filter requested URLs. Malicious sites that represent security threats such as
malware, spam, botnets, and phishing may appear and disappear faster than you can update and deploy new
policies.
To modify the URL list, you click the + button within the condition and select the desired categories or URLs
using one of the following techniques. Click the x for a category or object to remove it from the policy.
URL Tab
Click +, select URL objects or groups, and click OK. You can click Create New URL if the object you
require does not exist.
Note Before configuring URL objects to target specific sites, carefully read the information on manual
URL filtering.
Categories Tab
Click +, select the desired categories, and click OK.
The default is to apply the rule to all URLs in each selected category regardless of reputation. To limit
the rule based on reputation, click the down arrow for each category, deselect the Any checkbox, and
then use the Reputation slider to choose the reputation level. The left of the reputation slider indicates
sites that will be allowed, the right side are sites that will be blocked. How reputation is used depends
on the rule action:
• If the rule blocks or monitors web access, selecting a reputation level also selects all reputations
more severe than that level. For example, if you configure a rule to block or monitor Suspicious
sites (level 2), it also automatically blocks or monitors High risk (level 1) sites.
• If the rule allows web access, selecting a reputation level also selects all reputations less severe than
that level. For example, if you configure a rule to allow Benign sites (level 4), it also automatically
allows Well known (level 5) sites.
User Criteria
The User criteria of an access rule defines the user or user group for an IP connection. You must configure
identity policies and the associated directory server to include user or user group criteria in an access rule.
Your identity policies determine whether user identity is collected for a particular connection. If identity is
established, the IP address of the host is associated with the identified user. Thus, traffic whose source IP
address is mapped to a user is considered to be from that user. IP packets themselves do not include user
identity information, so this IP-address-to-user mapping is the best approximation available.
Because you can add a maximum of 50 users or groups to a rule, selecting groups usually makes more sense
than selecting individual users. For example, you could create a rule allowing the Engineering group access
to a development network, and create a subsequent rule that denies all other access to the network. Then, to
154
Security Policies
Intrusion Policy Settings
make the rule apply to new engineers, you only need to add the engineer to the Engineering group in the
directory server.
To modify the users list, you click the + button within the condition and select the desired identities using one
of the following techniques. Click the x for an identity to remove it from the policy.
• Users and Groups tab—Select the desired users or user groups. Groups are available only if you configure
groups in the directory server. If you select a group, the rule applies to any member of the group, including
subgroups. If you want to treat a sub-group differently, you need to create a separate access rule for the
sub-group and place it above the rule for the parent group in the access control policy.
• Special Entities tab—Select from the following:
• Failed Authentication—The user was prompted to authenticate, but failed to enter a valid
username/password pair within the maximum number of allowed attempts. Failure to authenticate
does not itself prevent the user from accessing the network, but you can write an access rule to limit
network access for these users.
• Guest—Guest users are like Failed Authentication users, except that your identity rule is configured
to call these users Guest. Guest users were prompted to authenticate and failed to do so within the
maximum number of attempts.
• No Authentication Required—The user was not prompted to authentication, because the user's
connections matched identity rules that specified no authentication.
• Unknown—There is no user mapping for the IP address, and there is no record of failed
authentication yet. Typically, this means that no HTTP traffic has yet been seen from that address.
Intrusion Policy Settings

Cisco delivers several intrusion policies with the Firepower System. These policies are designed by the Cisco
Talos Intelligence Group (Talos), who set the intrusion and preprocessor rule states and advanced settings.
You cannot modify these policies.
For access control rules that allow traffic, you can select one of the following intrusion policies to inspect
traffic for intrusions and exploits. An intrusion policy examines decoded packets for attacks based on patterns,
and can block or alter malicious traffic.
To enable intrusion inspection, select Intrusion Policy > On and select the desired policy. The policies are
listed from least to most secure.
• Connectivity over Security—This policy is built for organizations where connectivity (being able to
get to all resources) takes precedence over network infrastructure security. The intrusion policy enables
far fewer rules than those enabled in the Security over Connectivity policy. Only the most critical rules
that block traffic are enabled. Select this policy if you want to apply some intrusion protection but you
are fairly confident in the security of your network.
• Balanced Security and Connectivity—This policy is designed to balance overall network performance
with network infrastructure security. This policy is appropriate for most networks. Select this policy for
most situations where you want to apply intrusion prevention.
• Security over Connectivity—This policy is built for organizations where network infrastructure security
takes precedence over user convenience. The intrusion policy enables numerous network anomaly
intrusion rules that could alert on or drop legitimate traffic. Select this policy when security is paramount
or for traffic that is high risk.
155
Security Policies
File Policy Settings
• Maximum Detection—This policy is built for organizations where network infrastructure security is
given even more emphasis than is given by the Security Over Connectivity policy, with the potential for
even greater operational impact. For example, the intrusion policy enables rules in a large number of
threat categories including malware, exploit kit, old and common vulnerabilities, and known in-the-wild
exploits. If you select this policy, carefully evaluate whether too much legitimate traffic is being dropped.
File Policy Settings

Use file policies to detect malicious software, or malware, using malware defense. You can also use file
policies to perform file control, which allows control over all files of a specific type regardless of whether the
files contain malware.
Malware defense uses the AMP Cloud to retrieve dispositions for possible malware detected in network traffic,
and to obtain local malware analysis and file pre-classification updates. The management interface must have
a path to the Internet to reach the AMP Cloud and perform malware lookups. When the device detects an
eligible file, it uses the file's SHA-256 hash value to query the AMP Cloud for the file's disposition. The
possible dispositions are:
• Malware—The AMP Cloud categorized the file as malware. An archive file (e.g. a zip file) is marked
as malware if any file within it is malware.
• Clean—The AMP Cloud categorized the file as clean, containing no malware. An archive file is marked
as clean if all files within it are clean.
• Unknown—The AMP Cloud has not assigned a disposition to the file yet. An archive file is marked as
unknown if any file within it is unknown.
• Unavailable—The system could not query the AMP Cloud to determine the file's disposition. You may
see a small percentage of events with this disposition; this is expected behavior. If you see a number of
"unavailable" events in succession, ensure that the Internet connection for the management address is
functioning correctly.
Available File Policies

You can select one of the following file policies:
• None—Do not evaluate transmitted files for malware and do no file-specific blocking. Select this option
for rules where file transmissions are trusted or where they are unlikely (or impossible), or for rules
where you are confident your application or URL filtering adequately protects your network.
• Block Malware All—Query the AMP Cloud to determine if files traversing your network contain
malware, then block files that represent threats.
• Cloud Lookup All—Query the AMP Cloudto obtain and log the disposition of files traversing your
network while still allowing their transmission.
• Block Office Document and PDF Upload, Block Malware Others—Block users from uploading
Microsoft Office documents and PDFs. Additionally, query the AMP Cloud to determine if files traversing
your network contain malware, then block files that represent threats.
• Block Office Documents Upload, Block Malware Others—Block users from uploading Microsoft
Office documents. Additionally, query the AMP Cloud to determine if files traversing your network
contain malware, then block files that represent threats.
156
Security Policies
Logging Settings
Logging Settings
The logging settings for an access rule determine whether connection events are issued for traffic that matches
the rule. You must enable logging to see events related to the rule in the Event Viewer. You must also enable
logging for matching traffic to be reflected in the various dashboards you can use to monitor the system.
You should log connections according to the security and compliance needs of your organization. If your goal
is to limit the number of events you generate and improve performance, only enable logging for the connections
critical to your analysis. However, if you want a broad view of your network traffic for profiling purposes,
you can enable logging for additional connections.
Caution Logging blocked TCP connections during a Denial of Service (DoS) attack can affect system performance
and overwhelm the database with multiple similar events. Before you enable logging for a Block rule,
consider whether the rule is for an Internet-facing interface or other interface vulnerable to DoS attack.
You can configure the following logging actions.

Select Log Action
You can select one of the following actions:
• Log at Beginning and End of Connection—Issue events at the start and end of a connection.
Because end-of-connection events contain everything that start-of-connection events contain, plus
all of the information that could be gleaned during the connection, Cisco recommends that you do
not select this option for traffic that you are allowing. Logging both events can impact system
performance. However, this is the only option allowed for blocked traffic.
• Log at End of Connection—Select this option if you want to enable connection logging at the end
of the connection, which is recommended for allowed or trusted traffic.
• No Logging at Connection—Select this option to disable logging for the rule. This is the default.
Note When an intrusion policy invoked by an access control rule detects an intrusion and generates an
intrusion event, the system automatically logs the end of the connection where the intrusion occurred,
regardless of the logging configuration of the rule. For connections where an intrusion was blocked,
the action for the connection in the connection log is Block, with a reason of Intrusion Block,
even though to perform intrusion inspection you must use an Allow rule.
File Events
Select Log Files if you want to enable logging of prohibited files or malware events. You must select a
file policy in the rule to configure this option. The option is enabled by default if you select a file policy
for the rule. Cisco recommends you leave this option enabled.
When the system detects a prohibited file, it automatically logs one of the following types of event:
• File events, which represent detected or blocked files, including malware files.
• Malware events, which represent detected or blocked malware files only.
• Retrospective malware events, which are generated when the malware disposition for a previously
detected file changes.
157
Security Policies
Monitoring Access Control Policies
For connections where a file was blocked, the action for the connection in the connection log is Block
even though to perform file and malware inspection you must use an Allow rule. The connection's Reason
is either File Monitor (a file type or malware was detected), or Malware Block or File Block (a file
was blocked).
Send Connection Events To
If you want to send a copy of the events to an external syslog server, select the server object that defines
the syslog server. If the required object does not already exist, click Create New Syslog Server and
create it. (To disable logging to a syslog server, select Any from the server list.)
Because event storage on the device is limited, sending events to an external syslog server can provide
more long term storage and enhance your event analysis.
Monitoring Access Control Policies

The following topics explain how you can monitor the access control policy.
Monitoring Access Control Statistics in the Dashboards

Most of the data on the Monitoring dashboards are directly related to your access control policy. See Monitoring
Traffic and System Dashboards, on page 71.
• Monitoring > Policies shows the most-hit access control rules and related statistics.
• You can find general statistics on the Network Overview, Destinations, Ingress Zones, and Egress
Zones dashboards.
• You can find URL filtering results on the Web Categories and Destinations dashboards. You must have
at least one URL filtering policy to see any information on the Web Categories dashboard.
• You can find application filtering results on the Applications dashboard.
• You can find user-based statistics on the Users dashboard. You must implement identity policies to
collect user information.
• You can find intrusion policy statistics on the Attackers and Targets dashboards. You must apply an
intrusion policy to at least one access control rule to see any information on these dashboards.
• You can find file policy and malware filtering statistics on the File Logs dashboard. You must apply a
file policy to at least one access control rule to see any information on this dashboard.
• Monitoring > Events also shows events for connections and data related to the access control rules.
Monitoring Access Control Policies in the CLI

You can also log into the device CLI and use the following commands to get more detailed information about
access control policies and statistics.
• show access-control-config displays summary information about the access control rules along with
per-rule hit counts.
• show access-list displays the access control lists (ACLs) that were generated from the access control
rules. The ACLs provide an initial filter and attempt to provide quick decisions whenever possible, so
158
Security Policies
Examples for Access Control
that connections that should be dropped do not need to be inspected (and thus consume resources
unnecessarily). This information includes hit counts.
• show snort statistics displays information about the Snort inspection engine, which is the main inspector.
Snort implements application filtering, URL filtering, intrusion protection, and file and malware filtering.
• show conn displays information about the connections currently established through the interfaces.
• show traffic displays statistics about traffic flowing through each interface.
• show ipv6 traffic displays statistics about IPv6 traffic flowing through the device.

The use case chapter includes several examples of implementing access control rules. Please see the following
examples:
• How to Gain Insight Into Your Network Traffic, on page 36. This example shows some basic ideas for
collecting overall connection and user information.
• How to Block Threats, on page 42. This example shows how to apply intrusion policies.
• How to Block Malware, on page 46. This example shows how to apply file policies.
• How to Implement an Acceptable Use Policy (URL Filtering), on page 49. This example shows how to
perform URL filtering.
• How to Control Application Usage, on page 53. This example shows how to perform application filtering.
• How to Add a Subnet, on page 57. This example shows how to integrate a new subnet into your overall
network, including the access rules needed to allow traffic flow.
159
Security Policies
160
CHAPTER 10
Network Address Translation (NAT)
The following topics explain Network Address Translation (NAT) and how to configure it.
• Why Use NAT?, on page 161
• NAT Basics, on page 162
• Guidelines for NAT, on page 168
• Configure NAT, on page 173
• Translating IPv6 Networks, on page 198
• Monitoring NAT, on page 212
• Examples for NAT, on page 213
Why Use NAT?

Each computer and device within an IP network is assigned a unique IP address that identifies the host. Because
of a shortage of public IPv4 addresses, most of these IP addresses are private, not routable anywhere outside
of the private company network. RFC 1918 defines the private IP addresses you can use internally that should
not be advertised:
• 10.0.0.0 through 10.255.255.255
• 172.16.0.0 through 172.31.255.255
• 192.168.0.0 through 192.168.255.255
One of the main functions of NAT is to enable private IP networks to connect to the Internet. NAT replaces
a private IP address with a public IP address, translating the private addresses in the internal private network
into legal, routable addresses that can be used on the public Internet. In this way, NAT conserves public
addresses because it can be configured to advertise at a minimum only one public address for the entire network
to the outside world.
Other functions of NAT include:
• Security—Keeping internal IP addresses hidden discourages direct attacks.
• IP routing solutions—Overlapping IP addresses are not a problem when you use NAT.
• Flexibility—You can change internal IP addressing schemes without affecting the public addresses
available externally; for example, for a server accessible to the Internet, you can maintain a fixed IP
address for Internet use, but internally, you can change the server address.
161
Security Policies
NAT Basics
• Translating between IPv4 and IPv6 (Routed mode only) —If you want to connect an IPv6 network to
an IPv4 network, NAT lets you translate between the two types of addresses.
Note NAT is not required. If you do not configure NAT for a given set of traffic, that traffic will not be
translated, but will have all of the security policies applied as normal.
NAT Basics
The following topics explain some of the basics of NAT.
NAT Terminology
This document uses the following terminology:
• Real address/host/network/interface—The real address is the address that is defined on the host, before
it is translated. In a typical NAT scenario where you want to translate the inside network when it accesses
the outside, the inside network would be the “real” network. Note that you can translate any network
connected to the device, not just an inside network. Therefore if you configure NAT to translate outside
addresses, “real” can refer to the outside network when it accesses the inside network.
• Mapped address/host/network/interface—The mapped address is the address that the real address is
translated to. In a typical NAT scenario where you want to translate the inside network when it accesses
the outside, the outside network would be the “mapped” network.
Note During address translation, IP addresses configured for the device interfaces
are not translated.
• Bidirectional initiation—Static NAT allows connections to be initiated bidirectionally, meaning both to

the host and from the host.
• Source and destination NAT—For any given packet, both the source and destination IP addresses are
compared to the NAT rules, and one or both can be translated/untranslated. For static NAT, the rule is
bidirectional, so be aware that “source” and “destination” are used in commands and descriptions
throughout this guide even though a given connection might originate at the “destination” address.
NAT Types
You can implement NAT using the following methods:
• Dynamic NAT—A group of real IP addresses are mapped to a (usually smaller) group of mapped IP
addresses, on a first come, first served basis. Only the real host can initiate traffic. See Dynamic NAT,
on page 173.
• Dynamic Port Address Translation (PAT)—A group of real IP addresses are mapped to a single IP address
using a unique source port of that IP address. See Dynamic PAT, on page 178.
162
Security Policies
NAT in Routed Mode
• Static NAT—A consistent mapping between a real and mapped IP address. Allows bidirectional traffic
initiation. See Static NAT, on page 182.
• Identity NAT—A real address is statically translated to itself, essentially bypassing NAT. You might
want to configure NAT this way when you want to translate a large group of addresses, but then want
to exempt a smaller subset of addresses. See Identity NAT, on page 191.
NAT in Routed Mode

The following figure shows a typical NAT example in routed mode, with a private network on the inside.
Figure 5: NAT Example: Routed Mode
1. When the inside host at 10.1.2.27 sends a packet to a web server, the real source address of the packet,
10.1.2.27, is translated to a mapped address, 209.165.201.10.
2. When the server responds, it sends the response to the mapped address, 209.165.201.10, and the FTD
device receives the packet because the FTD device performs proxy ARP to claim the packet.
3. The FTD device then changes the translation of the mapped address, 209.165.201.10, back to the real
address, 10.1.2.27, before sending it to the host.
Auto NAT and Manual NAT

You can implement address translation in two ways: auto NAT and manual NAT.
We recommend using auto NAT unless you need the extra features that manual NAT provides. It is easier to
configure auto NAT, and it might be more reliable for applications such as Voice over IP (VoIP). (For VoIP,
you might see a failure in the translation of indirect addresses that do not belong to either of the objects used
in the rule.)
163
Security Policies
Auto NAT
Auto NAT
All NAT rules that are configured as a parameter of a network object are considered to be auto NAT rules.
This is a quick and easy way to configure NAT for a network object. You cannot create these rules for a group
object, however.
Although these rules are configured as part of the object itself, you cannot see the NAT configuration in the
object definition through the object manager.
When a packet enters an interface, both the source and destination IP addresses are checked against the auto
NAT rules. The source and destination address in the packet can be translated by separate rules if separate
matches are made. These rules are not tied to each other; different combinations of rules can be used depending
on the traffic.
Because the rules are never paired, you cannot specify that sourceA/destinationA should have a different
translation than sourceA/destinationB. Use manual NAT for that kind of functionality, where you can identify
the source and destination address in a single rule.
Manual NAT
Manual NAT lets you identify both the source and destination address in a single rule. Specifying both the
source and destination addresses lets you specify that sourceA/destinationA can have a different translation
than sourceA/destinationB.
Note For static NAT, the rule is bidirectional, so be aware that “source” and “destination” are used in commands
and descriptions throughout this guide even though a given connection might originate at the “destination”
address. For example, if you configure static NAT with port address translation, and specify the source
address as a Telnet server, and you want all traffic going to that Telnet server to have the port translated
from 2323 to 23, then you must specify the source ports to be translated (real: 23, mapped: 2323). You
specify the source ports because you specified the Telnet server address as the source address.
The destination address is optional. If you specify the destination address, you can either map it to itself
(identity NAT), or you can map it to a different address. The destination mapping is always a static mapping.
Comparing Auto NAT and Manual NAT

The main differences between these two NAT types are:
• How you define the real address.
• Auto NAT—The NAT rule becomes a parameter for a network object. The network object IP address
serves as the original (real) address.
• Manual NAT—You identify a network object or network object group for both the real and mapped
addresses. In this case, NAT is not a parameter of the network object; the network object or group
is a parameter of the NAT configuration. The ability to use a network object group for the real
address means that manual NAT is more scalable.
• How source and destination NAT is implemented.

• Auto NAT— Each rule can apply to either the source or destination of a packet. So two rules might
be used, one for the source IP address, and one for the destination IP address. These two rules cannot
be tied together to enforce a specific translation for a source/destination combination.
164
Security Policies
NAT Rule Order
• Manual NAT—A single rule translates both the source and destination. A packet matches one rule
only, and further rules are not checked. Even if you do not configure the optional destination address,
a matching packet still matches one manual NAT rule only. The source and destination are tied
together, so you can enforce different translations depending on the source/destination combination.
For example, sourceA/destinationA can have a different translation than sourceA/destinationB.
• Order of NAT Rules.

• Auto NAT—Automatically ordered in the NAT table.
• Manual NAT—Manually ordered in the NAT table (before or after auto NAT rules).
NAT Rule Order

Auto NAT and manual NAT rules are stored in a single table that is divided into three sections. Section 1
rules are applied first, then section 2, and finally section 3, until a match is found. For example, if a match is
found in section 1, sections 2 and 3 are not evaluated. The following table shows the order of rules within
each section.
Table 3: NAT Rule Table
Table Section Rule Type Order of Rules within the Section
Section 1 Manual NAT Applied on a first match basis, in the order they appear in the
configuration. Because the first match is applied, you must ensure
that specific rules come before more general rules, or the specific
rules might not be applied as desired. By default, manual NAT
rules are added to section 1.
By "specific rules first," we mean:
• Static rules should come before dynamic rules.
• Rules that include destination translation should come before
rules with source translation only.
If you cannot eliminate overlapping rules, where more than one

rule might apply based on the source or destination address, be
especially careful to follow these recommendations.
165
Security Policies
NAT Rule Order
Table Section Rule Type Order of Rules within the Section
Section 2 Auto NAT If a match in section 1 is not found, section 2 rules are applied in
the following order:
1. Static rules.
2. Dynamic rules.
Within each rule type, the following ordering guidelines are

used:
1. Quantity of real IP addresses—From smallest to largest. For
example, an object with one address will be assessed before
an object with 10 addresses.
2. For quantities that are the same, then the IP address number
is used, from lowest to highest. For example, 10.1.1.0 is
assessed before 11.1.1.0.
3. If the same IP address is used, then the name of the network
object is used, in alphabetical order. For example, abracadabra
is assessed before catwoman.
Section 3 Manual NAT If a match is still not found, section 3 rules are applied on a first
match basis, in the order they appear in the configuration. This
section should contain your most general rules. You must also
ensure that any specific rules in this section come before general
rules that would otherwise apply.
For section 2 rules, for example, you have the following IP addresses defined within network objects:
• 192.168.1.0/24 (static)
• 192.168.1.0/24 (dynamic)
• 10.1.1.0/24 (static)
• 192.168.1.1/32 (static)
• 172.16.1.0/24 (dynamic) (object def)
• 172.16.1.0/24 (dynamic) (object abc)
The resultant ordering would be:

• 192.168.1.1/32 (static)
• 10.1.1.0/24 (static)
• 192.168.1.0/24 (static)
• 172.16.1.0/24 (dynamic) (object abc)
• 172.16.1.0/24 (dynamic) (object def)
• 192.168.1.0/24 (dynamic)
166
Security Policies
NAT Interfaces
NAT Interfaces
Except for bridge group member interfaces, you can configure a NAT rule to apply to any interface (in other
words, all interfaces), or you can identify specific real and mapped interfaces. You can also specify any
interface for the real address, and a specific interface for the mapped address, or vice versa.
For example, you might want to specify any interface for the real address and specify the outside interface
for the mapped address if you use the same private addresses on multiple interfaces, and you want to translate
them all to the same global pool when accessing the outside.
Figure 6: Specifying Any Interface
However, the concept of “any” interface does not apply to bridge group member interfaces. When you specify
“any” interface, all bridge group member interfaces are excluded. Thus, to apply NAT to bridge group members,
you must specify the member interface. This could result in many similar rules where only one interface is
different. You cannot configure NAT for the Bridge Virtual Interface (BVI) itself, you can configure NAT
for member interfaces only.
Configuring Routing for NAT

The FTD device needs to be the destination for any packets sent to the translated (mapped) address.
When sending packets, the device uses the destination interface if you specify one, or a routing table lookup
if you do not, to determine the egress interface. For identity NAT, you have the option to use a route lookup
even if you specify a destination interface.
The type of routing configuration needed depends on the type of mapped address, as explained in the following
topics.
Addresses on the Same Network as the Mapped Interface

If you use addresses on the same network as the destination (mapped) interface, the FTD device uses proxy
ARP to answer any ARP requests for the mapped addresses, thus intercepting traffic destined for a mapped
address. This solution simplifies routing because the FTD device does not have to be the gateway for any
additional networks. This solution is ideal if the outside network contains an adequate number of free addresses,
a consideration if you are using a 1:1 translation like dynamic NAT or static NAT. Dynamic PAT greatly
extends the number of translations you can use with a small number of addresses, so even if the available
addresses on the outside network is small, this method can be used. For PAT, you can even use the IP address
of the mapped interface.
167
Security Policies
Addresses on a Unique Network
Addresses on a Unique Network

If you need more addresses than are available on the destination (mapped) interface network, you can identify
addresses on a different subnet. The upstream router needs a static route for the mapped addresses that points
to the FTD device.
The Same Address as the Real Address (Identity NAT)

The default behavior for identity NAT has proxy ARP enabled, matching other static NAT rules. You can
disable proxy ARP if desired. You can also disable proxy ARP for regular static NAT if desired, in which
case you need to be sure to have proper routes on the upstream router.
Normally for identity NAT, proxy ARP is not required, and in some cases can cause connectivity issues. For
example, if you configure a broad identity NAT rule for “any” IP address, then leaving proxy ARP enabled
can cause problems for hosts on the network directly connected to the mapped interface. In this case, when a
host on the mapped network wants to communicate with another host on the same network, then the address
in the ARP request matches the NAT rule (which matches “any” address). The FTD device will then proxy
ARP for the address, even though the packet is not actually destined for the FTD device. (Note that this
problem occurs even if you have a manual NAT rule; although the NAT rule must match both the source and
destination addresses, the proxy ARP decision is made only on the “source” address). If the FTD device ARP
response is received before the actual host ARP response, then traffic will be mistakenly sent to the FTD
device.
Guidelines for NAT

The following topics provide detailed guidelines for implementing NAT.
Interface Guidelines
NAT is supported for standard routed physical or subinterfaces.
However, configuring NAT on bridge group member interfaces (interfaces that are part of a Bridge Virtual
Interface, or BVI) has the following restrictions:
• When configuring NAT for the members of a bridge group, you specify the member interface. You
cannot configure NAT for the bridge group interface (BVI) itself.
• When doing NAT between bridge group member interfaces, you must specify the source and destination
interfaces. You cannot specify “any” as the interface.
• You cannot configure interface PAT when the destination interface is a bridge group member interface,
because there is no IP address attached to the interface.
• You cannot translate between IPv4 and IPv6 networks (NAT64/46) when the source and destination
interfaces are members of the same bridge group. Static NAT/PAT 44/66, dynamic NAT44/66, and
dynamic PAT44 are the only allowed methods; dynamic PAT66 is not supported.
IPv6 NAT Guidelines

NAT supports IPv6 with the following guidelines and restrictions.
• For standard routed mode interfaces, you can also translate between IPv4 and IPv6.
168
Security Policies
IPv6 NAT Best Practices
• You cannot translate between IPv4 and IPv6 for interfaces that are members of the same bridge group.
You can translate between two IPv6 or two IPv4 networks only. This restriction does not apply between
a bridge group member and a standard routed interface.
• You cannot use dynamic PAT for IPv6 (NAT66) when translating between interfaces in the same bridge
group. This restriction does not apply between a bridge group member and a standard routed interface.
• For static NAT, you can specify an IPv6 subnet up to /64. Larger subnets are not supported.
• When using FTP with NAT46, when an IPv4 FTP client connects to an IPv6 FTP server, the client must
use either the extended passive mode (EPSV) or extended port mode (EPRT); PASV and PORT commands
are not supported with IPv6.
IPv6 NAT Best Practices

You can use NAT to translate between IPv6 networks, and also to translate between IPv4 and IPv6 networks
(routed mode only). We recommend the following best practices:
• NAT66 (IPv6-to-IPv6)—We recommend using static NAT. Although you can use dynamic NAT or
PAT, IPv6 addresses are in such large supply, you do not have to use dynamic NAT. If you do not want
to allow returning traffic, you can make the static NAT rule unidirectional (manual NAT only).
• NAT46 (IPv4-to-IPv6)—We recommend using static NAT. Because the IPv6 address space is so much
larger than the IPv4 address space, you can easily accommodate a static translation. If you do not want
to allow returning traffic, you can make the static NAT rule unidirectional (manual NAT only). When
translating to an IPv6 subnet (/96 or lower), the resulting mapped address is by default an IPv4-embedded
IPv6 address, where the 32-bits of the IPv4 address is embedded after the IPv6 prefix. For example, if
the IPv6 prefix is a /96 prefix, then the IPv4 address is appended in the last 32-bits of the address. For
example, if you map 192.168.1.0/24 to 201b::0/96, then 192.168.1.4 will be mapped to 201b::0.192.168.1.4
(shown with mixed notation). If the prefix is smaller, such as /64, then the IPv4 address is appended after
the prefix, and a suffix of 0s is appended after the IPv4 address.
• NAT64 (IPv6-to-IPv4)—You may not have enough IPv4 addresses to accommodate the number of IPv6
addresses. We recommend using a dynamic PAT pool to provide a large number of IPv4 translations.
NAT Support for Inspected Protocols

Some application layer protocols that open secondary connections, or that embedded IP addresses in packets,
are inspected to provide the following services:
• Pinhole creation—Some application protocols open secondary TCP or UDP connections either on standard
or negotiated ports. Inspection opens pinholes for these secondary ports so that you do not need to create
access control rules to allow them.
• NAT rewrite— Protocols such as FTP embed IP addresses and ports for the secondary connections in
packet data as part of the protocol. If there is NAT translation involved for either of the endpoints, the
inspection engines rewrite the packet data to reflect the NAT translation of the embedded addresses and
ports. The secondary connections would not work without NAT rewrite.
• Protocol enforcement—Some inspections enforce some degree of conformance to the RFCs for the
inspected protocol.
169
Security Policies
NAT Support for Inspected Protocols
The following table lists the inspected protocols that apply NAT rewrite and their NAT limitations. Keep
these limitations in mind when writing NAT rules that include these protocols. Inspected protocols not listed
here do not apply NAT rewrite. These inspections include GTP, HTTP, IMAP, POP, SMTP, SSH, and SSL.
Note NAT rewrite is supported on the listed ports only. If you use these protocols on non-standard ports, do
not use NAT on the connections.
Table 4: NAT Supported Application Inspection
Application Inspected Protocol, Port NAT Limitations Pinholes Created
DCERPC TCP/135 No NAT64. Yes
DNS over UDP UDP/53 No NAT support is available for name resolution No
through WINS.
ESMTP TCP/25 No NAT64. No
FTP TCP/21 No limitations. Yes
H.323 H.225 (Call TCP/1720 No NAT64. Yes

signaling)
UDP/1718
H.323 RAS
For RAS,
UDP/1718-1719
ICMP ICMP No limitations. No

ICMP Error (ICMP traffic directed to
a device interface is
never inspected.)
IP Options RSVP No NAT64. No
NetBIOS Name Server UDP/137, 138 (Source No NAT64. No

over IP ports)
RSH TCP/514 No PAT. Yes

No NAT64.
RTSP TCP/554 No NAT64. Yes

(No handling for HTTP
cloaking.)
SIP TCP/5060 No extended PAT. Yes

UDP/5060 No NAT64 or NAT46.
Skinny (SCCP) TCP/2000 No NAT64, NAT46, or NAT66. Yes
170
Security Policies
Additional Guidelines for NAT
Application Inspected Protocol, Port NAT Limitations Pinholes Created
SQL*Net TCP/1521 No NAT64. Yes

(versions 1, 2)
Sun RPC TCP/111 No NAT64. Yes

UDP/111
TFTP UDP/69 No NAT64. Yes

Payload IP addresses are not translated.
XDMCP UDP/177 No NAT64. Yes

• For interfaces that are members of a bridge group, you write NAT rules for the member interfaces. You
cannot write NAT rules for the Bridge Virtual Interface (BVI) itself.
• (Auto NAT only.) You can only define a single NAT rule for a given object; if you want to configure
multiple NAT rules for an object, you need to create multiple objects with different names that specify
the same IP address.
• If a VPN is defined on an interface, inbound ESP traffic on the interface is not subject to the NAT rules.
The system allows the ESP traffic for established VPN tunnels only, dropping traffic not associated with
an existing tunnel. This restriction applies to ESP and UDP ports 500 and 4500.
• If you define a site-to-site VPN on a device that is behind a device that is applying dynamic PAT, so that
UDP ports 500 and 4500 are not the ones actually used, you must initiate the connection from the device
that is behind the PAT device. The responder cannot initiate the security association (SA) because it does
not know the correct port numbers.
• If you change the NAT configuration, and you do not want to wait for existing translations to time out
before the new NAT configuration is used, you can clear the translation table using the clear xlate
command in the device CLI. However, clearing the translation table disconnects all current connections
that use translations.
If you create a new NAT rule that should apply to an existing connection (such as a VPN tunnel), you
need to use clear conn to end the connection. Then, the attempt to re-establish the connection should hit
the NAT rule and the connection should be NAT'ed correctly.
Note If you remove a dynamic NAT or PAT rule, and then add a new rule with
mapped addresses that overlap the addresses in the removed rule, then the
new rule will not be used until all connections associated with the removed
rule time out or are cleared using the clear xlate or clear conn commands.
This safeguard ensures that the same address is not assigned to multiple
hosts.
• You cannot use an object group with both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses; the object group must include only
one type of address.
171
Security Policies
• (Manual NAT only.) When using any as the source address in a NAT rule, the definition of “any” traffic
(IPv4 vs. IPv6) depends on the rule. Before the FTD device performs NAT on a packet, the packet must
be IPv6-to-IPv6 or IPv4-to-IPv4; with this prerequisite, the FTD device can determine the value of any
in a NAT rule. For example, if you configure a rule from “any” to an IPv6 server, and that server was
mapped from an IPv4 address, then any means “any IPv6 traffic.” If you configure a rule from “any” to
“any,” and you map the source to the interface IPv4 address, then any means “any IPv4 traffic” because
the mapped interface address implies that the destination is also IPv4.
• You can use the same mapped object or group in multiple NAT rules.
• The mapped IP address pool cannot include:
• The mapped interface IP address. If you specify “any” interface for the rule, then all interface IP
addresses are disallowed. For interface PAT (routed mode only), specify the interface name instead
of the interface address.
• The failover interface IP address.
• (Dynamic NAT.) The standby interface IP address when VPN is enabled.
• Avoid using overlapping addresses in static and dynamic NAT policies. For example, with overlapping
addresses, a PPTP connection can fail to get established if the secondary connection for PPTP hits the
static instead of dynamic xlate.
• You cannot use overlapping addresses in the source address of a NAT rule and a remote access VPN
address pool.
• If you specify a destination interface in a rule, then that interface is used as the egress interface rather
than looking up the route in the routing table. However, for identity NAT, you have the option to use a
route lookup instead.
• NAT applies to through traffic only. Traffic generated by the system is not subject to NAT.
• Do not name a network object or group pat-pool, using any combination of upper- or lower-case letters.
• You cannot use NAT on the internal payload of Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) registers.
• (Manual NAT) When writing NAT rules for a dual ISP interface setup (primary and backup interfaces
using service level agreements in the routing configuration), do not specify destination criteria in the
rule. Ensure the rule for the primary interface comes before the rule for the backup interface. This allows
the device to choose the correct NAT destination interface based on the current routing state when the
primary ISP is unavailable. If you specify destination objects, the NAT rule will always select the primary
interface for the otherwise duplicate rules.
• If you get the ASP drop reason nat-no-xlate-to-pat-pool for traffic that should not match the NAT rules
defined for the interface, configure identity NAT rules for the affected traffic so the traffic can pass
untranslated.
• If you configure NAT for GRE tunnel endpoints, you must disable keepalives on the endpoints or the
tunnel cannot be established. The endpoints send keepalives to the original addresses.
172
Security Policies
Configure NAT
Configure NAT
Network address translation can be very complex. We recommend that you keep your rules as simple as
possible to avoid translation problems and difficult troubleshooting situations. Careful planning before you
implement NAT is critical. The following procedure provides the basic approach.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Policies > NAT.

Step 2 Decide what kinds of rules you need.
You can create dynamic NAT, dynamic PAT, static NAT, and identity NAT rules. For an overview, see NAT
Types, on page 162.
Step 3 Decide which rules should be implemented as manual or auto NAT.

For a comparison of these two implementation options, see Auto NAT and Manual NAT, on page 163.
Step 4 Create the rules as explained in the following sections.

• Dynamic NAT, on page 173
• Dynamic PAT, on page 178
• Static NAT, on page 182
• Identity NAT, on page 191
Step 5 Manage the NAT policy and rules.

You can do the following to manage the policy and its rules.
• To edit a rule, click the edit icon ( ) for the rule.
• To delete a rule, click the delete icon ( ) for the rule.
Dynamic NAT
The following topics explain dynamic NAT and how to configure it.
About Dynamic NAT

Dynamic NAT translates a group of real addresses to a pool of mapped addresses that are routable on the
destination network. The mapped pool typically includes fewer addresses than the real group. When a host
you want to translate accesses the destination network, NAT assigns the host an IP address from the mapped
pool. The translation is created only when the real host initiates the connection. The translation is in place
only for the duration of the connection, and a given user does not keep the same IP address after the translation
times out. Users on the destination network, therefore, cannot initiate a reliable connection to a host that uses
dynamic NAT, even if the connection is allowed by an access rule.
173
Security Policies
Dynamic NAT Disadvantages and Advantages
Note For the duration of the translation, a remote host can initiate a connection to the translated host if an
access rule allows it. Because the address is unpredictable, a connection to the host is unlikely.
Nevertheless, in this case you can rely on the security of the access rule.
The following figure shows a typical dynamic NAT scenario. Only real hosts can create a NAT session, and
responding traffic is allowed back.
Figure 7: Dynamic NAT
The following figure shows a remote host attempting to initiate a connection to a mapped address. This address
is not currently in the translation table; therefore, the packet is dropped.
Figure 8: Remote Host Attempts to Initiate a Connection to a Mapped Address
Dynamic NAT Disadvantages and Advantages

Dynamic NAT has these disadvantages:
• If the mapped pool has fewer addresses than the real group, you could run out of addresses if the amount
of traffic is more than expected.
174
Security Policies
Configure Dynamic Auto NAT
Use PAT or a PAT fall-back method if this event occurs often because PAT provides over 64,000
translations using ports of a single address.
• You have to use a large number of routable addresses in the mapped pool, and routable addresses may
not be available in large quantities.
The advantage of dynamic NAT is that some protocols cannot use PAT. PAT does not work with the following:
• IP protocols that do not have a port to overload, such as GRE version 0.
• Some multimedia applications that have a data stream on one port, the control path on another port, and
are not open standard.
Configure Dynamic Auto NAT

Use dynamic auto NAT rules to translate addresses to different IP addresses that are routable on the destination
network.
Before you begin

Select Objects and create the network objects or groups needed in the rule. Alternatively, you can create the
objects while defining the NAT rule. The objects must meet the following requirements:
• Original Address—This must be a network object (not a group), and it can be a host or subnet.
• Translated Address—This can be a network object or group, but it cannot include a subnet. The group
cannot contain both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses; it must contain one type only.
Procedure

(To delete a rule you no longer need, click the trash can icon for the rule.)
Step 3 Configure the basic rule options:

• Title—Enter a name for the rule.
• Create Rule For—Select Auto NAT.
• Type—Select Dynamic.
Step 4 Configure the following packet translation options:

• Source Interface, Destination Interface—(Required for bridge group member interfaces.) The interfaces
where this NAT rule applies. Source is the real interface, the one through which the traffic enters the
device. Destination is the mapped interface, the one through which traffic exits the device. By default,
the rule applies to all interfaces (Any) except for bridge group member interfaces.
• Original Address—The network object that contains the addresses you are translating.
• Translated Address—The network object or group that contains the mapped addresses.
175
Security Policies
Configure Dynamic Manual NAT
Step 5 (Optional.) Click the Advanced Options link and select the desired options:
• Translate DNS replies that match this rule—Whether to translate the IP address in DNS replies. For
DNS replies traversing from a mapped interface to a real interface, the Address (the IPv4 A or IPv6
AAAA) record is rewritten from the mapped value to the real value. Conversely, for DNS replies traversing
from a real interface to a mapped interface, the record is rewritten from the real value to the mapped
value. This option is used in specific circumstances, and is sometimes needed for NAT64/46 translation,
where the rewrite also converts between A and AAAA records. For more information, see Rewriting
DNS Queries and Responses Using NAT, on page 232.
• Fallthrough to Interface PAT (Destination Interface)—Whether to use the IP address of the destination
interface as a backup method when the other mapped addresses are already allocated (interface PAT
fallback). This option is available only if you select a destination interface that is not a member of a
bridge group.
Step 6 Click OK.

Use dynamic manual NAT rules when auto NAT does not meet your needs. For example, if you want to do
different translations based on the destination. Dynamic NAT translates addresses to different IP addresses
that are routable on the destination network.
Before you begin

Select Objects and create the network objects or groups needed in the rule. Groups cannot contain both IPv4
and IPv6 addresses; they must contain one type only. Alternatively, you can create the objects while defining
the NAT rule. The objects must also meet the following requirements:
• Original Source Address—This can be a network object or group, and it can contain a host or subnet.
If you want to translate all original source traffic, you can skip this step and specify Any in the rule.
• Translated Source Address—This can be a network object or group, but it cannot include a subnet.
The group cannot contain both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses; it must contain one type only.
You can also create network objects for the Original Destination Address and Translated Destination
Address if you are configuring a static translation for those addresses in the rule.
For dynamic NAT, you can also perform port translation on the destination. In the Object Manager, ensure
that there are port objects you can use for the Original Destination Port and Translated Destination Port.
If you specify the source port, it will be ignored.
Procedure

176
Security Policies

• Create Rule For—Select Manual NAT.
• Rule Placement—Where you want to add the rule. You can insert it in a category (before or after auto
NAT rules), or above or below the rule you select.
• Type—Select Dynamic. This setting only applies to the source address. If you define a translation for
the destination address, the translation is always static.
Step 4 Configure the following interface options:

Step 5 Identify the original packet addresses, either IPv4 or IPv6; namely, the packet addresses as they appear in the
original packet.
See the following figure for an example of the original packet vs. the translated packet.
• Original Source Address—The network object or group that contains the addresses you are translating.
• Original Destination Address—(Optional.) The network object that contains the addresses of the
destinations. If you leave this blank, the source address translation applies regardless of destination. If
you do specify the destination address, you can configure a static translation for that address or just use
identity NAT for it.
You can select Interface to base the original destination on the source interface (which cannot be Any).
If you select this option, you must also select a translated destination object. To implement a static
interface NAT with port translation for the destination addresses, select this option and also select the
appropriate port objects for the destination ports.
Step 6 Identify the translated packet addresses, either IPv4 or IPv6; namely, the packet addresses as they appear on
the destination interface network. You can translate between IPv4 and IPv6 if desired.
• Translated Source Address—The network object or group that contains the mapped addresses.
• Translated Destination Address—(Optional.) The network object or group that contains the destination
addresses used in the translated packet. If you selected an object for Original Destination Address, you
can set up identity NAT (that is, no translation) by selecting the same object.
Step 7 (Optional.) Identify the destination service ports for service translation: Original Destination Port, Translated
Destination Port.
177
Security Policies
Dynamic PAT
Dynamic NAT does not support port translation, so leave the Original Source Port and Translated Source
Port fields empty. However, because the destination translation is always static, you can perform port translation
for the destination port.
NAT only supports TCP or UDP. When translating a port, be sure the protocols in the real and mapped service
objects are identical (both TCP or both UDP). For identity NAT, you can use the same service object for both
the real and mapped ports.
DNS Queries and Responses Using NAT, on page 232.
bridge group.
Step 9 Click OK.
Dynamic PAT
The following topics describe dynamic PAT.
About Dynamic PAT

Dynamic PAT translates multiple real addresses to a single mapped IP address by translating the real address
and source port to the mapped address and a unique port.
Each connection requires a separate translation session because the source port differs for each connection.
For example, 10.1.1.1:1025 requires a separate translation from 10.1.1.1:1026.
The following figure shows a typical dynamic PAT scenario. Only real hosts can create a NAT session, and
responding traffic is allowed back. The mapped address is the same for each translation, but the port is
dynamically assigned.
Figure 9: Dynamic PAT
178
Security Policies
Dynamic PAT Disadvantages and Advantages
For the duration of the translation, a remote host on the destination network can initiate a connection to the
translated host if an access rule allows it. Because the port address (both real and mapped) is unpredictable,
a connection to the host is unlikely. Nevertheless, in this case you can rely on the security of the access rule.
After the connection expires, the port translation also expires.
Note We recommend that you use different PAT pools for each interface. If you use the same pool for multiple
interfaces, especially if you use it for "any" interface, the pool can be quickly exhausted, with no ports
available for new translations.
Dynamic PAT Disadvantages and Advantages

Dynamic PAT lets you use a single mapped address, thus conserving routable addresses. You can even use
the FTD device interface IP address as the PAT address. However, you cannot use interface PAT for the IPv6
addresses on the interface.
You cannot use dynamic PAT for IPv6 (NAT66) when translating between interfaces in the same bridge
group. This restriction does not apply between a bridge group member and a standard routed interface.
Dynamic PAT does not work with some multimedia applications that have a data stream that is different from
the control path. For more information, see NAT Support for Inspected Protocols, on page 169.
Dynamic PAT might also create a large number of connections appearing to come from a single IP address,
and servers might interpret the traffic as a DoS attack.
Configure Dynamic Auto PAT

Use dynamic auto PAT rules to translate addresses to unique IP address/port combinations, rather than to
multiple IP addresses only. You can translate to a single address, either the destination interface's address or
another address.
Before you begin

• Translated Address—You have the following options to specify the PAT address:
• Destination Interface—To use the destination interface IPv4 address, you do not need a network
object. You cannot use interface PAT for IPv6.
• Single PAT address—Create a network object containing a single host.
Procedure

179
Security Policies
Configure Dynamic Manual PAT

• Type—Select Dynamic.

• Translated Address—One of the following:
• (Interface PAT.) To use the IPv4 address of the destination interface, select Interface. You must
also select a specific destination interface, which cannot be a bridge group member interface. You
cannot use interface PAT for IPv6.
• To use a single address other than the destination interface address, select the host network object
you created for this purpose.
bridge group. You cannot select this option if you already configured interface PAT as the translated
address. You also cannot use this option with IPv6 networks.
Step 6 Click OK.

Use dynamic manual PAT rules when auto PAT does not meet your needs. For example, if you want to do
different translations based on the destination. Dynamic PAT translates addresses to unique IP address/port
combinations, rather than to multiple IP addresses only. You can translate to a single address, either the
destination interface's address or another address.
Before you begin

• Translated Source Address—You have the following options to specify the PAT address:
180
Security Policies
object. You cannot use interface PAT for IPv6.
• Single PAT address—Create a network object containing a single host.
Address if you are configuring a static translation for those addresses in the rule.
For dynamic PAT, you can also perform port translation on the destination. In the Object Manager, ensure
that there are port objects you can use for the Original Destination Port and Translated Destination Port.
If you specify the source port, it will be ignored.
Procedure


• Type—Select Dynamic. This setting only applies to the source address. If you define a translation for
the destination address, the translation is always static.

original packet.
181
Security Policies
Static NAT
• Translated Source Address—One of the following:
• (Interface PAT.) To use the IPv4 address of the destination interface, select Interface. You must
also select a specific destination interface, which cannot be a bridge group member interface. You
cannot use interface PAT for IPv6.
• To use a single address other than the destination interface address, select the host network object
you created for this purpose.
addresses used in the translated packet. If you selected an object for Original Destination, you can set
up identity NAT (that is, no translation) by selecting the same object.
Step 7 (Optional.) Identify the destination service ports for service translation: Original Destination Port, Translated
Destination Port.
Dynamic NAT does not support port translation, so leave the Original Source Port and Translated Source
Port fields empty. However, because the destination translation is always static, you can perform port translation
for the destination port.
bridge group. You cannot select this option if you already configured interface PAT as the translated
address. You also cannot use this option with IPv6 networks.
Step 9 Click OK.
Static NAT
The following topics explain static NAT and how to implement it.
182
Security Policies
About Static NAT
About Static NAT

Static NAT creates a fixed translation of a real address to a mapped address. Because the mapped address is
the same for each consecutive connection, static NAT allows bidirectional connection initiation, both to and
from the host (if an access rule exists that allows it). With dynamic NAT and PAT, on the other hand, each
host uses a different address or port for each subsequent translation, so bidirectional initiation is not supported.
The following figure shows a typical static NAT scenario. The translation is always active so both real and
remote hosts can initiate connections.
Figure 10: Static NAT
Static NAT with Port Translation

Static NAT with port translation lets you specify a real and mapped protocol and port.
When you specify the port with static NAT, you can choose to map the port and/or the IP address to the same
value or to a different value.
The following figure shows a typical static NAT with port translation scenario showing both a port that is
mapped to itself and a port that is mapped to a different value; the IP address is mapped to a different value
in both cases. The translation is always active so both translated and remote hosts can initiate connections.
Figure 11: Typical Static NAT with Port Translation Scenario
Static NAT-with-port-translation rules limit access to the destination IP address for the specified port only.
If you try to access the destination IP address on a different port not covered by a NAT rule, then the connection
is blocked. In addition, for manual NAT, traffic that does not match the source IP address of the NAT rule
will be dropped if it matches the destination IP address, regardless of the destination port. Therefore, you
must add additional rules for all other traffic allowed to the destination IP address. For example, you can
configure a static NAT rule for the IP address, without port specification, and place it after the port translation
rule.
183
Security Policies
One-to-Many Static NAT
Note For applications that require application inspection for secondary channels (for example, FTP and VoIP),
NAT automatically translates the secondary ports.
Following are some other uses of static NAT with port translation.
Static NAT with Identity Port Translation
You can simplify external access to internal resources. For example, if you have three separate servers
that provide services on different ports (such as FTP, HTTP, and SMTP), you can give external users a
single IP address to access those services. You can then configure static NAT with identity port translation
to map the single external IP address to the correct IP addresses of the real servers based on the port they
are trying to access. You do not need to change the port, because the servers are using the standard ones
(21, 80, and 25 respectively).
Static NAT with Port Translation for Non-Standard Ports
You can also use static NAT with port translation to translate a well-known port to a non-standard port
or vice versa. For example, if inside web servers use port 8080, you can allow outside users to connect
to port 80, and then undo translation to the original port 8080. Similarly, to provide extra security, you
can tell web users to connect to non-standard port 6785, and then undo translation to port 80.
Static Interface NAT with Port Translation
You can configure static NAT to map a real address to an interface address/port combination. For example,
if you want to redirect Telnet access for the device's outside interface to an inside host, then you can map
the inside host IP address/port 23 to the outside interface address/port 23.
One-to-Many Static NAT

Typically, you configure static NAT with a one-to-one mapping. However, in some cases, you might want to
configure a single real address to several mapped addresses (one-to-many). When you configure one-to-many
static NAT, when the real host initiates traffic, it always uses the first mapped address. However, for traffic
initiated to the host, you can initiate traffic to any of the mapped addresses, and they will be untranslated to
the single real address.
The following figure shows a typical one-to-many static NAT scenario. Because initiation by the real host
always uses the first mapped address, the translation of real host IP/first mapped IP is technically the only
bidirectional translation.
Figure 12: One-to-Many Static NAT
For example, you have a load balancer at 10.1.2.27. Depending on the URL requested, it redirects traffic to
the correct web server.
184
Security Policies
Other Mapping Scenarios (Not Recommended)
Figure 13: One-to-Many Static NAT Example
Other Mapping Scenarios (Not Recommended)

NAT has the flexibility to allow any kind of static mapping scenario: one-to-one, one-to-many, but also
few-to-many, many-to-few, and many-to-one mappings. We recommend using only one-to-one or one-to-many
mappings. These other mapping options might result in unintended consequences.
Functionally, few-to-many is the same as one-to-many; but because the configuration is more complicated
and the actual mappings may not be obvious at a glance, we recommend creating a one-to-many configuration
for each real address that requires it. For example, for a few-to-many scenario, the few real addresses are
mapped to the many mapped addresses in order (A to 1, B to 2, C to 3). When all real addresses are mapped,
the next mapped address is mapped to the first real address, and so on until all mapped addresses are mapped
(A to 4, B to 5, C to 6). This results in multiple mapped addresses for each real address. Just like a one-to-many
configuration, only the first mappings are bidirectional; subsequent mappings allow traffic to be initiated to
the real host, but all traffic from the real host uses only the first mapped address for the source.
The following figure shows a typical few-to-many static NAT scenario.
185
Security Policies
Configure Static Auto NAT
Figure 14: Few-to-Many Static NAT
For a many-to-few or many-to-one configuration, where you have more real addresses than mapped addresses,
you run out of mapped addresses before you run out of real addresses. Only the mappings between the lowest
real IP addresses and the mapped pool result in bidirectional initiation. The remaining higher real addresses
can initiate traffic, but traffic cannot be initiated to them (returning traffic for a connection is directed to the
correct real address because of the unique 5-tuple (source IP, destination IP, source port, destination port,
protocol) for the connection).
Note Many-to-few or many-to-one NAT is not PAT. If two real hosts use the same source port number and
go to the same outside server and the same TCP destination port, and both hosts are translated to the
same IP address, then both connections will be reset because of an address conflict (the 5-tuple is not
unique).
The following figure shows a typical many-to-few static NAT scenario.

Figure 15: Many-to-Few Static NAT
Instead of using a static rule this way, we suggest that you create a one-to-one rule for the traffic that needs
bidirectional initiation, and then create a dynamic rule for the rest of your addresses.

Use static auto NAT rules to translate addresses to different IP addresses that are routable on the destination
network. You can also do port translation with the static NAT rule.
Before you begin

186
Security Policies
• Translated Address—You have the following options to specify the translated address:
object. This configures static interface NAT with port translation: the source address/port is translated
to the interface's address and the same port number. You cannot use interface PAT for IPv6.
• Address—Create a network object or group containing hosts or subnets. A group cannot contain
both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses; it must contain one type only. Typically, you configure the same
number of mapped addresses as real addresses for a one-to-one mapping. You can, however, have
a mismatched number of addresses.
Procedure


• Type—Select Static.

• Translated Address—One of the following:
• To use a set group of addresses, select the network object or group that contains the mapped addresses.
Typically, you configure the same number of mapped addresses as real addresses for a one-to-one
mapping. You can, however, have a mismatched number of addresses.
• (Static interface NAT with port translation.) To use the address of the destination interface, select
Interface. You must also select a specific destination interface, which cannot be a bridge group
member interface. You cannot use interface PAT for IPv6.This configures static interface NAT with
port translation: the source address/port is translated to the interface's address and the same port
number.
• (Optional.) Original Port, Translated Port—If you need to translate a TCP or UDP port, select the port
objects that define the original and translated ports. The objects must be for the same protocol. Click the
Create New Object link if the objects do not already exist. For example, you can translate TCP/80 to
TCP/8080 if necessary.
187
Security Policies
Configure Static Manual NAT
DNS Queries and Responses Using NAT, on page 232. This option is not available if you are doing port
translation.
• Do not proxy ARP on Destination Interface—Disables proxy ARP for incoming packets to the mapped
IP addresses. If you use addresses on the same network as the mapped interface, the system uses proxy
ARP to answer any ARP requests for the mapped addresses, thus intercepting traffic destined for a
mapped address. This solution simplifies routing because the device does not have to be the gateway for
any additional networks. You can disable proxy ARP if desired, in which case you need to be sure to
have proper routes on the upstream router. Normally for identity NAT, proxy ARP is not required, and
in some cases can cause connectivity issues.
Step 6 Click OK.

Use static manual NAT rules when auto NAT does not meet your needs. For example, if you want to do
different translations based on the destination. Static NAT translates addresses to different IP addresses that
are routable on the destination network. You can also do port translation with the static NAT rule.
Before you begin

• Translated Source Address—You have the following options to specify the translated address:
object. This configures static interface NAT with port translation: the source address/port is translated
to the interface's address and the same port number. You cannot use interface PAT for IPv6.
• Address—Create a network object or group containing hosts or subnets. A group cannot contain
both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses; it must contain one type only. Typically, you configure the same
number of mapped addresses as real addresses for a one-to-one mapping. You can, however, have
a mismatched number of addresses.
Address if you are configuring a static translation for those addresses in the rule. If you want to configure
destination static interface NAT with port translation only, you can skip adding an object for the destination
mapped addresses and specify the interface in the rule.
You can also perform port translation on the source, destination, or both. In the Object Manager, ensure that
there are port objects you can use for the original and translated ports.
188
Security Policies
Procedure


• Type—Select Static. This setting only applies to the source address. If you define a translation for the
destination address, the translation is always static.

original packet.
189
Security Policies
• Translated Source Address—One of the following:
• To use a set group of addresses, select the network object or group that contains the mapped addresses.
Typically, you configure the same number of mapped addresses as real addresses for a one-to-one
mapping. You can, however, have a mismatched number of addresses.
• (Static interface NAT with port translation.) To use the IPv4 address of the destination interface,
select Interface. You must also select a specific destination interface, which cannot be a bridge
group member interface. This configures static interface NAT with port translation: the source
address/port is translated to the interface's address and the same port number. You cannot use
interface PAT for IPv6.
addresses used in the translated packet. If you selected an object for Original Destination, you can set
up identity NAT (that is, no translation) by selecting the same object.
Step 7 (Optional.) Identify the source or destination service ports for service translation.
If you are configuring static NAT with port translation, you can translate ports for the source, destination, or
both. For example, you can translate between TCP/80 and TCP/8080.
• Original Source Port, Translated Source Port—Defines a port translation for the source address.
• Original Destination Port, Translated Destination Port—Defines a port translation for the destination
address.
DNS Queries and Responses Using NAT, on page 232. This option is not available if you are doing port
translation.
Step 9 Click OK.
190
Security Policies
Identity NAT
Identity NAT
You might have a NAT configuration in which you need to translate an IP address to itself. For example, if
you create a broad rule that applies NAT to every network, but want to exclude one network from NAT, you
can create a static NAT rule to translate an address to itself.
The following figure shows a typical identity NAT scenario.
Figure 16: Identity NAT
The following topics explain how to configure identity NAT.
Configure Identity Auto NAT

Use static identity auto NAT rules to prevent the translation of an address. That is, to translate the address to
itself.
Before you begin

• Translated Address—A network object or group with the exact same contents as the original source
object. You can use the same object.
Procedure


• Type—Select Static.
191
Security Policies
Configure Identity Manual NAT
• Translated Address—The same object as the original source. Optionally, you can select a different
object that has the exact same contents.
Do not configure the Original Port and Translated Port options for identity NAT.
• Translate DNS replies that match this rule—Do not configure this option for identity NAT.
• Perform Route Lookup for Destination Interface— If you select source and destination interfaces
when selecting the same object for original and translated source address, you can select this option to
have the system determine the destination interface based on the routing table rather than using the
destination interface configured in the NAT rule.
Step 6 Click OK.

Use static identity manual NAT rules when auto NAT does not meet your needs. For example, if you want
to do different translations based on the destination. Use static identity NAT rules to prevent the translation
of an address. That is, to translate the address to itself.
Before you begin

• Translated Source Address—The same object as the original source. Optionally, you can select a
different object that has the exact same contents.
Address if you are configuring a static translation for those addresses in the rule. If you want to configure
destination static interface NAT with port translation only, you can skip adding an object for the destination
mapped addresses and specify the interface in the rule.
You can also perform port translation on the source, destination, or both. In the Object Manager, ensure that
there are port objects you can use for the original and translated ports. You can use the same object for identity
NAT.
192
Security Policies
Procedure


• Type—Select Static. This setting only applies to the source address. If you define a translation for the
destination address, the translation is always static.

original packet.
See the following figure for an example of the original packet vs. the translated packet where you perform
identity NAT on the inside host but translate the outside host.
193
Security Policies
NAT Rule Properties for FTD
• Translated Source Address—The same object as the original source. Optionally, you can select a
different object that has the exact same contents.
addresses used in the translated packet. If you selected an object for Original Destination Address, you
can set up identity NAT (that is, no translation) by selecting the same object.
Step 7 (Optional.) Identify the source or destination service ports for service translation.
If you are configuring static NAT with port translation, you can translate ports for the source, destination, or
both. For example, you can translate between TCP/80 and TCP/8080.
• Original Source Port, Translated Source Port—Defines a port translation for the source address.
• Original Destination Port, Translated Destination Port—Defines a port translation for the destination
address.
• Translate DNS replies that match this rule—Do not configure this option for identity NAT.
• Perform route lookup for Destination interface— If you select source and destination interfaces when
selecting the same object for original and translated source address, you can select this option to have
the system determine the destination interface based on the routing table rather than using the destination
interface configured in the NAT rule.
Step 9 Click OK.
NAT Rule Properties for FTD

Use Network Address Translation (NAT) rules to translate IP addresses to other IP addresses. You would
typically use NAT rules to convert private addresses to publically routable addresses. The translation can be
from one address to another, or you can use Port Address Translation (PAT) to translate many addresses to
one, using port numbers to distinguish among the source addresses.
NAT rules include the following basic properties. The properties are the same for auto NAT and manual NAT
rules except where indicated.
Title
Enter a name for the rule. The name cannot include spaces.
194
Security Policies
Packet Translation Properties for Auto NAT
Create Rule For

Whether the translation rule is Auto NAT or Manual NAT. Auto NAT is simpler than manual NAT,
but manual NAT allows you to create separate translations for a source address based on the destination
address.
Status
Whether you want the rule to be active or disabled.
Placement (Manual NAT only.)
Where you want to add the rule. You can insert it in a category (before or after auto NAT rules), or above
or below the rule you select.
Type
Whether the translation rule is Dynamic or Static. Dynamic translation automatically chooses the mapped
address from a pool of addresses, or an address/port combination when implementing PAT. Use static
translation if you want to precisely define the mapped address/port.
The following topics describe the remaining NAT rules properties.
Packet Translation Properties for Auto NAT

Use the Packet Translation options to define the source addresses and the mapped translated addresses. The
following properties apply to auto NAT only.
Source Interface, Destination Interface
(Required for bridge group member interfaces.) The interfaces where this NAT rule applies. Source is
the real interface, the one through which the traffic enters the device. Destination is the mapped interface,
the one through which traffic exits the device. By default, the rule applies to all interfaces (Any) except
for bridge group member interfaces.
Original Address (Always required.)
The network object that contains the source addresses you are translating. This must be a network object
(not a group), and it can be a host or subnet.
Translated Address (Usually required.)
The mapped addresses, the ones to which you are translating. What you select here depends on the type
of translation rule you are defining.
• Dynamic NAT—The network object or group that contains the mapped addresses. This can be a
network object or group, but it cannot include a subnet. The group cannot contain both IPv4 and
IPv6 addresses; it must contain one type only.
• Dynamic PAT—One of the following:
• (Interface PAT.) To use the IPv4 address of the destination interface, select Interface. You
must also select a specific destination interface, which cannot be a bridge group member
interface. You cannot use interface PAT for IPv6.
• To use a single address other than the destination interface address, select the host network
object you created for this purpose.
• Static NAT—One of the following:
195
Security Policies
Packet Translation Properties for Manual NAT
• To use a set group of addresses, select the network object or group that contains the mapped
addresses. The object or group can contain hosts or subnets. Typically, you configure the same
number of mapped addresses as real addresses for a one-to-one mapping. You can, however,
have a mismatched number of addresses.
• (Static interface NAT with port translation.) To use the address of the destination interface,
• Identity NAT—The same object as the original source. Optionally, you can select a different object
that has the exact same contents.
Original Port, Translated Port (Static NAT only.)

If you need to translate a TCP or UDP port, select the port objects that define the original and translated
ports. The objects must be for the same protocol. For example, you can translate TCP/80 to TCP/8080
if necessary.
Packet Translation Properties for Manual NAT

Use the Packet Translation options to define the source addresses and the mapped translated addresses. The
following properties apply to manual NAT only. All are optional except as indicated.
Source Interface, Destination Interface
(Required for bridge group member interfaces.) The interfaces where this NAT rule applies. Source is
the real interface, the one through which the traffic enters the device. Destination is the mapped interface,
the one through which traffic exits the device. By default, the rule applies to all interfaces (Any) except
for bridge group member interfaces.
Original Source Address (Always required.)
The network object or group that contains the addresses you are translating. This can be a network object
or group, and it can contain a host or subnet. If you want to translate all original source traffic, you can
specify Any in the rule.
Translated Source Address (Usually required.)
The mapped addresses, the ones to which you are translating. What you select here depends on the type
of translation rule you are defining.
• Dynamic NAT—The network object or group that contains the mapped addresses. This can be a
network object or group, but it cannot include a subnet. The group cannot contain both IPv4 and
IPv6 addresses; it must contain one type only.
• Dynamic PAT—One of the following:
• (Interface PAT.) To use the address of the destination interface, select Interface. You must
also select a specific destination interface, which cannot be a bridge group member interface.
You cannot use interface PAT for IPv6.
• To use a single address other than the destination interface address, select the host network
object you created for this purpose.
• Static NAT—One of the following:
196
Security Policies
Advanced NAT Properties
• To use a set group of addresses, select the network object or group that contains the mapped
addresses. The object or group can contain hosts or subnets. Typically, you configure the same
number of mapped addresses as real addresses for a one-to-one mapping. You can, however,
have a mismatched number of addresses.
• (Static interface NAT with port translation.) To use the address of the destination interface,
• Identity NAT—The same object as the original source. Optionally, you can select a different object
that has the exact same contents.
Original Destination Address

The network object that contains the addresses of the destinations. If you leave this blank, the source
address translation applies regardless of destination. If you do specify the destination address, you can
configure a static translation for that address or just use identity NAT for it.
Translated Destination Address
The network object or group that contains the destination addresses used in the translated packet. If you
selected an object for Original Destination, you can set up identity NAT (that is, no translation) by
selecting the same object.
Original Source Port, Translated Source Port, Original Destination Port, Translated Destination Port
The port objects that define the source and destination services for the original and translated packets.
You can translate the ports, or select the same object to make the rule sensitive to the service without
translating the ports. Keep the following rules in mind when configuring services:
• (Dynamic NAT or PAT.) You cannot do translation on the Original Source Port and Translated
Source Port. You can do translation on the destination port only.
• NAT only supports TCP or UDP. When translating a port, be sure the protocols in the real and
mapped service objects are identical (both TCP or both UDP). For identity NAT, you can use the
same object for both the real and mapped ports.
Advanced NAT Properties

When you configure NAT, you can configure properties that provide specialized services in the Advanced
options. All of these properties are optional: configure them only if you need the service.
Translate DNS replies that match this rule
Whether to translate the IP address in DNS replies. For DNS replies traversing from a mapped interface
to a real interface, the Address (the IPv4 A or IPv6 AAAA) record is rewritten from the mapped value
to the real value. Conversely, for DNS replies traversing from a real interface to a mapped interface, the
record is rewritten from the real value to the mapped value. This option is used in specific circumstances,
and is sometimes needed for NAT64/46 translation, where the rewrite also converts between A and
197
Security Policies
Translating IPv6 Networks
AAAA records. For more information, see Rewriting DNS Queries and Responses Using NAT, on page
232. This option is not available if you are doing port translation in a static NAT rule.
Fallthrough to Interface PAT (Destination Interface) (Dynamic NAT only.)
Whether to use the IP address of the destination interface as a backup method when the other mapped
addresses are already allocated (interface PAT fallback). This option is available only if you select a
destination interface that is not a member of a bridge group. You cannot select this option if you already
configured interface PAT as the translated address. You cannot use this option with IPv6 networks.
Do not proxy ARP on Destination Interface (Static NAT only.)
Disables proxy ARP for incoming packets to the mapped IP addresses. If you use addresses on the same
network as the mapped interface, the system uses proxy ARP to answer any ARP requests for the mapped
addresses, thus intercepting traffic destined for a mapped address. This solution simplifies routing because
the device does not have to be the gateway for any additional networks. You can disable proxy ARP if
desired, in which case you need to be sure to have proper routes on the upstream router. Normally for
identity NAT, proxy ARP is not required, and in some cases can cause connectivity issues.
Perform Route Lookup for Destination Interface (Static Identity NAT only. Routed mode only.)
If you select source and destination interfaces when selecting the same object for original and translated
source address, you can select this option to have the system determine the destination interface based
on the routing table rather than using the destination interface configured in the NAT rule.
Translating IPv6 Networks

In cases where you need to pass traffic between IPv6-only and IPv4-only networks, you need to use NAT to
convert between the address types. Even with two IPv6 networks, you might want to hide internal addresses
from the outside network.
You can use the following translation types with IPv6 networks:
• NAT64, NAT46—Translates IPv6 packets into IPv4 and vice versa. You need to define two policies,
one for the IPv6 to IPv4 translation, and one for the IPv4 to IPv6 translation. Although you can accomplish
this with a single manual NAT rule, if the DNS server is on the external network, you probably need to
rewrite the DNS response. Because you cannot enable DNS rewrite on a manual NAT rule when you
specify a destination, creating two auto NAT rules is the better solution.
Note NAT46 supports static mappings only.
• NAT66—Translates IPv6 packets to a different IPv6 address. We recommend using static NAT. Although
you can use dynamic NAT or PAT, IPv6 addresses are in such large supply, you do not have to use
dynamic NAT.
Note NAT64 and NAT 46 are possible on standard routed interfaces only. NAT66 is possible on both routed
and bridge group member interfaces.
198
Security Policies
NAT64/46: Translating IPv6 Addresses to IPv4
NAT64/46: Translating IPv6 Addresses to IPv4

When traffic goes from an IPv6 network to an IPv4-only network, you need to convert the IPv6 address to
IPv4, and return traffic from IPv4 to IPv6. You need to define two address pools, an IPv4 address pool to
bind IPv6 addresses in the IPv4 network, and an IPv6 address pool to bind IPv4 addresses in the IPv6 network.
• The IPv4 address pool for the NAT64 rule is normally small and typically might not have enough addresses
to map one-to-one with the IPv6 client addresses. Dynamic PAT might more easily meet the possible
large number of IPv6 client addresses compared to dynamic or static NAT.
• The IPv6 address pool for the NAT46 rule can be equal to or larger than the number of IPv4 addresses
to be mapped. This allows each IPv4 address to be mapped to a different IPv6 address. NAT46 supports
static mappings only, so you cannot use dynamic PAT.
You need to define two policies, one for the source IPv6 network, and one for the destination IPv4 network.
Although you can accomplish this with a single manual NAT rule, if the DNS server is on the external network,
you probably need to rewrite the DNS response. Because you cannot enable DNS rewrite on a manual NAT
rule when you specify a destination, creating two auto NAT rules is the better solution.
NAT64/46 Example: Inside IPv6 Network with Outside IPv4 Internet

Following is a straight-forward example where you have an inside IPv6-only network, and you want to convert
to IPv4 for traffic sent to the Internet. This example assumes you do not need DNS translation, so you can
perform both the NAT64 and NAT46 translations in a single manual NAT rule.
In this example, you translate the inside IPv6 network to IPv4 using dynamic interface PAT with the IP address
of the outside interface. Outside IPv4 traffic is statically translated to addresses on the 2001:db8::/96 network,
allowing transmission on the inside network.
Procedure
Step 1 Create a network object for the inside IPv6 network.

a) Choose Objects.
b) Select Network from the table of contents and click +.
c) Define the inside IPv6 network.
199
Security Policies
NAT64/46 Example: Inside IPv6 Network with Outside IPv4 Internet
Name the network object (for example, inside_v6), select Network, and enter the network address,
2001:db8::/96.
d) Click OK.
Step 2 Create the manual NAT rule to translate the IPv6 network to IPv4 and back again.
a) Select Policies > NAT.
b) Click the + button.
c) Configure the following properties:
• Title = PAT64Rule (or another name of your choosing).
• Create Rule For = Manual NAT.
• Placement = Before Auto NAT Rules
• Type = Dynamic.
• Source Interface = inside.
• Destination Interface = outside.
• Original Packet Source Address = inside_v6 network object.
• Translated Packet Source Address = Interface. This option uses the IPv4 address of the destination
interface as the PAT address.
• Original Packet Destination Address = inside_v6 network object.
• Translated Packet Destination Address = any-ipv4 network object.
200
Security Policies
NAT64/46 Example: Inside IPv6 Network with Outside IPv4 Internet and DNS Translation
d) Click OK.
With this rule, any traffic from the 2001:db8::/96 subnet on the inside interface going to the outside
interface gets a NAT64 PAT translation using the IPv4 address of the outside interface. Conversely, any
IPv4 address on the outside network coming to the inside interface is translated to an address on the
2001:db8::/96 network using the embedded IPv4 address method.
Following is a typical example where you have an inside IPv6-only network, but there are some IPv4-only
services on the outside Internet that internal users need.
201
Security Policies
In this example, you translate the inside IPv6 network to IPv4 using dynamic interface PAT with the IP address
of the outside interface. Outside IPv4 traffic is statically translated to addresses on the 2001:db8::/96 network,
allowing transmission on the inside network. You enable DNS rewrite on the NAT46 rule, so that replies from
the external DNS server can be converted from A (IPv4) to AAAA (IPv6) records, and the addresses converted
from IPv4 to IPv6.
Following is a typical sequence for a web request where a client at 2001:DB8::100 on the internal IPv6 network
tries to open www.example.com.
1. The client’s computer sends a DNS request to the DNS server at 2001:DB8::D1A5:CA81. The NAT rules
make the following translations to the source and destination in the DNS request:
• 2001:DB8::100 to a unique port on 209.165.201.1 (The NAT64 interface PAT rule.)
• 2001:DB8::D1A5:CA81 to 209.165.202.129 (The NAT46 rule. D1A5:CA81 is the IPv6 equivalent
of 209.165.202.129.)
2. The DNS server responds with an A record indicating that www.example.com is at 209.165.200.225. The
NAT46 rule, with DNS rewrite enabled, converts the A record to the IPv6-equivalent AAAA record, and
translates 209.165.200.225 to 2001:db8:D1A5:C8E1in the AAAA record. In addition, the source and
destination addresses in the DNS response are untranslated:
• 209.165.202.129 to 2001:DB8::D1A5:CA81
• 209.165.201.1 to 2001:db8::100
3. The IPv6 client now has the IP address of the web server, and makes an HTTP request to www.example.com
at 2001:db8:D1A5:C8E1. (D1A5:C8E1 is the IPv6 equivalent of 209.165.200.225.) The source and
destination of the HTTP request are translated:
• 2001:DB8::100 to a unique port on 209.156.101.54 (The NAT64 interface PAT rule.)
• 2001:db8:D1A5:C8E1 to 209.165.200.225 (The NAT46 rule.)
202
Security Policies
The following procedure explains how to configure this example.
Procedure
Step 1 Create the network objects that define the inside IPv6 and outside IPv4 networks.
a) Choose Objects.
2001:db8::/96.
d) Click OK.
e) Click + and define the outside IPv4 network.
Name the network object (for example, outside_v4_any), select Network, and enter the network address
0.0.0.0/0.
203
Security Policies
Step 2 Configure the NAT64 dynamic PAT rule for the inside IPv6 network.
• Create Rule For = Auto NAT.
• Type = Dynamic.
• Original Address = inside_v6 network object.
• Translated Address = Interface. This option uses the IPv4 address of the destination interface as
the PAT address.
204
Security Policies
d) Click OK.
With this rule, any traffic from the 2001:db8::/96 subnet on the inside interface going to the outside
interface gets a NAT64 PAT translation using the IPv4 address of the outside interface.
Step 3 Configure the static NAT46 rule for the outside IPv4 network.
a) Click the + button.
b) Configure the following properties:
• Title = NAT46Rule (or another name of your choosing).
• Type = Static.
• Source Interface = outside.
• Destination Interface = inside.
• Original Address = outside_v4_any network object.
• Translated Address = inside_v6 network object.
• On the Advanced Options tab, select Translate DNS replies that match this rule.
205
Security Policies
NAT66: Translating IPv6 Addresses to Different IPv6 Addresses
c) Click OK.
With this rule, any IPv4 address on the outside network coming to the inside interface is translated to an
address on the 2001:db8::/96 network using the embedded IPv4 address method. In addition, DNS responses
are converted from A (IPv4) to AAAA (IPv6) records, and the addresses converted from IPv4 to IPv6.
NAT66: Translating IPv6 Addresses to Different IPv6 Addresses

When going from an IPv6 network to another IPv6 network, you can translate the addresses to different IPv6
addresses on the outside network. We recommend using static NAT. Although you can use dynamic NAT or
PAT, IPv6 addresses are in such large supply, you do not have to use dynamic NAT.
Because you are not translating between different address types, you need a single rule for NAT66 translations.
You can easily model these rules using auto NAT. However, if you do not want to allow returning traffic,
you can make the static NAT rule unidirectional using manual NAT only.
NAT66 Example, Static Translation between Networks

You can configure a static translation between IPv6 address pools using auto NAT. The following example
explains how to convert inside addresses on the 2001:db8:122:2091::/96 network to outside addresses on the
2001:db8:122:2999::/96 network.
206
Security Policies
Note This example assumes that the inside interface is not a bridge group interface (BVI) but a standard routed
interface. If the inside interface is a BVI, you need to duplicate the rules for each member interface.
Procedure
Step 1 Create the network objects that define the inside IPv6 and outside IPv6 NAT networks.
a) Choose Objects.
2001:db8:122:2091::/96.
207
Security Policies
d) Click OK.
e) Click + and define the outside IPv6 NAT network.
Name the network object (for example, outside_nat_v6), select Network, and enter the network address
2001:db8:122:2999::/96.
Step 2 Configure the static NAT rule for the inside IPv6 network.
• Title = NAT66Rule (or another name of your choosing).
208
Security Policies
NAT66 Example, Simple IPv6 Interface PAT
• Type = Static.
• Translated Address = outside_nat_v6 network object.
d) Click OK.
With this rule, any traffic from the 2001:db8:122:2091::/96 subnet on the inside interface going to the
outside interface gets a static NAT66 translation to an address on the 2001:db8:122:2999::/96 network.

A simple approach for implementing NAT66 is to dynamically assign internal addresses to different ports on
the outside interface IPv6 address.
However, you cannot configure interface PAT using the IPv6 address of an interface using the FDM. Instead,
use a single free address on the same network as a dynamic PAT pool.
209
Security Policies
Procedure
Step 1 Create the network objects that define the inside IPv6 network and the IPv6 PAT address.
a) Choose Objects.
2001:db8:122:2091::/96.
210
Security Policies
d) Click OK.
e) Click + and define the outside IPv6 PAT address.
Name the network object (for example, ipv6_pat), select Host, and enter the host address
2001:db8:122:201b::2.
Step 2 Configure the dynamic PAT rule for the inside IPv6 network.
211
Security Policies
Monitoring NAT
• Type = Dynamic.
• Translated Address = ipv6_pat network object.
d) Click OK.
With this rule, any traffic from the 2001:db8:122:2091::/96 subnet on the inside interface going to the
outside interface gets a dynamic PAT66 translation to a port on 2001:db8:122:201b::2.
Monitoring NAT
To monitor and troubleshoot NAT connections, log into the device CLI and use the following commands.
• show nat displays the NAT rules and per-rule hit counts. There are additional keywords to show other
aspects of NAT.
• show xlate displays the actual NAT translations that are currently active.
• clear xlate lets you remove an active NAT translation. You might need to remove active translations if
you alter NAT rules, because existing connections continue to use the old translation slot until the
212
Security Policies
Examples for NAT
connection ends. Clearing a translation allows the system to build a new translation for a client on the
client's next connection attempt based on your new rules.
Examples for NAT

The following topics provide examples for configuring NAT on Threat Defense devices.
Providing Access to an Inside Web Server (Static Auto NAT)

The following example performs static NAT for an inside web server. The real address is on a private network,
so a public address is required. Static NAT is necessary so hosts can initiate traffic to the web server at a fixed
address.
interface. If the inside interface is a BVI, select the specific bridge group member interface to which the
web server is attached, for example, inside1_3.
Figure 17: Static NAT for an Inside Web Server
Procedure
Step 1 Create the network objects that define the server’s private and public host addresses.
a) Choose Objects.
213
Security Policies
Providing Access to an Inside Web Server (Static Auto NAT)
c) Define the web server’s private address.

Name the network object (for example, WebServerPrivate), select Host, and enter the real host IP address,
10.1.2.27.
d) Click OK.
e) Click + and define the public address.
Name the network object (for example, WebServerPublic), select Host, and enter the host address
209.165.201.10.
f) Click OK.
Step 2 Configure static NAT for the object.
214
Security Policies
Single Address for FTP, HTTP, and SMTP (Static Auto NAT-with-Port-Translation)

• Title = WebServer (or another name of your choosing).
• Type = Static.
• Original Address = WebServerPrivate network object.
• Translated Address = WebServerPublic network object.
d) Click OK.
Single Address for FTP, HTTP, and SMTP (Static Auto

NAT-with-Port-Translation)
The following static NAT-with-port-translation example provides a single address for remote users to access
FTP, HTTP, and SMTP. These servers are actually different devices on the real network, but for each server,
you can specify static NAT-with-port-translation rules that use the same mapped IP address, but different
ports.
215
Security Policies
Note This example assumes that the inside interface is a standard routed interface attached to a switch, with
the servers attached to the switch. If your inside interface is a bridge group interface (BVI), and the
servers are attached to separate bridge group member interfaces, select the specific member interface
to which each server is attached for the corresponding rule. For example, the rules might have inside1_2,
inside1_3, and inside1_4 for the source interface rather than inside.
Figure 18: Static NAT-with-Port-Translation
Procedure
Step 1 Create a network object for the FTP server.

a) Choose Objects.
c) Name the network object (for example, FTPserver), select Host, and enter the real IP address for the FTP
server, 10.1.2.27.
216
Security Policies
d) Click OK.
Step 2 Create a network object for the HTTP server.
a) Click +.
b) Name the network object (for example, HTTPserver), select Host, and enter the host address 10.1.2.28.
c) Click OK.
Step 3 Create a network object for the SMTP server.
a) Click +.
b) Name the network object (for example, SMTPserver), select Host, and enter the host address 10.1.2.29.
217
Security Policies
c) Click OK.
Step 4 Create a network object for the public IP address used for the three servers.
a) Click +.
b) Name the network object (for example, ServerPublicIP), select Host, and enter the host address
209.165.201.3.
c) Click OK.
Step 5 Configure static NAT with port translation for the FTP server, mapping the FTP port to itself.
218
Security Policies
• Title = FTPServer (or another name of your choosing).

• Type = Static.
• Original Address = FTPserver network object.
• Translated Address = ServerPublicIP network object.
• Original Port = FTP port object.
• Translated Port = FTP port object.
d) Click OK.
Step 6 Configure static NAT with port translation for the HTTP server, mapping the HTTP port to itself.
• Title = HTTPServer (or another name of your choosing).
• Type = Static.
219
Security Policies
• Original Address = HTTPserver network object.

• Original Port = HTTP port object.
• Translated Port = HTTP port object.
c) Click OK.
Step 7 Configure static NAT with port translation for the SMTP server, mapping the SMTP port to itself.
• Title = SMTPServer (or another name of your choosing).
• Type = Static.
• Original Address = SMTPserver network object.
• Original Port = SMTP port object.
• Translated Port = SMTP port object.
220
Security Policies
Different Translation Depending on the Destination (Dynamic Manual PAT)
c) Click OK.

The following figure shows a host on the 10.1.2.0/24 network accessing two different servers. When the host
accesses the server at 209.165.201.11, the real address is translated to 209.165.202.129:port. When the host
accesses the server at 209.165.200.225, the real address is translated to 209.165.202.130:port.
the servers attached to the switch. If your inside interface is a bridge group interface (BVI), and the
servers are attached to separate bridge group member interfaces, select the specific member interface
to which each server is attached for the corresponding rule. For example, the rules might have inside1_2
and inside1_3 for the source interface rather than inside.
221
Security Policies
Figure 19: Manual NAT with Different Destination Addresses
Procedure
Step 1 Create a network object for the inside network.

a) Choose Objects.
c) Name the network object (for example, myInsideNetwork), select Network, and enter the real network
address, 10.1.2.0/24.
222
Security Policies
d) Click OK.
Step 2 Create a network object for the DMZ network 1.
a) Click +.
b) Name the network object (for example, DMZnetwork1), select Network, and enter the network address
209.165.201.0/27 (subnet mask of 255.255.255.224).
c) Click OK.
Step 3 Create a network object for the PAT address for DMZ network 1.
a) Click +.
b) Name the network object (for example, PATaddress1), select Host, and enter the host address
209.165.202.129.
c) Click OK.
223
Security Policies
Step 4 Create a network object for the DMZ network 2.

a) Click +.
b) Name the network object (for example, DMZnetwork2), select Network, and enter the network address
209.165.200.224/27 (subnet mask of 255.255.255.224).
c) Click OK.
Step 5 Create a network object for the PAT address for DMZ network 2.
a) Click +.
209.165.202.130.
224
Security Policies
c) Click OK.
Step 6 Configure dynamic manual PAT for DMZ network 1.
• Title = DMZNetwork1 (or another name of your choosing).
• Type = Dynamic.
• Destination Interface = dmz.
• Original Source Address = myInsideNetwork network object.
• Translated Source Address = PATaddress1 network object.
• Original Destination Address = DMZnetwork1 network object.
• Translated Destination Address = DMZnetwork1 network object.
Note Because you do not want to translate the destination address, you need to configure identity
NAT for it by specifying the same address for the original and translated destination
addresses. Leave all of the port fields blank.
225
Security Policies
d) Click OK.
Step 7 Configure dynamic manual PAT for DMZ network 2.
• Title = DMZNetwork2 (or another name of your choosing).
• Type = Dynamic.
• Original Destination Address = DMZnetwork2 network object.
• Translated Destination Address = DMZnetwork2 network object.
226
Security Policies
Different Translation Depending on the Destination Address and Port (Dynamic Manual PAT)
c) Click OK.
Different Translation Depending on the Destination Address and Port (Dynamic

Manual PAT)
The following figure shows the use of source and destination ports. The host on the 10.1.2.0/24 network
accesses a single host for both web services and Telnet services. When the host accesses the server for Telnet
services, the real address is translated to 209.165.202.129:port. When the host accesses the same server for
web services, the real address is translated to 209.165.202.130:port.
the server attached to the switch. If your inside interface is a bridge group interface (BVI), and the server
is attached to a bridge group member interface, select the specific member interface to which the server
is attached. For example, the rule might have inside1_2 for the source interface rather than inside.
227
Security Policies
Figure 20: Manual NAT with Different Destination Ports
Procedure
Step 1 Create a network object for the inside network.

a) Choose Objects.
c) Name the network object (for example, myInsideNetwork), select Network, and enter the real network
address, 10.1.2.0/24.
228
Security Policies
d) Click OK.
Step 2 Create a network object for the Telnet/Web server.
a) Click +.
b) Name the network object (for example, TelnetWebServer), select Host, and enter the host address
209.165.201.11.
c) Click OK.
Step 3 Create a network object for the PAT address when using Telnet.
a) Click +.
209.165.202.129.
c) Click OK.
229
Security Policies
Step 4 Create a network object for the PAT address when using HTTP.
a) Click +.
209.165.202.130.
c) Click OK.
Step 5 Configure dynamic manual PAT for Telnet access.
• Title = TelnetServer (or another name of your choosing).
• Type = Dynamic.
• Translated Source Address= PATaddress1 network object.
• Original Destination Address = TelnetWebServer network object.
• Translated Destination Address = TelnetWebServer network object.
• Original Destination Port = TELNET port object.
• Translated Destination Port = TELNET port object.
Note Because you do not want to translate the destination address or port, you need to configure
identity NAT for them by specifying the same address for the original and translated
destination addresses, and the same port for the original and translated port.
230
Security Policies
d) Click OK.
Step 6 Configure dynamic manual PAT for web access.
• Title = WebServer (or another name of your choosing).
• Type = Dynamic.
• Original Destination Address = TelnetWebServer network object.
• Translated Destination Address = TelnetWebServer network object.
• Original Destination Port = HTTP port object.
• Translated Destination Port = HTTP port object.
231
Security Policies
Rewriting DNS Queries and Responses Using NAT
c) Click OK.
Rewriting DNS Queries and Responses Using NAT

You might need to configure the FTD device to modify DNS replies by replacing the address in the reply
with an address that matches the NAT configuration. You can configure DNS modification when you configure
each translation rule. DNS modification is also known as DNS doctoring.
This feature rewrites the address in DNS queries and replies that match a NAT rule (for example, the A record
for IPv4, the AAAA record for IPv6, or the PTR record for reverse DNS queries). For DNS replies traversing
from a mapped interface to any other interface, the record is rewritten from the mapped value to the real value.
Inversely, for DNS replies traversing from any interface to a mapped interface, the record is rewritten from
the real value to the mapped value. This feature works with NAT44,NAT 66, NAT46, and NAT64.
Following are the main circumstances when you would need to configure DNS rewrite on a NAT rule.
• The rule is NAT64 or NAT46, and the DNS server is on the outside network. You need DNS rewrite to
convert between DNS A records (for IPv4) and AAAA records (for IPv6).
• The DNS server is on the outside, clients are on the inside, and some of the fully-qualified domain names
that the clients use resolve to other inside hosts.
• The DNS server is on the inside and responds with private IP addresses, clients are on the outside, and
the clients access fully-qualified domain names that point to servers that are hosted on the inside.
232
Security Policies
DNS 64 Reply Modification
DNS Rewrite Limitations

Following are some limitations with DNS rewrite:
• DNS rewrite is not applicable for PAT because multiple PAT rules are applicable for each A or AAAA
record, and the PAT rule to use is ambiguous.
• If you configure a manual NAT rule, you cannot configure DNS modification if you specify the destination
address as well as the source address. These kinds of rules can potentially have a different translation
for a single address when going to A vs. B. Therefore, the can not accurately match the IP address inside
the DNS reply to the correct twice NAT rule; the DNS reply does not contain information about which
source/destination address combination was in the packet that prompted the DNS request.
• DNS rewrite is actually done on the xlate entry, not the NAT rule. Thus, if there is no xlate for a dynamic
rule, rewrite cannot be done correctly. The same problem does not occur for static NAT.
• DNS rewrite does not rewrite DNS Dynamic Update messages (opcode 5).
The following topics provide examples of DNS rewrite in NAT rules.

The following figure shows an FTP server and DNS server on the outside IPv4 network. The system has a
static translation for the outside server. In this case, when an inside IPv6 user requests the address for
ftp.cisco.com from the DNS server, the DNS server responds with the real address, 209.165.200.225.
Because you want inside users to use the mapped address for ftp.cisco.com (2001:DB8::D1A5:C8E1, where
D1A5:C8E1 is the IPv6 equivalent of 209.165.200.225) you need to configure DNS reply modification for
the static translation. This example also includes a static NAT translation for the DNS server, and a PAT rule
for the inside IPv6 hosts.
233
Security Policies
Procedure
Step 1 Create the network objects for the FTP server, DNS server, inside network, and PAT pool.
a) Choose Objects.
c) Define the real FTP server address.
Name the network object (for example, ftp_server), select Host, and enter the real host IP address,
209.165.200.225.
234
Security Policies
d) Click OK.
e) Click + and define the DNS server's real address.
Name the network object (for example, dns_server), select Host, and enter the host address 209.165.201.15.
f) Click OK.
g) Click + and define the inside IPv6 network.
2001:DB8::/96.
235
Security Policies
h) Click OK.
i) Click + and define the IPv4 PAT address for the inside IPv6 network.
Name the network object (for example, ipv4_pat), select Host, and enter the host address, 209.165.200.230.
j) Click OK.
Step 2 Configure the static NAT rule with DNS modification for the FTP server.
236
Security Policies
• Type = Static.
• Original Address = ftp_server network object.
• Translated Address = inside_v6 network object. Because the IPv4 embedded address method is
used when converting IPv4 to IPv6 addresses, 209.165.200.225 is converted to the IPv6 equivalent
D1A5:C8E1 and the network prefix is added to get the full address, 2001:DB8::D1A5:C8E1.
d) Click OK.
Step 3 Configure the static NAT rule for the DNS server.
• Title = DNSServer (or another name of your choosing).
• Type = Static.
237
Security Policies
• Original Address = dns_server network object.

• Translated Address = inside_v6 network object. Because the IPv4 embedded address method is
used when converting IPv4 to IPv6 addresses, 209.165.201.15 is converted to the IPv6 equivalent
D1A5:C90F and the network prefix is added to get the full address, 2001:DB8::D1A5:C90F.
d) Click OK.
Step 4 Configure the dynamic PAT rule for the inside IPv6 network.
• Type = Dynamic.
• Translated Address = ipv4_pat network object.
238
Security Policies
DNS Reply Modification, DNS Server on Outside
d) Click OK.

The following figure shows a DNS server that is accessible from the outside interface. A server, ftp.cisco.com,
is on the inside interface. You configure NAT to statically translate the ftp.cisco.com real address (10.1.3.14)
to a mapped address (209.165.201.10) that is visible on the outside network.
In this case, you want to enable DNS reply modification on this static rule so that inside users who have access
to ftp.cisco.com using the real address receive the real address from the DNS server, and not the mapped
address.
When an inside host sends a DNS request for the address of ftp.cisco.com, the DNS server replies with the
mapped address (209.165.201.10). The system refers to the static rule for the inside server and translates the
address inside the DNS reply to 10.1.3.14. If you do not enable DNS reply modification, then the inside host
attempts to send traffic to 209.165.201.10 instead of accessing ftp.cisco.com directly.
239
Security Policies
Procedure
Step 1 Create the network objects for the FTP server.

a) Choose Objects.
Name the network object (for example, ftp_server), select Host, and enter the real host IP address, 10.1.3.14.
240
Security Policies
d) Click OK.
e) Click + and define the FTP server's translated address.
Name the network object (for example, ftp_server_outside), select Host, and enter the host address
209.165.201.10.
241
Security Policies
DNS Reply Modification, DNS Server on Host Network
• Type = Static.
• Translated Address = ftp_server_outside network object.
d) Click OK.

The following figure shows an FTP server and DNS server on the outside. The system has a static translation
for the outside server. In this case, when an inside user requests the address for ftp.cisco.com from the DNS
server, the DNS server responds with the real address, 209.165.20.10. Because you want inside users to use
the mapped address for ftp.cisco.com (10.1.2.56) you need to configure DNS reply modification for the static
translation.
242
Security Policies
Procedure
Step 1 Create the network objects for the FTP server.

a) Choose Objects.
Name the network object (for example, ftp_server), select Host, and enter the real host IP address,
209.165.201.10.
243
Security Policies
d) Click OK.
e) Click + and define the FTP server's translated address.
Name the network object (for example, ftp_server_translated), select Host, and enter the host address
10.1.2.56.
244
Security Policies
• Type = Static.
• Translated Address = ftp_server_translated network object.
d) Click OK.
245
Security Policies
246
PA R T III
Virtual Private Networks (VPN)
• Site-to-Site VPN, on page 249
CHAPTER 11
Site-to-Site VPN
A virtual private network (VPN) is a network connection that establishes a secure tunnel between remote
peers using a public source, such as the Internet or other network. VPNs use tunnels to encapsulate data packets
within normal IP packets for forwarding over IP-based networks. They use encryption to ensure privacy and
authentication to ensure the integrity of data.
• VPN Basics, on page 249
• Managing Site-to-Site VPNs, on page 253
• Monitoring Site-to-Site VPN, on page 266
• Examples for Site-to-Site VPN, on page 266
VPN Basics
Tunneling makes it possible to use a public TCP/IP network, such as the Internet, to create secure connections
between remote users and private corporate networks. Each secure connection is called a tunnel.
IPsec-based VPN technologies use the Internet Security Association and Key Management Protocol (ISAKMP,
or IKE) and IPsec tunneling standards to build and manage tunnels. ISAKMP and IPsec accomplish the
following:
• Negotiate tunnel parameters.
• Establish tunnels.
• Authenticate users and data.
• Manage security keys.
• Encrypt and decrypt data.
• Manage data transfer across the tunnel.
• Manage data transfer inbound and outbound as a tunnel endpoint or router.
A device in a VPN functions as a bidirectional tunnel endpoint. It can receive plain packets from the private
network, encapsulate them, create a tunnel, and send them to the other end of the tunnel where they are
unencapsulated and sent to their final destination. It can also receive encapsulated packets from the public
network, unencapsulate them, and send them to their final destination on the private network.
After the site-to-site VPN connection is established, the hosts behind the local gateway can connect to the
hosts behind the remote gateway through the secure VPN tunnel. A connection consists of the IP addresses
249
Internet Key Exchange (IKE)
and hostnames of the two gateways, the subnets behind them, and the method the two gateways use to
authenticate to each other.
Internet Key Exchange (IKE)

Internet Key Exchange (IKE) is a key management protocol that is used to authenticate IPsec peers, negotiate
and distribute IPsec encryption keys, and to automatically establish IPsec security associations (SAs).
The IKE negotiation comprises two phases. Phase 1 negotiates a security association between two IKE peers,
which enables the peers to communicate securely in Phase 2. During Phase 2 negotiation, IKE establishes
SAs for other applications, such as IPsec. Both phases use proposals when they negotiate a connection.
An IKE policy is a set of algorithms that two peers use to secure the IKE negotiation between them. IKE
negotiation begins by each peer agreeing on a common (shared) IKE policy. This policy states which security
parameters protect subsequent IKE negotiations. For IKE version 1 (IKEv1), IKE policies contain a single
set of algorithms and a modulus group. Unlike IKEv1, in an IKEv2 policy, you can select multiple algorithms
and modulus groups from which peers can choose during the Phase 1 negotiation. It is possible to create a
single IKE policy, although you might want different policies to give higher priority to your most desired
options. For site-to-site VPNs, you can create a single IKE policy.
To define an IKE policy, specify:
• A unique priority (1 to 65,543, with 1 the highest priority).
• An encryption method for the IKE negotiation, to protect the data and ensure privacy.
• A Hashed Message Authentication Codes (HMAC) method (called integrity algorithm in IKEv2) to
ensure the identity of the sender, and to ensure that the message has not been modified in transit.
• For IKEv2, a separate pseudorandom function (PRF) used as the algorithm to derive keying material and
hashing operations required for the IKEv2 tunnel encryption. The options are the same as those used for
the hash algorithm.
• A Diffie-Hellman group to determine the strength of the encryption-key-determination algorithm. The
device uses this algorithm to derive the encryption and hash keys.
• An authentication method, to ensure the identity of the peers.
• A limit to the time the device uses an encryption key before replacing it.
When IKE negotiation begins, the peer that starts the negotiation sends all of its enabled policies to the remote
peer, and the remote peer searches for a match with its own policies, in priority order. A match between IKE
policies exists if they have the same encryption, hash (integrity and PRF for IKEv2), authentication, and
Diffie-Hellman values, and an SA lifetime less than or equal to the lifetime in the policy sent. If the lifetimes
are not identical, the shorter lifetime, obtained from the remote peer, applies. By default, a simple IKE policy
that uses DES is the only enabled policy. You can enable other IKE policies at higher priorities to negotiate
stronger encryption standards, but the DES policy should ensure a successful negotiation.
How Secure Should a VPN Connection Be?

Because a VPN tunnel typically traverses a public network, most likely the Internet, you need to encrypt the
connection to protect the traffic. You define the encryption and other security techniques to apply using IKE
polices and IPsec proposals.
250
Deciding Which Encryption Algorithm to Use
If your device license allows you to apply strong encryption, there is a wide range of encryption and hash
algorithms, and Diffie-Hellman groups, from which to choose. However, as a general rule, the stronger the
encryption that you apply to the tunnel, the worse the system performance. Find a balance between security
and performance that provides sufficient protection without compromising efficiency.
We cannot provide specific guidance on which options to choose. If you operate within a larger corporation
or other organization, there might already be defined standards that you need to meet. If not, take the time to
research the options.
The following topics explain the available options.
Deciding Which Encryption Algorithm to Use

When deciding which encryption algorithms to use for the IKE policy or IPsec proposal, your choice is limited
to algorithms supported by the devices in the VPN.
For IKEv2, you can configure multiple encryption algorithms. The system orders the settings from the most
secure to the least secure and negotiates with the peer using that order. For IKEv1, you can select a single
option only.
For IPsec proposals, the algorithm is used by the Encapsulating Security Protocol (ESP), which provides
authentication, encryption, and anti-replay services. ESP is IP protocol type 50. In IKEv1 IPsec proposals,
the algorithm name is prefixed with ESP-.
If your device license qualifies for strong encryption, you can choose from the following encryption algorithms.
If you are not qualified for strong encryption, you can select DES only.
• AES-GCM—(IKEv2 only.) Advanced Encryption Standard in Galois/Counter Mode is a block cipher
mode of operation providing confidentiality and data-origin authentication, and provides greater security
than AES. AES-GCM offers three different key strengths: 128-, 192-, and 256-bit keys. A longer key
provides higher security but a reduction in performance. GCM is a mode of AES that is required to
support NSA Suite B. NSA Suite B is a set of cryptographic algorithms that devices must support to
meet federal standards for cryptographic strength. .
• AES-GMAC—(IKEv2 IPsec proposals only.) Advanced Encryption Standard Galois Message
Authentication Code is a block cipher mode of operation providing only data-origin authentication. It is
a variant of AES-GCM that allows data authentication without encrypting the data. AES-GMAC offers
three different key strengths: 128-, 192-, and 256-bit keys.
• AES—Advanced Encryption Standard is a symmetric cipher algorithm that provides greater security
than DES and is computationally more efficient than 3DES. AES offers three different key strengths:
128-, 192-, and 256-bit keys. A longer key provides higher security but a reduction in performance.
• 3DES—Triple DES, which encrypts three times using 56-bit keys, is more secure than DES because it
processes each block of data three times with a different key. However, it uses more system resources
and is slower than DES.
• DES—Data Encryption Standard, which encrypts using 56-bit keys, is a symmetric secret-key block
algorithm. If your license account does not meet the requirements for export controls, this is your only
option. It is faster than 3DES and uses less system resources, but it is also less secure. If you do not need
strong data confidentiality, and if system resources or speed is a concern, choose DES.
• Null, ESP-Null—Do not use. A null encryption algorithm provides authentication without encryption.
This is not supported on most platforms.
251
Deciding Which Hash Algorithms to Use
Deciding Which Hash Algorithms to Use

In IKE policies, the hash algorithm creates a message digest, which is used to ensure message integrity. In
IKEv2, the hash algorithm is separated into two options, one for the integrity algorithm, and one for the
pseudo-random function (PRF).
In IPsec proposals, the hash algorithm is used by the Encapsulating Security Protocol (ESP) for authentication.
In IKEv2 IPsec Proposals, this is called the integrity hash. In IKEv1 IPsec proposals, the algorithm name is
prefixed with ESP-, and there is also an -HMAC suffix (which stands for “hash method authentication code”).
For IKEv2, you can configure multiple hash algorithms. The system orders the settings from the most secure
to the least secure and negotiates with the peer using that order. For IKEv1, you can select a single option
only.
You can choose from the following hash algorithms.
• SHA (Secure Hash Algorithm)—Standard SHA (SHA1) produces a 160-bit digest. SHA is more resistant
to brute-force attacks than MD5. However, it is also more resource intensive than MD5. For
implementations that require the highest level of security, use the SHA hash algorithm.
The following SHA-2 options, which are even more secure, are available for IKEv2 configurations.
Choose one of these if you want to implement the NSA Suite B cryptography specification.
• SHA256—Specifies the Secure Hash Algorithm SHA 2 with the 256-bit digest.
• MD5 (Message Digest 5)—Produces a 128-bit digest. MD5 uses less processing time for an overall faster
performance than SHA, but it is considered to be weaker than SHA.
• Null or None (NULL, ESP-NONE)—(IPsec Proposals only.) A null Hash Algorithm; this is typically
used for testing purposes only. However, you should choose the null integrity algorithm if you select
one of the AES-GCM/GMAC options as the encryption algorithm. Even if you choose a non-null option,
the integrity hash is ignored for these encryption standards.
Deciding Which Diffie-Hellman Modulus Group to Use

You can use the following Diffie-Hellman key derivation algorithms to generate IPsec security association
(SA) keys. Each group has a different size modulus. A larger modulus provides higher security, but requires
more processing time. You must have a matching modulus group on both peers.
If you select AES encryption, to support the large key sizes required by AES, you should use Diffie-Hellman
(DH) Group 5 or higher. IKEv1 policies do not support all of the groups listed below.
To implement the NSA Suite B cryptography specification, use IKEv2 and select one of the elliptic curve
Diffie-Hellman (ECDH) options: 19, 20, or 21. Elliptic curve options and groups that use 2048-bit modulus
are less exposed to attacks such as Logjam.
For IKEv2, you can configure multiple groups. The system orders the settings from the most secure to the
least secure and negotiates with the peer using that order. For IKEv1, you can select a single option only.
• 1—Diffie-Hellman Group 1: 768-bit modulus. DH group 1 is considered insecure, please do not use it.
• 2—Diffie-Hellman Group 2: 1024-bit modular exponential (MODP) group. This option is no longer
considered good protection.
252
VPN Topologies
• 5—Diffie-Hellman Group 5: 1536-bit MODP group. Formerly considered good protection for 128-bit
keys, this option is no longer considered good protection.
• 14—Diffie-Hellman Group 14: 2048-bit modular exponential (MODP) group. Considered good protection
for 192-bit keys.
• 19—Diffie-Hellman Group 19: National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) 256-bit elliptic
curve modulo a prime (ECP) group.
• 20—Diffie-Hellman Group 20: NIST 384-bit ECP group.
• 21—Diffie-Hellman Group 21: NIST 521-bit ECP group.
• 24—Diffie-Hellman Group 24: 2048-bit MODP group with 256-bit prime order subgroup. This option
is no longer recommended.
VPN Topologies
You can configure only point-to-point VPN connections using FDM. Although all connections are
point-to-point, you can link into larger hub-and-spoke or meshed VPNs by defining each of the tunnels in
which your device participates.
The following diagram displays a typical point-to-point VPN topology. In a point-to-point VPN topology,
two endpoints communicate directly with each other. You configure the two endpoints as peer devices, and
either device can start the secured connection.
Managing Site-to-Site VPNs

A virtual private network (VPN) is a network connection that establishes a secure tunnel between remote
peers using a public source, such as the Internet or other network. VPNs use tunnels to encapsulate data packets
within normal IP packets for forwarding over IP-based networks. They use encryption to ensure privacy and
authentication to ensure the integrity of data.
You can create VPN connections to peer devices. All connections are point-to-point, but you can link the
device into larger hub-and-spoke or meshed VPNs by configuring all relevant connections.
Before you begin

The following facts control the type and number of site-to-site VPN connections that you can recreate:
• VPN connections use encryption to secure network privacy. The encryption algorithms that you can use
depend on whether your base license allows strong encryption. This is controlled by whether you selected
the option to allow export-controlled functionality on the device when you registered with Cisco Smart
253
Configuring a Site-to-Site VPN Connection
License Manager. If you are using the evaluation license, or you did not enable export-controlled
functionality, you cannot use strong encryption.
• You can create at most 20 unique IPsec profiles. Uniqueness is determined by the combination of IKEv1/v2
proposals and certificates, connection type, DH group and SA lifetime. You can reuse existing profiles.
Thus, if you use the same settings for all your site-to-site VPN connections, you have one unique IPsec
profile. Once you reach the limit of 20 unique IPsec profiles, you cannot create new site-to-site VPN
connections unless you use the same combination of attributes that you used for an existing connection
profile.
Procedure
Step 1 Click Device, then click View Configuration in the Site-to-Site VPN group.
This opens the Site-to-Site VPN page, which lists all of the connections that you have configured.
Step 2 Do any of the following.

• To create a new Site-to-Site VPN connection, click the + button. See Configuring a Site-to-Site VPN
Connection, on page 254.
If there are no connections yet, you can also click the Create Site-to-Site Connection button.
• To edit an existing connection, click the edit icon ( ) for the connection. See Configuring a Site-to-Site
VPN Connection, on page 254.
• To copy a summary of the connection configuration to the clipboard, click the copy icon ( ) for the
connection. You can paste this information in a document and send it to the administrator for the remote
device to help configure that end of the connection.
• To delete a connection that you no longer need, click the delete icon ( ) for the connection.

You can create a point-to-point VPN connection to link your device to another device, assuming that you
have the cooperation and permission of the remote device owner. Although all connections are point-to-point,
you can link into larger hub-and-spoke or meshed VPNs by defining each of the tunnels in which your device
participates.
Note You can create a single VPN connection per local network/remote network combination. However, you
can create multiple connections for a local network if the remote network is unique in each connection
profile.
254
Procedure
Step 1 Click Device, then click View Configuration in the Site-to-Site VPN group.
• To create a new Site-to-Site VPN connection, click the + button.
If there are no connections yet, you can also click the Create Site-to-Site Connection button.
• To edit an existing connection, click the edit icon ( ) for the connection.
To delete a connection that you no longer need, click the delete icon ( ) for the connection.
Step 3 Define the endpoints of the point-to-point VPN connection.

• Connection Profile Name—The name for this connection, up to 64 characters without spaces. For
example, MainOffice. You cannot use an IP address as the name.
• Local Site—These options define the local endpoint.
• Local VPN Access Interface—Select the interface to which the remote peer can connect. This is
typically the outside interface. The interface cannot be a member of a bridge group.
• Local Network—Click + and select the network objects that identify the local networks that should
participate in the VPN connection. Users on these networks will be able to reach the remote networks
through the connection.
Note You can use IPv4 or IPv6 addresses for these networks, but you must have a matching address
type on each side of the connection. For example, the VPN connection for a local IPv4 network
must have at least one remote IPv4 network. You can combine IPv4 and IPv6 on both sides
of a singe connection. The protected networks for the endpoints cannot overlap.
• Remote Site—These options define the remote endpoint.

• Remote IP Address—Enter the IP address of the remote VPN peer's interface that will host the
VPN connection.
• Remote Network—Click + and select the network objects that identify the remote networks that
should participate in the VPN connection. Users on these networks will be able to reach the local
networks through the connection.
Step 4 Click Next.

Step 5 Define the privacy configuration for the VPN.
Note Your license determines which encryption protocols you can select. You must qualify for strong
encryption, i.e. satisfy export controls, to choose any but the most basic options.
• IKE Version 2, IKE Version 1—Choose the IKE versions to use during Internet Key Exchange (IKE)
negotiations. Select either or both options as appropriate. When the device attempts to negotiate a
connection with the other peer, it uses whichever versions you allow and that the other peer accepts. If
you allow both versions, the device automatically falls back to the other version if negotiations are
unsuccessful with the initially chosen version. IKEv2 is always tried first if it is configured. Both peers
must support IKEv2 to use it in a negotiation.
255
Configuring the Global IKE Policy
• IKE Policy—Internet Key Exchange (IKE) is a key management protocol that is used to authenticate
IPsec peers, negotiate and distribute IPsec encryption keys, and automatically establish IPsec security
associations (SAs). This is a global policy: the objects you enable are applied to all VPNs. Click Edit to
examine the current globally-enabled policies per IKE version, and to enable and create new policies.
For more information, see Configuring the Global IKE Policy, on page 256.
• IPsec Proposal—The IPsec proposal defines the combination of security protocols and algorithms that
secure traffic in an IPsec tunnel. Click Edit and select the proposals for each IKE version. Select all
proposals that you want to allow. Click Set Default to simply select the system defaults, which differ
based on your export compliance. The system negotiates with the peer, starting from the strongest to the
weakest proposal, until a match is agreed upon. For more information, see Configuring IPsec Proposals,
on page 261.
• (IKEv2) Local Preshared Key, Remote Peer Preshared Key—The keys defined on this device and
on the remote device for the VPN connection. These keys can be different in IKEv2. The key can be
1-127 alphanumeric characters.
• (IKEv1) Preshared Key—The key that is defined on both the local and remote device. The key can be
1-127 alphanumeric characters.
• NAT Exempt—Whether to exempt the VPN traffic from NAT policies on the local VPN access interface.
If you do not want NAT rules to apply to the local network, select the interface that hosts the local
network. This option works only if the local network resides behind a single routed interface (not a bridge
group member). If the local network is behind more than one routed interface, or one or more bridge
group members, you must manually create the NAT exempt rules. For information on manually creating
the required rules, see Exempting Site-to-Site VPN Traffic from NAT, on page 266.
• Diffie-Helman Group for Perfect Forward Secrecy—Whether to use Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS)
to generate and use a unique session key for each encrypted exchange. The unique session key protects
the exchange from subsequent decryption, even if the entire exchange was recorded and the attacker has
obtained the preshared or private keys used by the endpoint devices. To enable Perfect Forward Secrecy,
select the Diffie-Hellman key derivation algorithm to use when generating the PFS session key in the
Modulus Group list. If you enable both IKEv1 and IKEv2, the options are limited to those supported by
IKEv1. For an explanation of the options, see Deciding Which Diffie-Hellman Modulus Group to Use,
on page 252.
Step 6 Click Next.

Step 7 Review the summary and click Finish.
The summary information is copied to the clipboard. You can paste the information in a document and use it
to help you configure the remote peer, or to send it to the party responsible for configuring the peer.
After you deploy the configuration, log into the device CLI and use the show ipsec sa command to verify
that the endpoints establish a security association. See Verifying Site-to-Site VPN Connections, on page 263.

Internet Key Exchange (IKE) is a key management protocol that is used to authenticate IPsec peers, negotiate
and distribute IPsec encryption keys, and automatically establish IPsec security associations (SAs).
The IKE negotiation comprises two phases. Phase 1 negotiates a security association between two IKE peers,
which enables the peers to communicate securely in Phase 2. During Phase 2 negotiation, IKE establishes
256
SAs for other applications, such as IPsec. Both phases use proposals when they negotiate a connection. An
IKE proposal is a set of algorithms that two peers use to secure the negotiation between them. IKE negotiation
begins by each peer agreeing on a common (shared) IKE policy. This policy states which security parameters
are used to protect subsequent IKE negotiations.
IKE policy objects define the IKE proposals for these negotiations. The objects that you enable are the ones
used when the peers negotiate a VPN connection: you cannot specify different IKE policies per connection.
The relative priority of each object determines which of these policies are tried first, with the lower number
being higher priority. The connection is not established if the negotiation fails to find a policy that both peers
can support.
To define the global IKE policy, you select which objects to enable for each IKE version. If the pre-defined
objects do not satisfy your requirements, create new policies to enforce your security policy.
The following procedure explains how to configure the global policy through the Objects page. You can also
enable, disable, and create policies when editing a VPN connection by clicking Edit for the IKE Policy settings.
Note You can enable up to 20 IKE policies.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Objects, then select IKE Policies from the table of contents.
Policies for IKEv1 and IKEv2 are shown in separate lists.
Step 2 Enable the IKE policies you want to allow for each IKE version.
a) Select IKEv1 or IKEv2 above the object table to show the policies for that version.
b) Click the State toggle to enable the appropriate objects and to disable objects that do not meet your
requirements.
If some of your security requirements are not reflected in the existing objects, define new ones to implement
your requirements. For details, see the following topics:
• Configuring IKEv1 Policies, on page 258
• Configuring IKEv2 Policies, on page 259
c) Verify that the relative priorities match your requirements.

If you need to change the priority of a policy, edit it. If the policy is a pre-defined system policy, you need
to create your own version of the policy to change the priority.
The priority is relative, and not absolute. For example, priority 80 is higher than 160. If 80 is the highest
priority object that you enable, that becomes your first-choice policy. If you then enable a policy with
priority 25, that becomes your first-choice policy.
d) If you use both IKE versions, repeat the process for the other version.
257
Configuring IKEv1 Policies

Internet Key Exchange (IKE) version 1 policy objects contain the parameters required for IKEv1 policies
when defining VPN connections. IKE is a key management protocol that facilitates the management of
IPsec-based communications. It is used to authenticate IPsec peers, negotiate and distribute IPsec encryption
keys, and automatically establish IPsec security associations (SAs).
There are several pre-defined IKEv1 policies. If any suit your needs, simply enable them by clicking the State
toggle. You can also create new policies to implement other combinations of security settings. You cannot
edit or delete system-defined objects.
can also create IKEv1 Policy objects while editing the IKEv1 settings in a VPN connection by clicking the
Create New IKE Policy link shown in the object list.
Procedure
Step 2 Select IKEv1 above the object table to show IKEv1 policies.
Step 3 If any of the system-defined policies meet your requirements, click the State toggle to enable them.
Also use the State toggle to disable unwanted policies. The relative priority determines which of these policies
are tried first, with the lower number being higher priority.

Step 5 Configure the IKEv1 properties.

• Priority—The relative priority of the IKE policy, from 1 to 65,535. The priority determines the order
of the IKE policy compared by the two negotiating peers when attempting to find a common security
association (SA). If the remote IPsec peer does not support the parameters selected in your highest priority
policy, it tries to use the parameters defined in the next lowest priority. The lower the number, the higher
the priority.
• Name—The name of the object, up to 128 characters.
• State—Whether the IKE policy is enabled or disabled. Click the toggle to change the state. Only enabled
policies are used during IKE negotiations.
• Authentication—The method of authentication to use between the two peers.
• Preshared Key—Use the preshared key that is defined on each device. These keys allow for a
secret key to be shared between two peers and to be used by IKE during the authentication phase.
If the peer is not configured with the same preshared key, the IKE SA cannot be established.
• Encryption—The encryption algorithm used to establish the Phase 1 security association (SA) for
protecting Phase 2 negotiations. For an explanation of the options, see Deciding Which Encryption
Algorithm to Use, on page 251.
258
• Diffie-Hellman Group—The Diffie-Hellman group to use for deriving a shared secret between the two
IPsec peers without transmitting it to each other. A larger modulus provides higher security but requires
more processing time. The two peers must have a matching modulus group. For an explanation of the
options, see Deciding Which Diffie-Hellman Modulus Group to Use, on page 252.
• Hash—The hash algorithm for creating a message digest, which is used to ensure message integrity. For
an explanation of the options, see Deciding Which Hash Algorithms to Use, on page 252.
• Lifetime—The lifetime of the security association (SA), in seconds, from 120 to 2147483647 or blank.
When the lifetime is exceeded, the SA expires and must be renegotiated between the two peers. As a
general rule, the shorter the lifetime (up to a point), the more secure your IKE negotiations will be.
However, with longer lifetimes, future IPsec security associations can be set up more quickly than with
shorter lifetimes. The default is 86400. To specify an unlimited lifetime, enter no value (leave the field
blank).

Internet Key Exchange (IKE) version 2 policy objects contain the parameters required for IKEv2 policies
when defining VPN connections. IKE is a key management protocol that facilitates the management of
IPsec-based communications. It is used to authenticate IPsec peers, negotiate and distribute IPsec encryption
keys, and automatically establish IPsec security associations (SAs).
There are several pre-defined IKEv2 policies. If any suit your needs, simply enable them by clicking the State
toggle. You can also create new policies to implement other combinations of security settings. You cannot
edit or delete system-defined objects.
can also create IKEv2 Policy objects while editing the IKEv2 settings in a VPN connection by clicking the
Create New IKE Policy link shown in the object list.
Procedure
Step 2 Select IKEv2 above the object table to show IKEv2 policies.
Step 3 If any of the system-defined policies meet your requirements, click the State toggle to enable them.
Also use the State toggle to disable unwanted policies. The relative priority determines which of these policies
are tried first, with the lower number being higher priority.

Step 5 Configure the IKEv2 properties.
259
• Priority—The relative priority of the IKE policy, from 1 to 65,535. The priority determines the order
of the IKE policy compared by the two negotiating peers when attempting to find a common security
association (SA). If the remote IPsec peer does not support the parameters selected in your highest priority
policy, it tries to use the parameters defined in the next lowest priority. The lower the number, the higher
the priority.
• State—Whether the IKE policy is enabled or disabled. Click the toggle to change the state. Only enabled
policies are used during IKE negotiations.
• Encryption—The encryption algorithm used to establish the Phase 1 security association (SA) for
protecting Phase 2 negotiations. Select all algorithms that you want to allow, although you cannot include
both mixed-mode (AES-GCM) and normal mode options in the same policy. (Normal mode requires
that you select an integrity hash, whereas mixed mode prohibits a separate integrity hash selection.) The
system negotiates with the peer, starting from the strongest to the weakest algorithm, until a match is
agreed upon. For an explanation of the options, see Deciding Which Encryption Algorithm to Use, on
page 251.
• Diffie-Hellman Group—The Diffie-Hellman group to use for deriving a shared secret between the two
IPsec peers without transmitting it to each other. A larger modulus provides higher security but requires
more processing time. The two peers must have a matching modulus group. Select all algorithms that
you want to allow. The system negotiates with the peer, starting from the strongest to the weakest group,
until a match is agreed upon. For an explanation of the options, see Deciding Which Diffie-Hellman
Modulus Group to Use, on page 252.
• Integrity Hash—The integrity portion of the hash algorithm for creating a message digest, which is used
to ensure message integrity. Select all algorithms that you want to allow. The system negotiates with the
peer, starting from the strongest to the weakest algorithm, until a match is agreed upon. The integrity
hash is not used with the AES-GCM encryption options. For an explanation of the options, see Deciding
Which Hash Algorithms to Use, on page 252.
• Pseudo Random Function (PRF) Hash—The pseudo-random function (PRF) portion of the hash
algorithm, which is used as the algorithm to derive keying material and hashing operations required for
the IKEv2 tunnel encryption. In IKEv1, the Integrity and PRF algorithms are not separated, but in IKEv2,
you can specify different algorithms for these elements. Select all algorithms that you want to allow. The
system negotiates with the peer, starting from the strongest to the weakest algorithm, until a match is
agreed upon. For an explanation of the options, see Deciding Which Hash Algorithms to Use, on page
252.
• Lifetime—The lifetime of the security association (SA), in seconds, from 120 to 2147483647 or blank.
When the lifetime is exceeded, the SA expires and must be renegotiated between the two peers. As a
general rule, the shorter the lifetime (up to a point), the more secure your IKE negotiations will be.
However, with longer lifetimes, future IPsec security associations can be set up more quickly than with
shorter lifetimes. The default is 86400. To specify an unlimited lifetime, enter no value (leave the field
blank).
260
Configuring IPsec Proposals
Configuring IPsec Proposals

IPsec is one of the most secure methods for setting up a VPN. IPsec provides data encryption at the IP packet
level, offering a robust security solution that is standards-based. With IPsec, data is transmitted over a public
network through tunnels. A tunnel is a secure, logical communication path between two peers. Traffic that
enters an IPsec tunnel is secured by a combination of security protocols and algorithms called a transform
set. During the IPsec security association (SA) negotiation, peers search for a transform set that is the same
at both peers.
There are separate IPsec proposal objects based on the IKE version, IKEv1, or IKEv2:
• When you create an IKEv1 IPsec proposal, you select the mode in which IPsec operates, and define the
required encryption and authentication types. You can select single options for the algorithms. If you
want to support multiple combinations in a VPN, create and select multiple IKEv1 IPsec Proposal objects.
• When you create an IKEv2 IPsec proposal, you can select all of the encryption and hash algorithms
allowed in a VPN. The system orders the settings from the most secure to the least secure and negotiates
with the peer until a match is found. This allows you to potentially send a single proposal to convey all
the allowed combinations instead of the need to send each allowed combination individually as with
IKEv1.
The Encapsulating Security Protocol (ESP) is used for both IKEv1 and IKEv2 IPsec proposals. It provides
authentication, encryption, and antireplay services. ESP is IP protocol type 50.
Note We recommend using both encryption and authentication on IPsec tunnels.
The following topics explain how to configure IPsec proposals for each IKE version.
Configuring IPsec Proposals for IKEv1

Use IKEv1 IPsec Proposal objects configure the IPsec proposal used during IKE Phase 2 negotiations. The
IPsec proposal defines the combination of security protocols and algorithms that secure traffic in an IPsec
tunnel.
There are several pre-defined IKEv1 IPsec proposals. You can also create new proposals to implement other
combinations of security settings. You cannot edit or delete system-defined objects.
can also create IKEv1 IPsec Proposals objects while editing the IKEv1 IPsec settings in a VPN connection
by clicking the Create New IPsec Proposal link shown in the object list.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Objects, then select IPsec Proposals from the table of contents.
Step 2 Select IKEv1 above the object table to show IKEv1 IPsec proposals.
261
Step 4 Configure the IKEv1 IPsec proposal properties.

• Mode—The mode in which the IPSec tunnel operates.
• Tunnel mode encapsulates the entire IP packet. The IPSec header is added between the original IP
header and a new IP header. This is the default. Use tunnel mode when the firewall is protecting
traffic to and from hosts positioned behind the firewall. Tunnel mode is the normal way regular
IPSec is implemented between two firewalls (or other security gateways) that are connected over
an untrusted network, such as the Internet.
• Transport mode encapsulates only the upper-layer protocols of an IP packet. The IPSec header is
inserted between the IP header and the upper-layer protocol header (such as TCP). Transport mode
requires that both the source and destination hosts support IPSec, and can only be used when the
destination peer of the tunnel is the final destination of the IP packet. Transport mode is generally
used only when protecting a Layer 2 or Layer 3 tunneling protocol such as GRE, L2TP, and DLSW.
• ESP Encryption—The Encapsulating Security Protocol (ESP) encryption algorithm for this proposal.
For an explanation of the options, see Deciding Which Encryption Algorithm to Use, on page 251.
• ESP Hash—The hash or integrity algorithm to use for authentication. For an explanation of the options,
see Deciding Which Hash Algorithms to Use, on page 252.

Use IKEv2 IPsec Proposal objects configure the IPsec proposal used during IKE Phase 2 negotiations. The
IPsec proposal defines the combination of security protocols and algorithms that secure traffic in an IPsec
tunnel.
There are several pre-defined IKEv2 IPsec proposals. You can also create new proposals to implement other
combinations of security settings. You cannot edit or delete system-defined objects.
can also create IKEv2 IPsec Proposals objects while editing the IKEv2 IPsec settings in a VPN connection
by clicking the Create New IPsec Proposal link shown in the object list.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Objects, then select IPsec Proposals from the table of contents.
Step 2 Select IKEv2 above the object table to show IKEv2 IPsec proposals.
262
Verifying Site-to-Site VPN Connections
Step 4 Configure the IKEv2 IPsec proposal properties.

• Encryption—The Encapsulating Security Protocol (ESP) encryption algorithm for this proposal. Select
all algorithms that you want to allow. The system negotiates with the peer, starting from the strongest to
the weakest algorithm, until a match is agreed upon. For an explanation of the options, see Deciding
Which Encryption Algorithm to Use, on page 251.
• Integrity Hash—The hash or integrity algorithm to use for authentication. Select all algorithms that you
want to allow. The system negotiates with the peer, starting from the strongest to the weakest algorithm,
until a match is agreed upon. For an explanation of the options, see Deciding Which Hash Algorithms
to Use, on page 252.
Note You should choose the null integrity algorithm if you select one of the AES-GCM/GMAC
options as the encryption algorithm. These encryption standards do not use the integrity hash
even if you select a non-null option.

After you configure a site-to-site VPN connection, and deploy the configuration to the device, verify that the
system establishes the security association with the remote device.
If the connection cannot be established, use the ping interface interface_name remote_ip_address command
from the device CLI to ensure there is a path through the VPN interface to the remote device. If there is no
connection through the configured interface, you can leave off the interface interface_name keyword and
determine if connectivity is through a different interface. You might have selected the wrong interface for the
connection: you must select the interface that faces the remote device, not the interface that faces the protected
network.
If there is a network path, check the IKE versions and keys configured and supported by both endpoints, and
adjust the VPN connection as needed. Ensure that no access control or NAT rules are blocking the connection.
Procedure
Step 1 Log into the device CLI as explained in Logging Into the Command Line Interface (CLI), on page 5.
Step 2 Use the show ipsec sa command to verify that the IPsec security association is established.
You should see that the VPN connection is established between your device (the local addr) and the remote
peer (current_peer). The packets (pkts) counts should increase as you send traffic through the connection.
The access list should show the local and remote networks for the connection.
For example, the following output shows an IKEv2 connection.
> show ipsec sa

interface: site-a-outside
Crypto map tag: s2sCryptoMap, seq num: 1, local addr: 192.168.2.15
263
access-list |s2sAcl|0730e31c-1e5f-11e7-899f-27f6e1030344
extended permit ip 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.3.0 255.255.255.0
local ident (addr/mask/prot/port): (192.168.1.0/255.255.255.0/0/0)
remote ident (addr/mask/prot/port): (192.168.3.0/255.255.255.0/0/0)
current_peer: 192.168.4.6
#pkts encaps: 69, #pkts encrypt: 69, #pkts digest: 69

#pkts decaps: 69, #pkts decrypt: 69, #pkts verify: 69
#pkts compressed: 0, #pkts decompressed: 0
#pkts not compressed: 69, #pkts comp failed: 0, #pkts decomp failed: 0
#pre-frag successes: 0, #pre-frag failures: 0, #fragments created: 0
#PMTUs sent: 0, #PMTUs rcvd: 0, #decapsulated frgs needing reassembly: 0
#TFC rcvd: 0, #TFC sent: 0
#Valid ICMP Errors rcvd: 0, #Invalid ICMP Errors rcvd: 0
#send errors: 0, #recv errors: 0
local crypto endpt.: 192.168.2.15/500, remote crypto endpt.: 192.168.4.6/500

path mtu 1500, ipsec overhead 55(36), media mtu 1500
PMTU time remaining (sec): 0, DF policy: copy-df
ICMP error validation: disabled, TFC packets: disabled
current outbound spi: CD22739C
current inbound spi : 52D2F1E4
inbound esp sas:

spi: 0x52D2F1E4 (1389556196)
SA State: active
transform: esp-aes-gcm-256 esp-null-hmac no compression
in use settings ={L2L, Tunnel, PFS Group 19, IKEv2, }
slot: 0, conn_id: 62738432, crypto-map: s2sCryptoMap
sa timing: remaining key lifetime (kB/sec): (4285434/28730)
IV size: 8 bytes
replay detection support: Y
Anti replay bitmap:
0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF
outbound esp sas:
spi: 0xCD22739C (3441587100)
SA State: active
transform: esp-aes-gcm-256 esp-null-hmac no compression
IV size: 8 bytes
Anti replay bitmap:
0x00000000 0x00000001
The following output shows an IKEv1 connection.
> show ipsec sa

interface: site-a-outside
Crypto map tag: s2sCryptoMap, seq num: 1, local addr: 192.168.2.15
access-list |s2sAcl|0730e31c-1e5f-11e7-899f-27f6e1030344
extended permit ip 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.3.0 255.255.255.0
local ident (addr/mask/prot/port): (192.168.1.0/255.255.255.0/0/0)
remote ident (addr/mask/prot/port): (192.168.3.0/255.255.255.0/0/0)
current_peer: 192.168.4.6
#pkts encaps: 10, #pkts encrypt: 10, #pkts digest: 10

#pkts decaps: 10, #pkts decrypt: 10, #pkts verify: 10
264
#pkts compressed: 0, #pkts decompressed: 0

#pkts not compressed: 10, #pkts comp failed: 0, #pkts decomp failed: 0
#pre-frag successes: 0, #pre-frag failures: 0, #fragments created: 0
#PMTUs sent: 0, #PMTUs rcvd: 0, #decapsulated frgs needing reassembly: 0
#TFC rcvd: 0, #TFC sent: 0
#Valid ICMP Errors rcvd: 0, #Invalid ICMP Errors rcvd: 0
#send errors: 0, #recv errors: 0
local crypto endpt.: 192.168.2.15/0, remote crypto endpt.: 192.168.4.6/0

path mtu 1500, ipsec overhead 74(44), media mtu 1500
PMTU time remaining (sec): 0, DF policy: copy-df
ICMP error validation: disabled, TFC packets: disabled
current outbound spi: 077D72C9
current inbound spi : AC146DEC
inbound esp sas:

spi: 0xAC146DEC (2887020012)
SA State: active
transform: esp-aes-256 esp-sha-hmac no compression
IV size: 16 bytes
Anti replay bitmap:
0x00000000 0x000007FF
outbound esp sas:
spi: 0x077D72C9 (125661897)
SA State: active
transform: esp-aes-256 esp-sha-hmac no compression
IV size: 16 bytes
Anti replay bitmap:
0x00000000 0x00000001
Step 3 Use the show isakmp sa command to verify the IKE security associations.
You can use the command without the sa keyword (or use the stats keyword instead) to view IKE statistics.
For example, the following output shows an IKEv2 security association.
> show isakmp sa
There are no IKEv1 SAs
IKEv2 SAs:
Session-id:15317, Status:UP-ACTIVE, IKE count:1, CHILD count:1
Tunnel-id Local Remote Status Role

592216161 192.168.2.15/500 192.168.4.6/500 READY INITIATOR
Encr: AES-GCM, keysize: 256, Hash: N/A, DH Grp:21, Auth sign: PSK, Auth verify: PSK
Life/Active Time: 86400/12 sec
Child sa: local selector 192.168.1.0/0 - 192.168.1.255/65535
remote selector 192.168.3.0/0 - 192.168.3.255/65535
ESP spi in/out: 0x52d2f1e4/0xcd22739c
The following output shows an IKEv1 security association.
265
Monitoring Site-to-Site VPN
> show isakmp sa
IKEv1 SAs:
Active SA: 1
Rekey SA: 0 (A tunnel will report 1 Active and 1 Rekey SA during rekey)
Total IKE SA: 1
1 IKE Peer: 192.168.4.6

Type : L2L Role : initiator
Rekey : no State : MM_ACTIVE
There are no IKEv2 SAs
Monitoring Site-to-Site VPN

To monitor and troubleshoot site-to-site VPN connections, log into the device CLI and use the following
commands.
• show ipsec sa displays the VPN sessions (security associations). You can reset these statistics using the
clear ipsec sa counters command.
• show ipsec keyword displays IPsec operational data and statistics. Enter show ipsec ? to see the available
keywords.
• show isakmp displays ISAKMP operational data and statistics.
Examples for Site-to-Site VPN

The following are examples of configuring site-to-site VPN.
Exempting Site-to-Site VPN Traffic from NAT

When you have a site-to-site VPN connection defined on an interface, and you also have NAT rules for that
interface, you can optionally exempt the traffic on the VPN from the NAT rules. You might want to do this
if the remote end of the VPN connection can handle your internal addresses.
When you create the VPN connection, you can select the NAT Exempt option to create the rules automatically.
However, this works only if your local protected network is connected through a single routed interface (not
a bridge group member). If instead, the local networks in the connection reside behind two or more routed
interfaces, or one or more bridge group members, you need to manually configure the NAT exempt rules.
To exempt VPN traffic from NAT rules, you create an identity manual NAT rule for the local traffic when
the destination is the remote network. Then, apply NAT to the traffic when the destination is anything else
(for example, the Internet). If you have more than one interface for the local network, create rules for each
interface. Also, consider the following suggestions:
• If there is more than one local network in the connection, create a network object group to hold the objects
that define the networks.
266
• If you are including both IPv4 and IPv6 networks in the VPN, create separate identity NAT rules for
each.
Consider the following example, which shows a site-to-site tunnel connecting the Boulder and San Jose offices.
For traffic that you want to go to the Internet (for example from 10.1.1.6 in Boulder to www.example.com),
you need a public IP address provided by NAT to access the Internet. The below example uses interface PAT
rules. However, for traffic that you want to go over the VPN tunnel (for example from 10.1.1.6 in Boulder to
10.2.2.78 in San Jose), you do not want to perform NAT; you need to exempt that traffic by creating an identity
NAT rule. Identity NAT simply translates an address to the same address.
Figure 21: Interface PAT and Identity NAT for Site-to-Site VPN
The following example explains the configuration for Firewall1 (Boulder). The example assumes that the
inside interface is a bridge group, so you need to write the rules for each member interface. The process is
the same if you have a single or multiple routed inside interfaces.
Note This example assumes IPv4 only. If the VPN also includes IPv6 networks, create parallel rules for IPv6.
Note that you cannot implement IPv6 interface PAT, so you need to create a host object with a unique
IPv6 address to use for PAT.
Procedure
Step 1 Create the objects to define the various networks.

a) Choose Objects.
c) Identify the Boulder inside network.
267
Name the network object (for example, boulder-network), select Network, and enter the network address,
10.1.1.0/24.
d) Click OK.
e) Click + and define the inside San Jose network.
Name the network object (for example, sanjose-network), select Network, and enter the network address
10.2.2.0/24.
f) Click OK.
Step 2 Configure manual identity NAT for the Boulder network when going over the VPN to San Jose on Firewall1
(Boulder).
268

• Title = NAT Exempt 1_2 Boulder San Jose VPN (or another name of your choosing).
• Placement = Above a Specific Rule, and select the first rule in the Manual NAT Before Auto NAT
section. You want to ensure that this rule comes before any general interface PAT rules for the
destination interface. Otherwise, the rule might not be applied to the right traffic.
• Type = Static.
• Source Interface = inside1_2.
• Original Source Address = boulder-network network object.
• Translated Source Address = boulder-network network object.
• Original Destination Address = sanjose-network network object.
• Translated Destination Address = sanjose-network network object.
Note Because you do not want to translate the destination address, you need to configure identity
NAT for it by specifying the same address for the original and translated destination
addresses. Leave all of the port fields blank. This rule configures identity NAT for both
source and destination.
269
d) On the Advanced tab, select Do not proxy ARP on Destination interface.

e) Click OK.
f) Repeat the process to create equivalent rules for each of the other inside interfaces.
Step 3 Configure manual dynamic interface PAT when going to the Internet for the inside Boulder network on
Firewall1 (Boulder).
Note There might already be dynamic interface PAT rules for the inside interfaces, covering any IPv4
traffic, as these are created by default during initial configuration. However, the configuration is
shown here for completeness. Before completing these steps, check whether a rule already exists
that covers the inside interface and network, and skip this step if it does.

• Title = inside1_2 interface PAT (or another name of your choosing).
• Placement = Below a Specific Rule, and select the rule you created above for this interface in the
Manual NAT Before Auto NAT section. Because this rule will apply to any destination address, the
rule that uses sanjose-network as the destination must come before this rule, or the sanjose-network
rule will never be matched. The default is to place new manual NAT rules at the end of the "NAT
Rules Before Auto NAT" section, which is also sufficient.
270
• Type = Dynamic.
• Source Interface = inside1_2.
• Original Source Address = boulder-network network object.
• Translated Source Address = Interface. This option configures interface PAT using the destination
interface.
• Original Destination Address = any.
• Translated Destination Address = any.
c) Click OK.
d) Repeat the process to create equivalent rules for each of the other inside interfaces.
271
How to Provide Internet Access on the Outside Interface for External Site-to-Site VPN Users (Hair Pinning)
Step 5 If you are also managing Firewall2 (San Jose), you can configure similar rules for that device.
• The manual identity NAT rule would be for sanjose-network when the destination is boulder-network.
Create new interface objects for the Firewall2 inside and outside networks.
• The manual dynamic interface PAT rule would be for sanjose-network when the destination is "any."
How to Provide Internet Access on the Outside Interface for External

Site-to-Site VPN Users (Hair Pinning)
In a site-to-site VPN, you might want users on the remote networks to access the Internet through your device.
However, because the remote users are entering your device on the same interface that faces the Internet (the
outside interface), you need to bounce Internet traffic right back out of the outside interface. This technique
is sometimes called hair pinning.
The following graphic shows an example. There is a site-to-site VPN tunnel configured between 198.51.100.1
(on the main site, Site A) and 203.0.113.1 (the remote site, Site B). All user traffic from the remote site inside
network, 192.168.2.0/24, goes through the VPN. Thus, when a user on that network wants to go to a server
on the Internet, such as www.example.com, the connection first goes through the VPN, then gets routed back
out to the Internet from the 198.51.100.1 interface.
The following procedure explains how to configure this service. You must configure both endpoints of the
VPN tunnel.
Procedure
Step 1 (Site A, main site.) Configure the site-to-site VPN connection to remote Site B.
a) Click Device, then click View Configuration in the Site-to-Site VPN group.
b) Click + to add a new connection.
c) Define the endpoints as follows, and then click Next:
272
• Connection Profile Name—Give the connection a meaningful name, for example, Site-A-to-Site-B.
• Local VPN Access Interface—Select the outside interface.
• Local Network—Keep the default, Any.
• Remote IP Address—Enter the IP address of the remote peer’s outside interface. In this example,
203.0.113.1.
• Remote Network—Click +, then select the network object that defines the remote peer’s protected
network. In this example, 192.168.2.0/24. You can click Create New Network to create the object
now.
The following graphic shows how the first step should look.
d) Define the privacy configuration, then click Next.

• IKE Policy—The IKE settings have no impact on hair pinning. Simply select the IKE versions,
policies, and proposals that fit your security needs. Make note of the local and remote pre-shared
keys you enter: you will need these when configuring the remote peer.
• NAT Exempt—Select the inside interface.
• Diffie Helman Group for Perfect Forward Secrecy—This setting has no impact on hair pinning.
Configure it as you see fit.
e) Click Finish.
The connection summary is copied to the clipboard. You can paste it into a text file or other document to
help you configure the remote peer.
273
Step 2 (Site A, main site.) Configure the NAT rule to translate all connections going out the outside interface to ports
on the outside IP address (interface PAT).
When you complete the initial device configuration, the system creates a NAT rule named
InsideOutsideNatRule. This rule applies interface PAT to IPv4 traffic from any interface that exits the device
through the outside interface. Because the outside interface is included in “Any” source interface, the rule
you need already exists, unless you edited it or deleted it.
The following procedure explains how to create the rule you need.
a) Click Policies > NAT.
b) Do one of the following:
• To edit the InsideOutsideNatRule, mouse over the Action column and click the edit icon ( ).
• To create a new rule, click +.
c) Configure a rule with the following properties:

• Title—For a new rule, enter a meaningful name without spaces. For example, OutsideInterfacePAT.
• Create Rule For—Manual NAT.
• Placement—Before Auto NAT Rules (the default).
• Type—Dynamic.
• Original Packet—For Source Address, select either Any or any-ipv4. For Source Interface, ensure
that you select Any (which is the default). For all other Original Packet options, keep the default,
Any.
• Translated Packet—For Destination Interface, select outside. For Translated Address, select
Interface. For all other Translated Packet options, keep the default, Any.
The following graphic shows the simple case where you select Any for the source address.
274
d) Click OK.
Step 3 (Site A, main site.) Commit your changes.

Step 4 (Site B, remote site.) Log into the remote site’s device, and configure the site-to-site VPN connection to Site
A.
Use the connection summary obtained from the Site A device configuration to help you configure the Site B
side of the connection.
a) Click Device, then click View Configuration in the Site-to-Site VPN group.
b) Click + to add a new connection.
c) Define the endpoints as follows, and then click Next:
• Connection Profile Name—Give the connection a meaningful name, for example, Site-B-to-Site-A.
• Local VPN Access Interface—Select the outside interface.
275
• Local Network—Click +, then select the network object that defines the local protected network.
In this example, 192.168.2.0/24. You can click Create New Network to create the object now.
• Remote IP Address—Enter the IP address of the main site’s outside interface. In this example,
198.51.100.1.
• Remote Network—Keep the default, Any. Ignore the warning; it is not relevant for this use case.
The following graphic shows how the first step should look.
d) Define the privacy configuration, then click Next.

• IKE Policy—The IKE settings have no impact on hair pinning. Configure the same or compatible
options as those on Site A’s end of the VPN connection. You must configure the pre-shared keys
correctly: switch the local and remote keys (for IKEv2) as configured on the Site A device. For
IKEv1, there is just one key, which must be the same on both peers.
• NAT Exempt—Select the inside interface.
• Diffie Helman Group for Perfect Forward Secrecy—This setting has no impact on hair pinning.
Match the setting used on Site A’s end of the VPN connection.
e) Click Finish.
Step 5 (Site B, remote site.) Delete all NAT rules for the protected network so that all traffic leaving the site must
go through the VPN tunnel.
276
Performing NAT on this device is unnecessary because the Site A device will do the address translation. But
please examine your specific situation. If you have multiple internal networks and not all of them are
participating in this VPN connection, do not delete NAT rules that you need for those networks.
a) Click Policies > NAT.
b) Do one of the following:
• To delete rules, mouse over the Action column and click the delete icon ( ).
• To edit rules so they no longer apply to the protected network, mouse over the Action column and
click the edit icon ( ).
Step 6 (Site B, remote site.) Commit your changes.

b) Click the Deploy Now button and wait for deployment to finish.
277
278
PA R T IV
System Administration
• System Settings, on page 281
• System Management, on page 291
CHAPTER 12
System Settings
The following topics explain how to configure the various system settings that are grouped together on the
System Settings page. The settings cover overall system function.
• Configuring the Management Access List, on page 281
• Configuring Diagnostic Logging, on page 283
• Configuring the DHCP Server, on page 284
• Configuring DNS, on page 286
• Configuring the Management Interface, on page 286
• Configuring the Device Hostname, on page 288
• Configuring Network Time Protocol (NTP), on page 288
• Configuring URL Filtering Preferences, on page 289
• Configuring Cloud Management (Cisco Defense Orchestrator), on page 289
Configuring the Management Access List

By default, you can reach the device's FDM web or CLI interfaces on the management address from any IP
address. System access is protected by username/password only. However, you can configure an access list
to allow connections from specific IP addresses or subnets only to provide another level of protection.
You can also open data interfaces to allow the FDM or SSH connections to the CLI. You can then manage
the device without using the management address. For example, you could allow management access to the
outside interface, so that you can configure the device remotely. The username/password protects against
unwanted connections. By default, HTTPS management access to data interfaces is enabled on the inside
interface but it is disabled on the outside interface. For any device model that has a default “inside” bridge
group, this means that you can make the FDM connections through any data interface within the bridge group
to the bridge group IP address (default is 192.168.1.1). You can open a management connection only on the
interface through which you enter the device.
Caution If you constrain access to specific addresses, you can easily lock yourself out of the system. If you delete
access for the IP address that you are currently using, and there is no entry for “any” address, you will
lose access to the system when you deploy the policy. Be very careful if you decide to configure the
access list.
281
Configuring the Management Access List
Procedure
Step 1 Click Device, then click the System Settings > Management Access List link.
If you are already on the System Settings page, simply click Management Access List in the table of contents.
Step 2 To create rules for the management address:

a) Select the Management Interface tab.
The list of rules defines which addresses are allowed access to the indicated port: 443 for the FDM (the
HTTPS web interface), 22 for the SSH CLI.
The rules are not an ordered list. If an IP address matches any rule for the requested port, the user is
allowed to attempt logging into the device.
Note
To delete a rule, click the trash can icon ( ) for the rule. If you delete all of the rules for a
protocol, no one can access the device on that interface using the protocol.
b) Click + and fill in the following options:

• Protocol—Select whether the rule is for HTTPS (port 443) or SSH (port 22).
• IP Address—Select the network object that defines the IPv4 or IPv6 network or host that should be
able to access the system. To specify "any" address, select any-ipv4 (0.0.0.0/0) and any-ipv6 (::/0).
c) Click OK.
Step 3 To create rules for data interfaces:
a) Select the Data Interfaces tab.
The list of rules defines which addresses are allowed access to the indicated port on the interface: 443 for
the FDM (the HTTPS web interface), 22 for the SSH CLI.
The rules are not an ordered list. If an IP address matches any rule for the requested port, the user is
allowed to attempt logging into the device.
Note
To delete a rule, click the trash can icon ( ) for the rule. If you delete all of the rules for a
protocol, no one can access the device on that interface using the protocol.
b) Click + and fill in the following options:

• Interface—Select the interface on which you want to allow management access.
• Protocols—Select whether the rule is for HTTPS (port 443), SSH (port 22), or both.
• Allowed Networks—Select the network objects that define the IPv4 or IPv6 network or host that
should be able to access the system. To specify "any" address, select any-ipv4 (0.0.0.0/0) and any-ipv6
(::/0).
c) Click OK.
282
Configuring Diagnostic Logging
Configuring Diagnostic Logging

Diagnostic logging provides syslog messages for events that are not related to connections. You configure
connection logging within individual access control rules. The following procedure explains how to configure
the logging of diagnostic messages.
Procedure
Step 1 Click Device, then click the System Settings > Logging Settings link.
If you are already on the System Settings page, simply click Logging Settings in the table of contents
Step 2 Click Diagnostic Log Settings > On.

Even if you configure the remaining fields on this page, diagnostic log messages are not generated unless you
turn on this setting.
Step 3 Turn the slider to On for each of the locations where you want to see diagnostic log messages, and select a
minimum severity level.
You can log messages to the following locations:
• Console—These messages appear when you log into the CLI on the Console port. You can also see these
logs in an SSH session to other interfaces (including the management address) by using the show
console-output command. In addition, you can see these messages in real time in the diagnostic CLI,
enter system support diagnostic-cli from the main CLI.
• Syslog—These messages are sent to the external syslog servers that you specify. Click +, select the syslog
server objects, and click OK in the popup dialog box. If the object for a server does not already exist,
click Add Syslog Server to create it.
Step 4 Click Save.
Severity Levels
The following table lists the syslog message severity levels.
Table 5: Syslog Message Severity Levels
Level Number Severity Level Description
0 emergencies System is unusable.
1 alert Immediate action is needed.
2 critical Critical conditions.
3 error Error conditions.
4 warning Warning conditions.
283
Configuring the DHCP Server
Level Number Severity Level Description
5 notification Normal but significant conditions.
6 informational Informational messages only.
7 debugging Debugging messages only.

Log at this level only temporarily, when debugging issues. This
log level can potentially generate so many messages that system
performance can be affected.
Note ASA and FTD do not generate syslog messages with a severity level of zero (emergencies).

A DHCP server provides network configuration parameters, such as IP addresses, to DHCP clients. You can
configure a DHCP server on an interface to provide configuration parameters to DHCP clients on the attached
network.
An IPv4 DHCP client uses a broadcast rather than a multicast address to reach the server. The DHCP client
listens for messages on UDP port 68; the DHCP server listens for messages on UDP port 67. The DHCP
server does not support BOOTP requests.
DHCP clients must be on the same network as the interface on which the server is enabled. That is, there
cannot be an intervening router between the server and client, although there can be a switch.
Note Do not configure a DHCP server on a network that already has a DHCP server operating on it. The two
servers will conflict and results will be unpredictable.
Procedure
Step 1 Click Device, then click the System Settings > DHCP Server link.
If you are already on the System Settings page, simply click DHCP Server in the table of contents.
The page has two tabs. Initially, the Configuration tab shows the global parameters.
The DHCP Servers tab shows the interfaces on which you have configured DHCP server, whether the server
is enabled, and the address pool for the server.
Step 2 On the Configuration tab, configure auto-configuration and global settings.

DHCP auto configuration enables the DHCP Server to provide DHCP clients with DNS server, domain name,
and WINS server information obtained from a DHCP client that is running on the specified interface. Typically,
you would use auto-configuration if you are obtaining an address using DHCP on the outside interface, but
284
you could choose any interface that obtains its address through DHCP. If you cannot use auto-configuration,
you can manually define the required options.
a) Click Enable Auto Configuration > On (the slider should be on the right) if you want to use
auto-configuration, and then select the interface that is obtaining its address through DHCP in From
Interface.
b) If you do not enable auto-configuration, or if you want to override any of the automatically configured
settings, configure the following global options. These settings will be sent to DHCP clients on all interfaces
that host DHCP server.
• Primary WINS IP Address, Secondary WINS IP Address—The addresses of the Windows Internet
Name Service (WINS) servers clients should use for NetBIOS name resolution.
• Primary DNS IP Address, Secondary DNS IP Address—The addresses of the Domain Name
System (DNS) servers clients should use for domain name resolution. Click Use OpenDNS if you
want to configure the OpenDNS public DNS servers. Clicking the button loads the appropriate IP
addresses into the fields.
c) Click Save.
Step 3 Click the DHCP Servers tab and configure the servers.
a) Do one of the following:
• To configure DHCP server for an interface that is not already listed, click +.
• To edit an existing DHCP server, click the edit icon ( ) for the server.
To delete a server, click the trash can icon ( ) for the server.
b) Configure the server properties:
• Enable DHCP Server—Whether to enable the server. You can configure a server but keep it disabled
until you are ready to use it.
• Interface—Select the interface on which you will provide DHCP addresses to clients. The interface
must have a static IP address; you cannot be using DHCP to obtain the interface address if you want
to run a DHCP server on the interface. For bridge groups, you configure the DHCP server on the
Bridge Virtual Interface (BVI), not the member interfaces, and the server operates on all member
interfaces.
You cannot configure DHCP server on the Diagnostic interface; configure it on the Management
interface instead, on the Device > System Settings > Management Interface page.
• Address Pool—The range of IP addresses from lowest to highest that the server is allowed to provide
to clients that request an address. Specify the start and end address for the pool, separated by a hyphen.
For example, 10.100.10.12-10.100.10.250.
The range of IP addresses must be on the same subnet as the selected interface and cannot include:
the IP address of the interface itself, the broadcast address, or the subnet network address.
The size of the address pool is limited to 256 addresses per pool on the FTD device. If the address
pool range is larger than 253 addresses, the netmask of the FTD interface cannot be a Class C address
(for example, 255.255.255.0) and needs to be something larger, for example, 255.255.254.0.
285
Configuring DNS
c) Click OK.
Configuring DNS
The Domain Name System (DNS) servers are used to resolve hostnames to IP addresses. These servers are
used by the management interface. You configure DNS servers during initial system setup, but you can change
them using the following procedure.
You can also change the DNS configuration in the CLI using the configure network dns servers and configure
network dns searchdomains commands.
If you have problems with DNS resolution, see Troubleshooting DNS for the Management Interface, on page
305.
Procedure
Step 1 Click Device, then click the System Settings > DNS Server link.
If you are already on the System Settings page, simply click DNS Server in the table of contents.
Step 2 In Primary, Secondary, Tertiary DNS IP address, enter the IP addresses of up to three DNS servers in
order of preference.
The primary DNS server is used unless it cannot be contacted, in which case the secondary is tried, and finally
the tertiary.
Click Use OpenDNS if you want to configure the OpenDNS public DNS servers. Clicking the button loads
the appropriate IP addresses into the fields.
Step 3 In Domain Search Name, enter the domain name for your network, e.g. example.com.
This domain is added to hostnames that are not fully-qualified, for example, serverA instead of
serverA.example.com.
Step 4 Click Save.
Configuring the Management Interface

The Management interface is a virtual interface attached to the physical Management port. Note that the
physical interface also includes the Diagnostic virtual interface, which you can configure on the Interfaces
page with other physical interfaces. See Management/Diagnostic Interface, on page 100 for more information
about the Diagnostic interface.
The management interface has two uses:
• You can open web and SSH connections to the IP address and configure the device through the interface.
• The system obtains smart licensing and database updates through this IP address.
286
Configuring the Management Interface
If you use the CLI setup wizard, you configure the management address and gateway for the device during
initial system configuration. If you use the FDM setup wizard, the management address and gateway remain
the defaults.
If necessary, you can change these addresses through the FDM. You can also change the management address
and gateway in the CLI using the configure network ipv4 manual and configure network ipv6 manual
commands.
You can define static addresses, or obtain an address through DHCP if another device on the management
network is acting as a DHCP server. By default, the management address is static, and a DHCP server runs
on the port. Thus, you can plug a device directly into the management port and get a DHCP address for your
workstation. This makes it easy to connect to and configure the device.
Caution If you change the address to which you are currently connected, you will lose access to the FDM (or
the CLI) when you save the changes, as they are applied immediately. You will need to reconnect to
the device. Ensure that the new address is valid and available on the management network.
Procedure
Step 1 Click Device, then click the System Settings > Management Interface link.
If you are already on the System Settings page, click Management Interface in the table of contents
Step 2 Choose how you want to define the management gateway.

The gateway determines how the system can reach the internet to obtain smart licenses, database updates
(such as VDB, rule, Geolocation, URL), and to reach the management DNS and NTP servers. Choose from
these options:
• (Static IP only) Use the Data Interfaces as the Gateway—Select this option if you do not have a separate
management network connected to the Management interface. Traffic is routed to the internet based on
the routing table, typically going through the outside interface.
• Use Unique Gateways for the Management Interface—Specify unique gateways (below) for IPv4
and IPv6 if you have a separate management network connected to the Management interface. For DHCP
IP addressing, the gateway is provided by the DHCP server.
Step 3 Configure the management address, subnet mask or IPv6 prefix, and gateway (if necessary) for IPv4, IPv6,
or both.
You must configure at least one set of properties. Leave one set blank to disable that addressing method.
Select Type > DHCP to obtain the address and gateway through DHCP or IPv6 auto configuration. However,
you cannot use DHCP if you are using the data interfaces as the gateway. In this case, you must use a static
address.
Step 4 (Optional.) If you configure a static IPv4 address, configure a DHCP server on the interface.
If you configure a DHCP server on the management interface, clients on the management network can obtain
their address from the DHCP pool.
a) Click Enable DHCP Server > On.
b) Enter the Address Pool for the server.
287
Configuring the Device Hostname
The address pool is the range of IP addresses from lowest to highest that the server is allowed to provide
to clients that request an address. The range of IP addresses must be on the same subnet as the management
address and cannot include: the IP address of the interface itself, the broadcast address, or the subnet
network address. Specify the start and end address for the pool, separated by a hyphen. For example,
192.168.45.46-192.168.45.254.
Step 5 Click Save, read the warning, and click OK.
Configuring the Device Hostname

You can change the device hostname.
You can also change the hostname in the CLI using the configure network hostname command.
Caution If you change the hostname when connected to the system using the hostname, you will lose access to
the FDM when you save the changes, as they are applied immediately. You will need to reconnect to
the device.
Procedure
Step 1 Click Device, then click the System Settings > Hostname link.
If you are already on the System Settings page, simply click Hostname in the table of contents
Step 2 Enter a new hostname.

Step 3 Click Save.
Configuring Network Time Protocol (NTP)

You must configure Network Time Protocol (NTP) servers to define the time on the system. You configure
NTP servers during initial system setup, but you can change them using the following procedure. If you have
problems with the NTP connection, see Troubleshooting NTP, on page 303.
The FTD device supports NTPv4.
Procedure
Step 1 Click Device, then click the System Settings > NTP link.
If you are already on the System Settings page, simply click NTP in the table of contents
Step 2 In NTP Time Server, select whether you want to use your own or Cisco's time servers.
288
Configuring URL Filtering Preferences
• Default NTP Time Server—If you select this option, the server list shows the server names that are
used for NTP.
• Manually Input—If you select this option, enter the fully qualified domain name or IPv4 or IPv6 address
of the NTP server you want to use. For example, ntp1.example.com or 10.100.10.10. You can add up to
3 NTP servers.
Step 3 Click Save.
Configuring URL Filtering Preferences

The system obtains the URL category and reputation database from Cisco Collective Security Intelligence
(CSI). These preferences control database updates and how the system handles URLs with unknown category
or reputation. You must enable the URL filtering license to set these preferences.
Procedure
Step 1 Click Device, then click the System Settings > URL Filtering Preferences link.
If you are already on the System Settings page, simply click URL Filtering Preferences in the table of
contents
Step 2 Configure the following options:

• Enable Automatic Updates—Allows the system to automatically check for and download updated URL
data, which includes category and reputation information. The system checks for updates every 30
minutes, although the data is typically updated once per day. The default is to enable updates. If you
deselect this option, and you are using category and reputation filtering, periodically enable it to get new
URL data.
• Query Cisco CSI for Unknown URLs—Whether to check with Cisco CSI for updated information for
URLs that do not have category and reputation data in the local URL filtering database. If the lookup
returns this information within a reasonable time limit, it is used when selecting access rules based on
URL conditions. Otherwise, the URL matches the Uncategorized category. Selecting this option is
important for lower-end systems, which install a smaller URL database due to memory limitations.
Step 3 Click Save.
Configuring Cloud Management (Cisco Defense Orchestrator)

You can manage the device using the Cisco Defense Orchestrator (CDO) cloud-based portal.
Using CDO, you can approach device management using the following techniques:
• Initial configuration download—In this approach, you download the initial device configuration from
CDO, but thereafter you configure the device locally using FDM.
289
Configuring Cloud Management (Cisco Defense Orchestrator)
Note After configuring the device using FDM, if you decide you want to instead
manage the device through the cloud, ensure that you duplicate your local
changes in the cloud-based configuration.
• Remote configuration management through the cloud—In this approach, you use CDO to create and
update the device configuration. When using this approach, do not make local changes to the configuration,
because on each cloud deployment, the configuration defined in the cloud replaces the local configuration
on the device. If you make a local change, be sure to repeat the configuration in the cloud-based
configuration if you want to preserve the change.
For more information about how cloud management works, refer to the CDO portal (http://www.cisco.com/
go/cdo) or ask the reseller or partner with whom you are working.
Before you begin

Obtain a registration key for CDO.
If you have already registered the device with Cisco Smart Software Manager (CSSM), we strongly recommend
that you first unregister the device from the Smart Licensing page. You can re-register after you enable CDO
using a token.
Also, ensure that the device has a route to the Internet.
Procedure
Step 1 Click Device, then click the System Settings > Cloud Management link.
If you are already on the System Settings page, simply click Cloud Management in the table of contents.
Step 2 Click Get Started.

Step 3 Paste the key in Registration Key and click Connect.
A registration request is sent to the cloud portal. If the key is valid, and there is a route to the Internet, the
device should be successfully registered with the portal. You can then start using the portal to manage the
device.
If you decide you no longer want to use cloud management, you can select Unregister from the gear drop-down
list.
290
CHAPTER 13
System Management
The following topics explain how to perform system management tasks such as updating system databases
and backing up and restoring the system.
• Installing Software Updates, on page 291
• Backing Up and Restoring the System, on page 295
• Rebooting the System, on page 299
• Troubleshooting the System, on page 300
• Uncommon Management Tasks, on page 310
Installing Software Updates

You can install updates to the system databases and to the system software. The following topics explain how
to install these updates.
Updating System Databases

The system uses several databases to provide advanced services. Cisco provides updates to these databases
so that your security policies use the latest information available.
Overview of System Database Updates

FTD uses the following databases to provide advanced services.
Intrusion rules
As new vulnerabilities become known, the Cisco Talos Intelligence Group (Talos) releases intrusion rule
updates that you can import. These updates affect intrusion rules, preprocessor rules, and the policies
that use the rules.
Intrusion rule updates provide new and updated intrusion rules and preprocessor rules, modified states
for existing rules, and modified default intrusion policy settings. Rule updates may also delete rules,
provide new rule categories and default variables, and modify default variable values.
For changes made by an intrusion rule update to take effect, you must redeploy the configuration.
Intrusion rule updates may be large, so import rules during periods of low network use. On slow networks,
an update attempt might fail, and you will need to retry.
291
Geolocation database (GeoDB)

The Cisco Geolocation Database (GeoDB) is a database of geographical data (such as country, city,
coordinates) associated with routable IP addresses.
GeoDB updates provide updated information on physical locations that your system can associate with
detected routable IP addresses. You can use geolocation data as a condition in access control rules.
The time needed to update the GeoDB depends on your appliance; the installation usually takes 30 to
40 minutes. Although a GeoDB update does not interrupt any other system functions (including the
ongoing collection of geolocation information), the update does consume system resources while it
completes. Consider this when planning your updates.
Vulnerability database (VDB)
The Cisco Vulnerability Database (VDB) is a database of known vulnerabilities to which hosts may be
susceptible, as well as fingerprints for operating systems, clients, and applications. The firewall system
correlates the fingerprints with the vulnerabilities to help you determine whether a particular host increases
your risk of network compromise. The Cisco Talos Intelligence Group (Talos) issues periodic updates
to the VDB.
The time it takes to update vulnerability mappings depends on the number of hosts in your network map.
You may want to schedule the update during low system usage times to minimize the impact of any
system downtime. As a rule of thumb, divide the number of hosts on your network by 1000 to determine
the approximate number of minutes to perform the update.
After you update the VDB, you must redeploy configurations before updated application detectors and
operating system fingerprints can take effect.
URL Category/Reputation Database
The system obtains the URL category and reputation database from Cisco Collective Security Intelligence
(CSI). If you configure URL filtering access control rules that filter on category and reputation, requested
URLs are matched against the database. You can configure database updates and some other URL filtering
preferences on System Settings > URL Filtering Preferences. You cannot manage URL
category/reputation database updates the same way you manage updates for the other system databases.

You can manually retrieve and apply system database updates at your convenience. Updates are retrieved
from the Cisco support site. Thus, there must be a path to the internet from the system's management address.
Note In May 2022 we split the GeoDB into two packages: a country code package that maps IP addresses to
countries/continents, and an IP package that contains additional contextual data associated with routable
IP addresses. The FDM does not and has never used the information in the IP package. This split saves
significant disk space in locally managed FTD deployments. If you are getting the GeoDB from Cisco
yourself, make sure you get the country code package, which has the same file name as the old all-in-one
package: Cisco_GEODB_Update-date-build.
You can also set up a regular schedule to retrieve and apply database updates. Because these updates can be
large, schedule them for times of low network activity.
292
Upgrading FTD Software
Note While a database update is in progress, you might find that the user interface is sluggish to respond to
your actions.
Before you begin

To avoid any potential impact to pending changes, deploy the configuration to the device before manually
updating these databases.
Please be aware that VDB and URL category updates can remove applications or categories. You need to
update any access control or SSL decryption rules that use these deprecated items before you can deploy
changes.
Procedure
Step 1 Click Device, then click View Configuration in the Updates summary.
This opens the Updates page. Information on the page shows the current version for each database and the
last date and time each database was updated.
Step 2 To manually update a database, click Update Now in the section for that database.
After downloading and applying the update, the system automatically re-deploys policies to the device so that
the system can use the updated information.
Step 3 (Optional) To set up a regular database update schedule:

a) Click the Configure link in the section for the desired database. If there is already a schedule, click Edit.
The update schedules for the databases are separate. You must define the schedules separately.
b) Set the update start time:
• The frequency of the update (Daily, Weekly, or Monthly).
• For weekly or monthly, the days of the week or month you want the update to occur.
• The time you want the update to start. The time you specify is adjusted for Daylight Savings Time,
so it will move an hour forward or backward whenever the time is adjusted in your area. You must
edit the schedule at the time change if you want to keep this exact time throughout the year.
c) Click Save.
Note If you want to remove a recurring schedule, click the Edit link to open the scheduling dialog box,
then click the Remove button.

You can install the FTD software upgrades as they become available. The following procedure assumes that
your system is already running the FTD version 6.2.0 or higher and that it is operating normally.
293
Upgrades can be major (A.x), maintenance release (A.x.y), or patch (A.x.y.z). We also may provide hotfixes,
which are minor updates that address particular, urgent issues. A hotfix might not require a reboot, while the
other upgrade types do require a reboot. The system automatically reboots after installation if a reboot is
required. Installing any update can disrupt traffic, so do the installation in off hours.
If you also need to upgrade the FXOS software on the chassis, install the FXOS upgrade before following
this procedure.
You cannot reimage a device, or migrate from ASA software to FTD software, using this procedure.
Note Before installing an update, make sure that you deploy any pending changes. You should also run a
backup and download the backup copy. Note that all upgrades except hot fixes will delete all backup
files retained on the system.
Before you begin

Check the task list and verify there are no tasks running. Please wait until all tasks, such as database updates,
are completed before you install an upgrade. Also, check for any scheduled tasks. No scheduled tasks should
overlap with the upgrade task.
Prior to performing an update, ensure that no deprecated applications are present in application filters, access
rules, or SSL decryption rules. These applications have "(Deprecated)" following the application name. While
it is not possible to add deprecated applications to these objects, a subsequent VDB update can cause previously
valid applications to become deprecated. If this happens, the upgrade will fail, leaving the device in an unusable
state.
Download upgrade files from the Cisco Support & Download site: https://www.cisco.com/go/ftd-software.
• Ensure that you obtain the appropriate upgrade file, whose file type is .sh. Do not download the system
software package or the boot image.
• Do not rename the upgrade file. The system considers renamed files to be invalid.
• You cannot downgrade or uninstall a patch.
• Verify that you are running the required baseline image for the upgrade. For compatibility information,
see the Cisco Secure Firewall Threat Defense Compatibility Guide.
• Read the Cisco Firepower Release Notes for the new version.
Procedure
Step 1 Select Device, then click View Configuration in the Updates summary.
The System Upgrade section shows the currently running software version and any update that you have
already uploaded.
Step 2 Upload the upgrade file.

• If you have not yet uploaded an upgrade file, click Browse and select the file.
• If there is already an uploaded file, but you want to upload a different one, click the Upload Another
File link. You can upload one file only. If you upload a new file, it replaces the old file.
294
Reimaging the Device
• To remove the file, click the delete icon ( ).
Step 3 Click Install to start the installation process.

Information next to the icon indicates whether the device will reboot during installation. You are automatically
logged out of the system. Installation might take 30 minutes or more.
Wait before logging into the system again. The Device Summary, or System monitoring dashboard, should
show the new version.
Note Do not simply refresh the browser window. Instead, delete any path from the URL, and reconnect
to the home page. This ensures that cached information gets refreshed with the latest code.
Step 4 (Optional.) Update the system databases.

If you do not have automatic update jobs configured for Geolocation, Rule, and Vulnerability (VDB) databases,
this is a good time to update them.
Reimaging the Device

Reimaging a device involves wiping out the device configuration and installing a fresh software image. The
intention of reimaging is to have a clean installation with a factory default configuration.
You would reimage the device in these circumstances:
• You want to convert the system from ASA Software to FTD Software. You cannot upgrade a device
running an ASA image to one running a FTD image.
• The device is running a pre-6.1.0 image, and you want to upgrade to 6.1 or a later image and configure
the device using the FDM. You cannot use the FMC to upgrade a pre-6.1 device and then switch to local
management.
• The device is not functioning correctly and all attempts at fixing the configuration have failed.
For information on how to reimage a device, see Reimage the Cisco ASA or Threat Defense Device or the
Threat Defense Quick Start guide for your device model. These guides are available at
http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/support/security/firepower-ngfw/products-installation-guides-list.html.
Backing Up and Restoring the System

You can back up the system configuration so that you can restore the device if the configuration becomes
corrupted due to subsequent miss-configuration or physical mishap.
You can restore a backup onto a replacement device only if the two devices are the same model and are running
the same version of the software (including the build number, not just the same point release). Do not use the
backup and restore process to copy configurations between appliances. A backup file contains information
that uniquely identifies an appliance, so that it cannot be shared in this manner.
295
Backing Up the System Immediately
Note The backup does not include the management IP address configuration. Thus, when you recover a backup
file, the management address is not replaced from the backup copy. This ensures that any changes you
made to the address are preserved, and also makes it possible to restore the configuration on a different
device on a different network segment.
Backups include the configuration only, and not the system software. If you need to completely reimage the
device, you need to reinstall the software, then you can upload a backup and recover the configuration.
The configuration database is locked during backup. You cannot make configuration changes during a backup,
although you can view policies, dashboards, and so forth. During a restore, the system is completely unavailable.
The table on the Backup and Restore page lists all existing backup copies that are available on the system,
including the file name of the backup, the date and time it was created, and the file size. The type of backup
(manual, scheduled, or recurring) is based on how you directed the system to create that backup copy.
Tip Backup copies are created on the system itself. You must manually download backup copies and store
them on secure servers to ensure that you have the backup copies you need for disaster recovery. The
system maintains up to 3 backup copies on the device. New backups replace the oldest backup.
The following topics explain how to manage backup and restore operations.
Backing Up the System Immediately

You can start a backup whenever you want.
Procedure
Step 1 Click Device, then click View Configuration in the Backup and Restore summary.
This opens the Backup and Restore page. The table lists all existing backup copies that are available on the
system.
Step 2 Click Manual Backup > Back Up Now.

Step 3 Enter a name for the backup and optionally a description.
If you decide you want to perform the backup at a future time rather than immediately, you can click Schedule
instead.
Step 4 Click Back Up Now.

The system starts the backup process. When the backup is complete, the backup file will appear in the table.
You can then download the backup copy to your system and store it elsewhere, if desired.
You can leave the Backup and Restore page after initiating the backup. However, the system will likely be
sluggish, and you should consider pausing your work to allow the backup to complete.
296
Backing Up the System at a Scheduled Time
In addition, the system will acquire locks on the configuration database during parts or all of the backup,
which can prevent you from making changes for the duration of the backup process.
Backing Up the System at a Scheduled Time

You can set up a scheduled backup to back up the system at a specific future date and time. A scheduled
backup is a one-time occurrence. If you want to create a backup schedule to regularly create backups, configure
a recurring backup instead of a scheduled backup.
Note If you want to delete the schedule for a future backup, edit the schedule and click Remove.
Procedure
Step 2 Click Scheduled Backup > Schedule a Backup.
If you already have a scheduled backup, click Scheduled Backup > Edit .

Step 4 Select the date and time for the backup.
Step 5 Click Schedule.
When the selected date and time arrives, the system takes a backup. When completed, the backup copy is
listed in the table of backups.
Setting Up a Recurring Backup Schedule

You can set up a recurring backup to back up the system on a regular schedule. For example, you could take
a backup every Friday at midnight. A recurring backup schedule helps ensure that you always have a set of
recent backups.
Note If you want to delete a recurring schedule, edit the schedule and click Remove.
Procedure
Step 2 Click Recurring Backup > Configure.
If you already have a recurring backup configured, click Recurring Backup > Edit.
297
Restoring a Backup

Step 4 Select the Frequency and the related schedule:
• Daily—Select the time of day. A backup is taken every day at the scheduled time.
• Weekly—Select the days of the week and the time of day. A backup is taken on each day you select at
the scheduled time. For example, you could schedule backups for every Monday, Wednesday, and Friday
at 23:00 hours (11 PM).
• Monthly—Select the days of the month and the time of day. A backup is taken on each day you select
at the scheduled time. For example, you could schedule backups for the first (1), fifteenth (15), and
twenty-eighth (28) days of the month at 23:00 hours (11 PM).
The time you specify is adjusted for Daylight Savings Time, so it will move an hour forward or backward
whenever the time is adjusted in your area. You must edit the schedule at the time change if you want to keep
this exact time throughout the year.
Step 5 Click Save.

When the selected dates and times arrive, the system takes a backup. When completed, the backup copy is
listed in the table of backups.
The recurring schedule continues to take backups until you change or remove it.
Restoring a Backup
You can restore backups as needed so long as the device is running the same software version (including build
number) as it was running when you took the backup. You can restore a backup onto a replacement device
only if the two devices are the same model and are running the same version of the software (including build
number).
If the backup copy you want to restore is not already on the device, you must upload the backup first before
restoring it.
During a restore, the system is completely unavailable.
Note The backup does not include the management IP address configuration. Thus, when you recover a backup
file, the management address is not replaced from the backup copy. This ensures that any changes you
made to the address are preserved, and also makes it possible to restore the configuration on a different
device on a different network segment.
Procedure
This opens the Backup and Restore page. The table lists all existing backup copies that are available on the
system.
Step 2 If the backup copy that you want to restore is not in the list of available backups, click Upload > Browse and
upload the backup copy.
298
Managing Backup Files
Step 3 Click the restore icon ( ) for the file.

You are asked to confirm the restore. By default, the backup copy will be deleted after the restore, but you
can select Do not remove the backup after restoring to keep it before proceeding with the restore.
The system will reboot after restore completes.
Note After the system reboots, it automatically checks for Vulnerability Database (VDB), Geolocation,
and Rules database updates, and downloads them if needed. Because these updates can be large,
the initial attempt might fail. Please check the task list, and if a download failed, manually download
an update as described in Updating System Databases, on page 292. The system also redeploys
policies. Any subsequent deployment will fail until the update is successful.
Managing Backup Files

As you create new backups, the backup files are listed on the Backup and Restore page. Backup copies are
not retained indefinitely: as disk space usage on the device reaches the maximum threshold, older backup
copies are deleted to make room for newer ones. In addition, when you install any upgrade other than a hot
fix, all backup files are deleted. Thus, you should regularly manage the backup files to ensure that you have
the specific backup copies you most want to keep.
You can do the following to manage your backup copies:
• Download files to secure storage—To download a backup file to your workstation, click the download
icon ( ) for the file. You can then move the file to your secure file storage.
• Upload a backup file to the system—If you want to restore a backup copy that is no longer available on
the device, click Upload > Browse File and upload it from your workstation. You can then restore it.
Note Uploaded files may be renamed to match the original filename. Also, if
there are more than 10 backup copies already on the system, the oldest one
will be deleted to make room for the uploaded file. You cannot upload files
that were created by an older software version.
• Restore a backup—To restore a backup copy, click the restore icon ( ) for the file. The system is
unavailable during restore, and will reboot after restore completes. You should deploy the configuration
after the system is up and running.
• Delete a backup file—If you no longer want a particular backup, click the delete icon ( ) for the file.
You are asked to confirm the deletion. Once deleted, you cannot recover the backup file.
Rebooting the System

If you believe the system is not performing correctly and other efforts to resolve the problem have failed, you
can reboot the device. You must reboot the device through the CLI; you cannot reboot the device through the
FDM.
299
Troubleshooting the System
Procedure
Step 1 Use an SSH client to open a connection to the management IP address and log into the device CLI with a
username that has configuration CLI access. For example, the admin username.
Step 2 Enter the reboot command.
Example:
> reboot
Troubleshooting the System

The following topics address some system-level troubleshooting tasks and capabilities. For information on
troubleshooting a specific feature, such as access control, see the chapter for the feature.
Pinging Addresses to Test Connectivity

Ping is a simple command that lets you determine if a particular address is alive and responsive. This means
that basic connectivity is working. However, other policies running on a device could prevent specific types
of traffic from successfully getting through a device. You can use ping by logging into the device CLI.
Note Because the system has multiple interfaces, you can control the interface used for pinging an address.
You must ensure that you are using the right command, so that you are testing the connectivity that
matters. For example, the system must be able to reach the Cisco license server through the virtual
Management interface, so you must use the ping system command to test the connection. If you use
ping, you are testing whether an address can be reached through the data interfaces, which might not
give you the same result.
The normal ping uses ICMP packets to test the connection. If your network prohibits ICMP, you can use a
TCP ping instead (for data interface pings only).
Following are the main options for pinging network addresses.
Pinging an address through the virtual Management interface
Use the ping system command.
ping system host
The host can be an IP address or fully-qualified domain name (FQDN), such as www.example.com.
Unlike pings through the data interfaces, there is no default count for system pings. The ping continues
until you stop it using Ctrl+c. For example:
> ping system www.cisco.com

PING origin-www.cisco.COM (72.163.4.161) 56(84) bytes of data.
64 bytes from www1.cisco.com (72.163.4.161): icmp_seq=1 ttl=242 time=10.6 ms
300
Pinging Addresses to Test Connectivity

^C
--- origin-www.cisco.COM ping statistics ---
4 packets transmitted, 4 received, 0% packet loss, time 3003ms
rtt min/avg/max/mdev = 8.139/8.927/10.650/1.003 ms
>
Pinging an address through a data interface using the routing table

Use the ping command. Without specifying an interface, you are testing whether the system can generically
find a route to the host. Because this is how the system normally routes traffic, this is typically what you
want to test.
ping host
Specify the IP address of the host. If you only know the FQDN, use the nslookup fqdn-name command
to determine the IP address. For example:
> ping 171.69.38.1

Sending 5, 100-byte ICMP Echos to 171.69.38.1, timeout is 2 seconds:
!!!!!
Success rate is 100 percent (5/5), round-trip min/avg/max = 1/2/10 ms
Note You can specify the timeout, repeat count, packet size, and even the data pattern to send. Use the
help indicator, ?, in the CLI to see the available options.
Pinging an address through a specific data interface

Use the ping interface if_name command if you want to test connectivity through a specific data interface.
You can also specify the diagnostic interface using this command, but not the virtual management
interface.
ping interface if_name host
> ping interface inside 171.69.38.1

Sending 5, 100-byte ICMP Echos to 171.69.38.1, timeout is 2 seconds:
!!!!!
Pinging an address through a data interface using TCP ping

Use the ping tcp command. A TCP ping sends SYN packets and considers the ping successful if the
destination sends a SYN-ACK packet.
ping tcp [interface if_name] host port
You must specify the host and TCP port. If you only know the FQDN, use the nslookup fqdn-name
command to determine the IP address.
You can optionally specify the interface, which is the source interface of the ping, not the interface
through which to send the pings. This type of ping always uses the routing table.
301
Tracing Routes to Hosts
A TCP ping sends SYN packets and considers the ping successful if the destination sends a SYN-ACK
packet. For example:
> ping tcp 10.0.0.1 21

Type escape sequence to abort.
No source specified. Pinging from identity interface.
Sending 5 TCP SYN requests to 10.0.0.1 port 21
from 10.0.0.10, timeout is 2 seconds:
!!!!!
Note You can also specify the timeout, repeat count, and the source address for the TCP ping. Use the
help indicator, ?, in the CLI to see the available options.
Tracing Routes to Hosts

If you are having problems sending traffic to an IP address, you can trace the route to the host to determine
if there is a problem on the network path. A traceroute works by sending UDP packets on an invalid port, or
ICMPv6 echoes, to a destination. The routers along the way to the destination respond with an ICMP Time
Exceeded Message, and report that error to traceroute. Each node receives three packets, so you get three
chances per node to get an informative result. You can use traceroute by logging into the device CLI.
Note There are separate commands for tracing a route through a data interface (traceroute) or through the
virtual management interface (traceroute system). Ensure that you use the right command.
The following table describes the possible result per packet as displayed in the output.
Output Symbol Description
* No response was received for the probe within the timeout period.
nn msec For each node, the round-trip time (in milliseconds) for the specified number of
probes.
!N. ICMP network unreachable.
!H ICMP host unreachable.
!P ICMP protocol unreachable.
!A ICMP administratively prohibited.
? Unknown ICMP error.
Tracing a route through the virtual management interface

Use the traceroute system command.
traceroute system destination
302
Troubleshooting NTP
The host can be an IPv4/IPv6 address or fully-qualified domain name (FQDN), such as www.example.com.
For example:
> traceroute system www.example.com

traceroute to www.example.com (172.163.4.161), 30 hops max, 60 byte packets
1 192.168.0.254 (192.168.0.254) 0.213 ms 0.310 ms 0.328 ms
2 10.88.127.1 (10.88.127.1) 0.677 ms 0.739 ms 0.899 ms
3 lab-gw1.example.com (10.89.128.25) 0.638 ms 0.856 ms 0.864 ms
4 04-bb-gw1.example.com (10.152.240.65) 1.169 ms 1.355 ms 1.409 ms
5 wan-gw1.example.com (10.152.240.33) 0.712 ms 0.722 ms 0.790 ms
6 wag-gw1.example.com (10.152.240.73) 13.868 ms 10.760 ms 11.187 ms
7 rbb-gw2.example.com (172.30.4.85) 7.202 ms 7.301 ms 7.101 ms
8 rbb-gw1.example.com (172.30.4.77) 8.162 ms 8.225 ms 8.373 ms
9 sbb-gw1.example.com (172.16.16.210) 7.396 ms 7.548 ms 7.653 ms
10 corp-gw2.example.com (172.16.16.58) 7.413 ms 7.310 ms 7.431 ms
11 dmzbb-gw2.example.com (172.16.0.78) 7.835 ms 7.705 ms 7.702 ms
12 dmzdcc-gw2.example.com (172.16.0.190) 8.126 ms 8.193 ms 11.559 ms
13 dcz05n-gw1.example.com (172.16.2.106) 11.729 ms 11.728 ms 11.939 ms
14 www1.example.com (172.16.4.161) 11.645 ms 7.958 ms 7.936 ms
Tracing a route through a data interface

Use the traceroute command.
traceroute destination
> traceroute 209.165.200.225

Tracing the route to 209.165.200.225
1 10.83.194.1 0 msec 10 msec 0 msec
2 10.83.193.65 0 msec 0 msec 0 msec
3 10.88.193.101 0 msec 10 msec 0 msec
4 10.88.193.97 0 msec 0 msec 10 msec
5 10.88.239.9 0 msec 10 msec 0 msec
6 10.88.238.65 10 msec 10 msec 0 msec
7 172.16.7.221 70 msec 70 msec 80 msec
8 209.165.200.225 70 msec 70 msec 70 msec
Note You can specify the timeout, time to live, number of packets per node, and even the IP address or
interface to use as the source of the traceroute. Use the help indicator, ?, in the CLI to see the
available options.
Troubleshooting NTP
The system relies on accurate and consistent time to function correctly and to ensure that events and other
data points are handled accurately. You must configure at least one, but ideally three, Network Time Protocol
(NTP) servers to ensure the system always has reliable time information.
The device summary connection diagram (click Device in the main menu) shows the status of the connection
to the NTP server. If the status is yellow or orange, then there is an issue with the connection to the configured
servers. If the connection problem persists (it is not just a momentary issue), try the following.
303
Troubleshooting NTP
• First, ensure that you have at least three NTP servers configured on Device > System Settings > NTP.
Although this is not a requirement, reliability is greatly enhanced if you have at least three NTP servers.
• Ensure that there is a network path between the management interface IP address (defined on Device >
System Settings > Management Interface) and the NTP servers.
• If the management interface gateway is the data interfaces, you can configure static routes to the
NTP servers on Device > Routing if the default route is not adequate.
• If you set an explicit management interface gateway, log into the device CLI and use the ping system
command to test whether there is a network path to each NTP server.
• Log into the device CLI and check the status of the NTP servers with the following commands.
• show ntp—This command shows basic information about the NTP servers and their availability.
However, the connectivity status in the FDM uses additional information to indicate the status, so
there can be inconsistency in what this command shows and what the connectivity status diagram
shows.
• system support ntp—This command includes the output of show ntp plus the output of the standard
NTP command ntpq, which is documented with the NTP protocol. Use this command if you need
to confirm NTP synchronization.
Look for the section “Results of ‘ntpq -pn.’ For example, you might see something like the following:
Results of 'ntpq -pn'

remote : +216.229.0.50
refid : 129.7.1.66
st : 2
t : u
when : 704
poll : 1024
reach : 377
delay : 90.455
offset : 2.954
jitter : 2.473
In this example, the + before the NTP server address indicates that it is a potential candidate. An
asterisk here, *, indicates the current time source peer.
The NTP daemon (NTPD) uses a sliding window of eight samples from each one of the peers and
picks out one sample, then the clock selection determines the true chimers and the false tickers.
NTPD then determines the round-trip distance (the offset of a candidate must not be over one-half
the round trip delay). If connection delays, packet loss, or server issues cause one or all the candidates
to be rejected, you would see long delays in the synchronization. The adjustment also occurs over
a very long period of time: the clock offset and oscillator errors must be resolved by the clock
discipline algorithm and this can take hours.
Note If the refid is .LOCL., this indicates the peer is an undisciplined local clock,
that is, it is using its local clock only to set the time. The FDM always marks
the NTP connection yellow (not synchronized) if the selected peer is .LOCL.
Normally, NTP does not select a .LOCL. candidate if a better one is
available, which is why you should configure at least three servers.
304
Troubleshooting DNS for the Management Interface

You must configure at least one DNS server for use by the Management interface. The server is needed for
cloud connections to services such as smart licensing, database updates (such as GeoDB, rules, and VDB),
and any other activity that needs domain name resolution.
Configuring a DNS server is rather trivial. You simply enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers you use
when you initially configure the device. You can later change them on the Device > System Settings > DNS
Server page.
However, the system can fail to resolve fully-qualified domain names (FQDN) due to network connectivity
issues or problems with the DNS server itself. If you find the system cannot use your DNS servers, consider
the following actions to identify and resolve the problem.
Procedure
Step 1 Determine if you have a problem.

a) Use SSH to log into the device CLI.
b) Enter ping system www.cisco.com. If you get an “unknown host” message like the following, then the
system could not resolve the domain name. If the ping is successful, then you are done: DNS is working.
(Press Ctrl+C to stop the ping.)
> ping system www.cisco.com

ping: unknown host www.cisco.com
Note It is critical that you include the system keyword in the ping command. The system keyword
sends the ping through the management IP address, which is the only interface that uses the
management DNS server. Pinging www.cisco.com is also a good option, because you need a
route to that server for smart licensing and updates.
Step 2 Verify the configuration for the management interface.

a) Click Device > System Settings > Management Interface, and verify the following. If you make changes,
the changes are applied immediately on clicking Save. If you change the Management address, you will
need to reconnect and log back in.
• The gateway IP address is correct for the Management network. If you using the data interfaces as
the gateway, subsequent steps will verify that configuration.
• If you are not using the data interfaces as a gateway, verify that the Management IP address/subnet
mask and the gateway IP address are on the same subnet.
b) Click Device > System Settings > DNS Server and verify that the right DNS servers are configured.
If you are deploying the device on your network edge, your service provider might have specific
requirements about the DNS server you can use.
c) If you are using the data interfaces as the gateway, verify that you have the required routes.
You need a default route for 0.0.0.0. You might need additional routes if the DNS server is not available
through the gateway for the default route. There are two basic situations:
305
• If you are using DHCP to obtain an address for the outside interface, and you selected the Obtain
Default Route using DHCP option, the default route is not visible in the FDM. From SSH, enter
show route and verify that there is a route for 0.0.0.0. Because this is the default configuration for
the outside interface, this is a likely situation that you might encounter. (Go to Device > Interfaces
to view the configuration of the outside interface.)
• If you are using a static IP address on the outside interface, or you are not obtaining the default route
from DHCP, then open Device > Routing. Verify that the correct gateway is being used for the
default route.
If the DNS server cannot be reached through the default route, you must define a static route to it on the
Routing page. Note that you should not add routes for directly connected networks, that is, networks that
are connected directly to any of the system’s data interfaces, as the system can route to those networks
automatically.
Also verify that there are no static routes that are misdirecting traffic to the server out the wrong interface.
d) If the deployment button indicates that there are undeployed changes, deploy them now and wait for
deployment to complete.
e) Retest ping system www.cisco.com. If you still have problems, continue with the next step.
Step 3 In the SSH session, enter nslookup www.cisco.com.
• If nslookup indicates that it got a response from the DNS server, but the server could not find the name,
it means that DNS is configured correctly, but the DNS server you are using does not have an address
for the FQDN. The response would look similar to the following:
> nslookup www.cisco.com

Server: 10.163.47.11
Address: 10.163.47.11#53
** server can't find www.cisco.com: NXDOMAIN
Resolution: In this case, you need to configure a different DNS server, or get the one you have updated
so it can resolve the FQDNs you need resolved. Work with your network administrator or ISP to get the
IP address of a DNS server that will work for your network.
• If you get a “connection timed out” message, then the system cannot reach your DNS servers, or all of
the DNS servers are currently down and not responding (which is less likely). Continue with the next
step.
> nslookup www.cisco.com

; ; connection timed out; no servers could be reached
Step 4 Use the traceroute system DNS_server_ip_address command to trace the route to the DNS server.
For example, if the DNS server is 10.100.10.1, enter:
> traceroute system 10.100.10.1
306
Analyzing CPU and Memory Usage
Following are the possible results:

• The traceroute completes and reaches the DNS server. In this case, there is in fact a route to the DNS
server and the system can reach it. Thus, there is no routing problem. However, for some reason, DNS
requests to this server are not getting a response.
Resolution: There is a possibility that a router or firewall along the path is dropping UDP/53 traffic,
which is the port used for DNS. You might try a DNS server along a different network path. This is a
difficult problem to resolve, as you will need to determine which node is blocking traffic, and work with
the system administrator to get the access rules changed.
• The traceroute cannot reach even one node, which would look like the following:

traceroute to 10.100.10.1 (10.100.10.1), 30 hops max, 60 byte packets
1 * * *
2 * * *
3 * * *
(and so forth)
Resolution: In this case, the routing problem is within your system. Try doing a ping system for the
gateway IP address. Re-verify the configuration of the management interface as mentioned in earlier
steps, and ensure that you have the required gateways and routes configured.
• The traceroute makes it through a few nodes before it can no longer resolve the route, which would look
like the following:

traceroute to 10.100.10.1 (10.100.10.1), 30 hops max, 60 byte packets
1 192.168.0.254 (192.168.0.254) 0.475 ms 0.532 ms 0.542 ms
2 10.88.127.1 (10.88.127.1) 0.803 ms 1.434 ms 1.443 ms
3 site04-lab-gw1.example.com (10.89.128.25) 1.390 ms 1.399 ms 1.435 ms
4 * * *
5 * * *
6 * * *
Resolution: In this case, routing breaks down at the last node. You might need to work with the system
administrator to get correct routes installed in that node. However, if there is intentionally no route to
the DNS server through the node, you need to change your gateway, or create your own static route, to
point to a router that can route traffic to the DNS server.
Analyzing CPU and Memory Usage

To view system-level information about CPU and memory usage, select Monitoring > System and look for
the CPU and Memory bar graphs. These graphs show information collected through the CLI using the show
cpu system and show memory system commands.
If you log into the CLI, you can use additional versions of these commands to view other information. Typically,
you would look at this information only if you are having persistent problems with usage, or at the direction
of the Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC). Much of the detailed information is complex and requires
TAC interpretation.
307
Viewing Logs
Following are some highlights of what you can examine. You can find more detailed information about these
commands in Cisco Firepower Threat Defense Command Reference at http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/
security/firepower/command_ref/b_Command_Reference_for_Firepower_Threat_Defense.html.
• show cpu displays data plane CPU utilization.
• show cpu core displays usage for each CPU core separately.
• show cpu detailed displays additional per-core and overall data plane CPU usage.
• show memory displays data plane memory usage.
Note Some of the keywords (not mentioned above) require that you first set up profiling or other features
using the cpu or memory commands. Use these features at the direction of TAC only.
Viewing Logs
The system logs information for a wide variety of actions. You can use the system support view-files command
to open a system log. Use this command while working with the Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC)
so that they can help you interpret the output and to select the appropriate log to view.
The command presents a menu for selecting a log. Use the following commands to navigate the wizard:
• To change to a sub-directory, type in the name of the directory and press Enter.
• To select a file to view, enter s at the prompt. You are then prompted for a file name. You must type the
complete name, and capitalization matters. The file list shows you the size of the log, which you might
consider before opening very large logs.
• Press the space bar when you see --More-- to see the next page of log entries; press Enter to see just the
next log entry. When you reach the end of the log, you are taken to the main menu. The --More-- line
shows you the size of the log and how much of it you have viewed. Use Ctrl+C to close the log and
exit the command if you do not want to page through the entire log.
• Type b to go up one level in the structure to the menu.
If you want to leave the log open so you can see new messages as they are added, use the tail-logs command
instead of system support view-files.
The following example shows how view the cisco/audit.log file, which tracks attempts to log into the system.
The file listing starts with directories at the top, then a list of files in the current directory.
> system support view-files
===View Logs===
============================
Directory: /ngfw/var/log
----------sub-dirs----------
cisco
mojo
removed_packages
setup
connector
308
Creating a Troubleshooting File
sf
scripts
packages
removed_scripts
httpd
-----------files------------
2016-10-14 18:12:04.514783 | 5371 | SMART_STATUS_sda.log
2016-10-14 18:12:04.524783 | 353 | SMART_STATUS_sdb.log
2016-10-11 21:32:23.848733 | 326517 | action_queue.log
2016-10-06 16:00:56.620019 | 1018 | br1.down.log
<list abbreviated>
([b] to go back or [s] to select a file to view, [Ctrl+C] to exit)

Type a sub-dir name to list its contents: cisco
============================
Directory: /ngfw/var/log/cisco
-----------files------------
2017-02-13 22:44:42.394907 | 472 | audit.log
2017-02-13 23:40:30.858198 | 903615 | ev_stats.log.0
2017-02-09 18:14:26.870361 | 0 | ev_stats.log.0.lck
2017-02-13 05:24:00.682601 | 1024338 | ev_stats.log.1
2017-02-12 08:41:00.478103 | 1024338 | ev_stats.log.2
2017-02-11 11:58:00.260805 | 1024218 | ev_stats.log.3
2017-02-09 18:12:13.828607 | 95848 | firstboot.ngfw-onbox.log
2017-02-13 23:40:00.240359 | 6523160 | ngfw-onbox.log
([b] to go back or [s] to select a file to view, [Ctrl+C] to exit)

Type a sub-dir name to list its contents: s
Type the name of the file to view ([b] to go back, [Ctrl+C] to exit)
> audit.log
2017-02-09 18:59:26 - SubSystem:LOGIN, User:admin, IP:10.24.42.205, Message:Login successful,
2017-02-13 22:44:36 - SubSystem:LOGIN, User:admin, IP:10.24.111.72, Message:Login failed,

2017-02-13 22:44:42 - SubSystem:LOGIN, User:admin, IP:10.24.111.72, Message:Unlocked account.,
<remaining log truncated>
Creating a Troubleshooting File

Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC) personnel might ask you to submit system log information when
you submit a problem report. This information assists them with diagnosing the problem. You do not need to
submit a diagnostics file unless asked to do so.
The following procedure explains how to create and download the diagnostics file.
Procedure
Step 1 Click Device.
309
Uncommon Management Tasks
Step 2 Under Troubleshooting, click Request File to be Created or Re-Request File to be Created (if you have
created one before).
The system starts generating the diagnostic file. You can go to other pages and return here to check status.
When the file is ready, the date and time of the file creation is shown along with a download button.
Step 3 When the file is ready, click the download button.

The file is downloaded to your workstation using your browser's standard download method.
Uncommon Management Tasks

The following topics cover actions you would not perform often, if ever. All of these actions result in erasing
your device configuration. Ensure that the device is not currently providing critical services to a production
network before making these changes.
Switching Between Local and Remote Management

You can configure and manage your device using the local FDM, which is hosted directly on the device, or
remotely, using the FMC multiple device manager. You might want to use the remote manager if you want
to configure features not supported by the FDM, or if you need the power and analysis capabilities available
in the FMC.
You also must use the FMC if you want to run the device in transparent firewall mode.
You can switch between local and remote management without reinstalling the software. Before switching
from remote to local management, verify that the FDM meets all of your configuration requirements.
Caution Switching managers erases the device configuration and returns the system to the default configuration.
However, management IP address and hostname are preserved.
Before you begin

If you registered the device, especially if you enabled any feature licenses, you must unregister the device
through the FDM before switching to remote management. Unregistering the device frees the base license
and all feature licenses. If you do not unregister the device, those licenses remain assigned to the device in
Cisco Smart Software Manager. See Unregistering the Device, on page 68.
Procedure
It is important that you follow this process while connected to the management IP address. When using the
FDM, you have the option to manage the device through the IP address on a data interface. However, you
must use the Management physical port and management IP address to manage the device remotely.
310
Switching Between Local and Remote Management
If you cannot connect to the management IP address, address the following:

• Ensure that the Management physical port is wired to a functioning network.
• Ensure that the management IP address and gateway are configured for the management network. From
the FDM, configure the address and gateway on Device > System Settings > Management Interface.
(In the CLI, use the configure network ipv4/ipv6 manual command.)
Note Ensure that you are using an external gateway for the management IP address. You cannot use
the data interfaces as a gateway when using a remote manager.
Step 2 To switch from local to remote management:

a) Verify you are currently in local management mode.
> show managers

Managed locally.
b) Configure the remote manager.

configure manager add {hostname | IPv4_address | IPv6_address | DONTRESOLVE} regkey [nat_id]
Where:
• {hostname | IPv4_address | IPv6_address | DONTRESOLVE} specifies the DNS host name or IP
address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the FMC that manages this device. If the FMC is not directly addressable,
use DONTRESOLVE. If you use DONTRESOLVE, nat_id is required.
• regkey is the unique alphanumeric registration key required to register a device to the FMC.
• nat_id is an optional alphanumeric string used during the registration process between the FMC and
the device. It is required if the hostname is set to DONTRESOLVE.
For example, to use the manager at 192.168.0.123 with the registration key secret, enter the following:
> configure manager add 192.168.0.123 secret

If you enabled any feature licenses, you must disable them in
Firepower Device Manager before switching to remote management.
Otherwise, those licenses remain assigned to the device in Cisco
Smart Software Manager.
Do you want to continue [yes/no] yes
Manager successfully configured.
Please make note of reg_key as this will be required while adding
Device in FMC.
> show managers

Host : 192.168.0.123
Registration Key : ****
Registration : pending
RPC Status :
Note While registration is still pending, you can use configure manager delete to cancel the
registration and then configure manager local to return to local management.
c) Log into the FMC and add the device.

See the FMC online help for details.
311
Changing the Firewall Mode
Step 3 To switch from remote management to local management:

a) Verify you are currently in remote management mode.
> show managers

Host : 192.168.0.123
RPC Status :
b) Delete the remote manager and go into no manager mode.

You cannot go directly from remote management to local management. Use the configure manager
delete command to remove the manager.
> configure manager delete

Deleting task list
Manager successfully deleted.
>
> show managers
No managers configured.
c) Configure the local manager.

configure manager local
For example:
> configure manager local

Deleting task list
> show managers

Managed locally.
You can now use a web browser to open the local manager at https://management-IP-address.

The FTD firewall can run in routed or transparent mode. A routed mode firewall is a routed hop and acts as
a default gateway for hosts that connect to one of its screened subnets. A transparent firewall, on the other
hand, is a Layer 2 firewall that acts like a "bump in the wire," or a "stealth firewall," and is not seen as a router
hop to connected devices.
The local FDM supports routed mode only. If, however, you need to run the device in transparent mode, you
can change the firewall mode and start managing the device with the FMC. Conversely, you can convert a
transparent mode device to routed mode, and then you have the option to configure it with the local manager
(you can also manage routed mode devices using FMC).
Regardless of local or remote management, you must use the device CLI to change the mode.
The following procedure explains how to change the mode when using the local manager, or when intending
to use the local manager.
312
Caution Changing firewall mode erases the device configuration and returns the system to the default configuration.
However, management IP address and hostname are preserved.
Before you begin

If you are converting to transparent mode, install the FMC before changing the firewall mode.
If you enabled any feature licenses, you must disable them in the FDM before deleting the local manager and
switching to remote management. Otherwise, those licenses remain assigned to the device in Cisco Smart
Software Manager. See Enabling or Disabling Optional Licenses, on page 67.
Procedure
It is important that you follow this process while connected to the management IP address. When using the
FDM, you have the option to manage the device through the IP address on a data interface. However, you
must use the Management physical port and management IP address to manage the device remotely.
If you cannot connect to the management IP address, address the following:
• Ensure that the Management physical port is wired to a functioning network.
• Ensure that the management IP address and gateway are configured for the management network. From
the FDM, configure the address and gateway on Device > System Settings > Management Interface.
(In the CLI, use the configure network ipv4/ipv6 manual command.)
Note Ensure that you are using an external gateway for the management IP address. You cannot use
the data interfaces as a gateway when using a remote manager.
Step 2 To change the mode from routed to transparent and use remote management:
a) Disable local management and enter no manager mode.
You cannot change the firewall mode while there is an active manager. Use the configure manager delete
command to remove the manager.

Firepower Device Manager before deleting the local manager.
Otherwise, those licenses remain assigned to the device in
Cisco Smart Software Manager.
Do you want to continue[yes/no] yes
Deleting task list
>
> show managers
b) Change the firewall mode to transparent.
313
configure firewall transparent

Example:
> configure firewall transparent

This will destroy the current interface configurations,
are you sure that you want to proceed? [y/N] y
The firewall mode was changed successfully.
c) Configure the remote manager.

configure manager add {hostname | IPv4_address | IPv6_address | DONTRESOLVE} regkey [nat_id]
Where:
• {hostname | IPv4_address | IPv6_address | DONTRESOLVE} specifies the DNS host name or IP
address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the FMC that manages this device. If the FMC is not directly addressable,
use DONTRESOLVE. If you use DONTRESOLVE, nat_id is required.
• regkey is the unique alphanumeric registration key required to register a device to the FMC.
• nat_id is an optional alphanumeric string used during the registration process between the FMC and
the device. It is required if the hostname is set to DONTRESOLVE.
For example, to use the manager at 192.168.0.123 with the registration key secret, enter the following:
> configure manager add 192.168.0.123 secret

Manager successfully configured.
Please make note of reg_key as this will be required while adding
Device in FMC.
> show managers

Host : 192.168.0.123
RPC Status :
d) Log into the FMC and add the device.

See the FMC online help for details.
Step 3 To change the mode from transparent to routed and convert to local management:
a) Deregister the device from the FMC.
b) Access the FTD device CLI, preferably from the console port.
Because changing the mode erases your configuration, the management IP address will revert to the
default, so you might lose an SSH connection to the management IP address after changing modes.
c) Change the firewall mode to routed.
configure firewall routed
Example:
> configure firewall routed

This will destroy the current interface configurations,
are you sure that you want to proceed? [y/N] y
The firewall mode was changed successfully.
314
Resetting the Configuration
d) Enable the local manager.

For example:

Deleting task list
> show managers

Managed locally.
You can now use a web browser to open the local manager at https://management-IP-address.

You can reset the system configuration to the factory default if you want to start over. Although you cannot
directly reset the configuration, deleting and adding the manager clears the configuration.
If your intention is to wipe away the configuration and then recover a backup, ensure that you have already
download the backup copy you want to restore. You will need to upload it after resetting the system so that
you can restore it.
Before you begin

If you enabled any feature licenses, you must disable them in the FDM before deleting the local manager.
Otherwise, those licenses remain assigned to the device in Cisco Smart Software Manager. See Enabling or
Disabling Optional Licenses, on page 67.
Procedure
Step 2 Use the configure manager delete command to remove the manager.

Device Manager before deleting the local manager.
Otherwise, those licenses remain assigned to the device in Cisco
Smart Software Manager.
Do you want to continue[yes/no] yes
Deleting task list
>
> show managers
Step 3 Configure the local manager.

315
For example:

Deleting task list
> show managers

Managed locally.
You can now use a web browser to open the local manager at https://management-IP-address. By clearing
the configuration, you will be prompted to complete the device setup wizard.
316

FPTD FDM Config Guide 620

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FPTD FDM Config Guide 620

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FPTD FDM Config Guide 620

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cisco Firepower Threat Defense Configuration Guide for Firepower

Device Manager, Version 6.2

CHAPTER 1 Getting Started 1

Is This Guide for You? 1

Logging Into the System 4

Viewing Interface and Management Status 28

CHAPTER 2 Best Practices: Use Cases for FTD 31

How to Configure the Device in FDM 31

CHAPTER 3 Licensing the System 63

CHAPTER 4 Monitoring the Device 69

Enable Logging to Obtain Traffic Statistics 69

PART I The Basics 97

About FTD Interfaces 99

Configure Advanced Interface Options 113

CHAPTER 7 Routing 117

Routing Overview 117

PART II Security Policies 123

CHAPTER 8 Identity Policies 125

Identity Policy Overview 125

Configure the Active Authentication Captive Portal 130

CHAPTER 9 Access Control 139

Access Control Overview 139

URL Criteria 153

CHAPTER 10 Network Address Translation (NAT) 161

Why Use NAT? 161

About Dynamic NAT 173

DNS 64 Reply Modification 233

PART III Virtual Private Networks (VPN) 247

CHAPTER 11 Site-to-Site VPN 249

VPN Basics 249

PART IV System Administration 279

CHAPTER 12 System Settings 281

Severity Levels 283

CHAPTER 13 System Management 291

Overview of System Database Updates 291

Resetting the Configuration 315

Is This Guide for You?

Table 1: FDM Supported Models

Device Model Minimum FTD Software Version

ASA 5508-X, 5516-X 6.1

ASA 5525-X, 5545-X, 5555-X 6.1

ASA 5506-X, 5506H-X, 5506W-X, 5512-X 6.1

ASA 5515-X 6.1

New Features in FDM/FTD 6.2

Logging Into the System

Logging Into the FDM

Before you begin

Logging Into the Command Line Interface (CLI)

Changing Your Password

Step 2 Click the Password tab.

Setting User Profile Preferences

Creating Local User Accounts for the FTD CLI

Step 2 Create the user account.

> configure user add joecool config

• configure user aging username max_days warn_days

Step 4 Manage user accounts as necessary.

Setting Up the System

Before you begin

Step 1 Connect the Interfaces, on page 9